Primavera P6 Project Management Refe

Primavera® P6™ Project
Management
Reference Manual
Copyright © Primavera 1999 - 2007. All rights reserved.
While reasonable efforts have been made to ensure the accuracy of this document, Primavera assumes no
liability resulting from any omission or inaccuracies in this document or from use of the information obtained
herein. Primavera reserves the right to make changes to any products described herein to improve reliability,
function, or design, and reserves the right to revise this document and to make changes from time to time in
content hereof with no obligation to notify any person of revisions or changes. Primavera does not assume any
liability arising out of the application or use of any product described herein; neither does it convey license under
its patent rights or the rights of others.
Please send your comments to:
Primavera Systems, Inc.

Three Bala Plaza West
Bala Cynwyd, PA 19004
Telephone: 1-610-667-8600
FAX: 1-610-667-7894
World Wide Web site: http://www.primavera.com
Computer Software Copyrights: The Primavera software products described in this document may not be
copied, reproduced, modified, or distributed in any manner without Primavera's express written permission.
Use and Disclosure Restrictions: The software described in this document is the property of Primavera
Systems. It is furnished under a license agreement and may be used and/or disclosed only in accordance with the
terms of the agreement.
U.S. Government Restricted Rights: If the Software is acquired for or on behalf of the United States of
America, its agencies and/or instrumentalities (“U.S. Government”), it is provided with RESTRICTED
RIGHTS. The Software and accompanying documentation are “commercial computer software” and
“commercial computer software documentation,” respectively, pursuant to 48 C.F.R. 12.212 and 227.7202, and
“restricted computer software” pursuant to 48 C.F.R. 52.227-19(a), as applicable. Use, modification, repro-
duction, release, performance, display or disclosure of the Software and accompanying documentation by the
U.S. Government are subject to restrictions as set forth in this Agreement and pursuant to 48 C.F.R. 12.212,
52.227-14 (Alternate III), 52.227-19, 227.7202, and 1852.227-86, as applicable.
Trademarks: Primavera, the Primavera sundial logo, P3, P3e, P3e/c, Primavera Enterprise, Primavera Evolve,
Primavera Expedition, Primavera Project Planner, Primavera TeamPlay, Primavision, PrimeContract, and
SureTrak are either trademarks, registered trademarks, or service marks of Primavera in the United States and/or
in other countries. All other trademarks mentioned herein are the property of their respective owners.
Certain products included in the software require the following disclosures:
Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file except in compliance
with the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0
Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software distributed under the License is distributed on
an "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
See the License for the specific language governing permissions and limitations under the License.
*****
The Apache Software License, Version 1.1
Copyright (c) 2000 The Apache Software Foundation. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3 The end-user documentation included with the redistribution, if any, must include the following acknowl-
edgment:
"This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation
(http://www.apache.org/)."
Alternately, this acknowledgment may appear in the software itself, if and wherever such third-party
acknowledgments normally appear.
4 The names "Apache" and "Apache Software Foundation" must not be used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact
[email protected].
5 Products derived from this software may not be called "Apache", nor may "Apache" appear in their name,
without prior written permission of the Apache Software Foundation.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE APACHE
SOFTWARE FOUNDATION OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
*****
Copyright 1994-2006 Sun Microsystems, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
■ Redistribution of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
■ Redistribution in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
Neither the name of Sun Microsystems, Inc. or the names of contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
This software is provided "AS IS," without a warranty of any kind. ALL EXPRESS OR IMPLIED CONDI-
TIONS, REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES, INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT, ARE
HEREBY EXCLUDED. SUN MICROSYSTEMS, INC. ("SUN") AND ITS LICENSORS SHALL NOT BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES SUFFERED BY LICENSEE AS A RESULT OF USING, MODIFYING OR
DISTRIBUTING THIS SOFTWARE OR ITS DERIVATIVES. IN NO EVENT WILL SUN OR ITS
LICENSORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOST REVENUE, PROFIT OR DATA, OR FOR DIRECT, INDIRECT,
SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES, HOWEVER CAUSED AND
REGARDLESS OF THE THEORY OF LIABILITY, ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO
USE THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF SUN HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGES.
You acknowledge that this software is not designed, licensed or intended for use in the design, construction,
operation or maintenance of any nuclear facility.
*****
Portions copyright (c) Macromedia, Inc. All rights reserved.

*****
Copyright (c) 2002-2006 JGoodies Karsten Lentzsch. All rights reserved.
■ Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
■ Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
■ Neither the name of JGoodies Karsten Lentzsch nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
*****
Printed in the United States of America

vii
Table of Contents
Preface............................................................................................... xiii
Primavera Products ............................................................................................ xiv
Using Documentation and Help........................................................................ xvii
Where to Get Support ......................................................................................... xx
Part 1: Overview and Configuration

Understanding Project Management .................................................3
Why Use Project Portfolio Management? ............................................................ 4
Your Role in the Enterprise................................................................................... 5
Project Management Process Overview ............................................................... 8
Planning, Controlling, and Managing Projects................................................... 10
Quick Tour..........................................................................................13
Getting Started .................................................................................................... 14
Selecting a Language.......................................................................................... 17
The Workspace ................................................................................................... 18
What Is a Layout?............................................................................................... 21
Customizing Displays......................................................................................... 23
Sample Layouts .................................................................................................. 25
Using Wizards..................................................................................................... 27
Defining Administrative Preferences and Categories.....................29
Defining Default Settings ................................................................................... 30
Defining Standard Categories and Values .......................................................... 40
Defining Currencies............................................................................................ 46
Setting User Preferences....................................................................49
Formatting Time Units........................................................................................ 50
Formatting Dates ................................................................................................ 52
Setting View Currency and Symbols .................................................................. 53
Setting Mail Preferences..................................................................................... 54
Implementing Wizards........................................................................................ 55
viii Table of Contents
Creating a Log of Tasks and

Setting Startup, Group and Sort, and Column Options..................................... 56
Changing Your Password .................................................................................... 58
Setting Profile and Spreadsheet Data Options .................................................... 59
Setting Calculation Options for Resource and Role Assignments...................... 61
Selecting Startup Filters ...................................................................................... 63
Part 2: Structuring Projects

Setting Up the Enterprise Project Structure ...................................67
Enterprise Project Structure Overview................................................................ 68
Setting Up the Enterprise Project Structure ........................................................ 75
Adding a New Project to the Enterprise Project Structure.................................. 77
Using Project Architect ....................................................................................... 79
Working with the Enterprise Project Structure ................................................... 84
Defining Enterprise Project Structure Details..................................................... 89
Setting Up the Organizational Breakdown Structure ....................97
The Enterprise OBS ............................................................................................ 98
Viewing an OBS................................................................................................ 101
Setting Up an OBS ............................................................................................ 103
Editing OBS Elements ...................................................................................... 106
Defining Resources and Roles.........................................................109
Resources Overview.......................................................................................... 110
Viewing and Adding Resources ........................................................................ 111
Defining Resource Shifts .................................................................................. 118
Defining and Assigning Resource Codes and Values ....................................... 119
Setting Up Roles ............................................................................................... 122
Assigning Roles to Resources........................................................................... 127
Defining Custom Resource Curves ................................................................... 129
Reviewing Work Breakdown Structures .......................................133
The Enterprise WBS ......................................................................................... 134
Viewing a WBS................................................................................................. 136
Grouping by WBS Path..................................................................................... 138
Adding WBS Elements and Assigning Properties ............................................ 139
Using WBS Milestones ..................................................................................... 143
Assigning WBS Category Values...................................................................... 145
Defining Earned Value Settings for Specific WBS Elements ........................... 146
Assigning Estimation Weights to WBS Elements ............................................ 148
Defining Budgets ..............................................................................151
Top-Down Budgeting........................................................................................ 152
Establishing Budgets......................................................................................... 155
Establishing a Monthly Spending Plan ............................................................. 157
Primavera
Table of Contents ix
Tracking Budget Changes................................................................................. 159

Establishing Funding ........................................................................................ 161
Tracking and Analyzing Budgets ..................................................................... 164
Establishing Project Codes..............................................................165
Defining and Assigning Project Codes............................................................. 166
Grouping, Summarizing, and Filtering by Codes............................................. 170
Working With User-Defined Fields ................................................175
Creating User-Defined Fields ........................................................................... 176
Working with User-Defined Fields................................................................... 178
Working with Indicators ................................................................................... 180
Creating Calendars..........................................................................183
Adding Calendars ............................................................................................. 184
Modifying Calendars ........................................................................................ 186
Part 3: Implementing the Schedule

Establishing Activity Codes ............................................................193
Creating Activity Codes and Values ................................................................. 194
Grouping and Summarizing by Codes.............................................................. 198
Working with Activities ...................................................................201
Activities Overview .......................................................................................... 202
Adding Activities.............................................................................................. 203
Defining General Activity Information ............................................................ 205
Defining Schedule Information ........................................................................ 209
Establishing Relationships................................................................................ 213
Displaying Activity Details for Assignments ................................................... 218
Assigning Resources and Roles........................................................................ 219
Assigning Resource Curves to Resource or Role Assignments ....................... 223
Manually Planning Future Period Assignments ............................................... 224
Assigning Activity Codes and Adding Expenses ............................................. 230
Viewing Activity Feedback and Posting Resource Notes................................. 232
Assigning Work Products and Documents ....................................................... 234
Adding Steps..................................................................................................... 235
Creating and Assigning Activity Step Templates ............................................. 237
Viewing Activity Summaries............................................................................ 240
Viewing Contract Manager Documents............................................................ 241
Using Global Change........................................................................................ 242
Working with Cost Accounts and Project Expenses.....................247
Cost Account and Expense Overview .............................................................. 248
Setting Up a Cost Account Structure................................................................ 249
Adding Expenses and Entering Cost Information ............................................ 253
Defining Expense Details ................................................................................. 256
Analyzing Costs................................................................................................ 258
Primavera
x Table of Contents
Performing Top-down Estimation ..................................................261

Performing Top-down Estimation..................................................................... 262
Applying Saved Top-Down Estimates To a Project .......................................... 266
Part 4: Updating and Managing the Schedule

Managing Baselines .........................................................................271
Creating and Maintaining Baselines ................................................................. 272
Assigning Baselines to Projects ........................................................................ 276
Comparing Current and Baseline Schedules..................................................... 278
Updating Baselines ........................................................................................... 280
Updating, Scheduling, and Leveling...............................................283
The Update Process........................................................................................... 284
Choosing a Method of Updating ....................................................................... 286
Highlighting Activities for Updating ................................................................ 288
Updating Progress for Spotlighted Activities ................................................... 290
Estimating Progress Automatically................................................................... 292
Updating Using Timesheets .............................................................................. 295
Updating Activities Manually ........................................................................... 297
Interrupting Activity Progress........................................................................... 303
Applying Actuals .............................................................................................. 305
Storing Period Performance (Past Period Actuals) ........................................... 307
Scheduling Projects........................................................................................... 311
Leveling Resources ........................................................................................... 317
Recalculating Resource and Role Assignment Costs ....................................... 321
Managing Resource Assignments ..................................................................... 323
Summarizing Projects .....................................................................325
Setting Summarization Options ........................................................................ 326
Summarizing Project Data ................................................................................ 327
Managing Risks................................................................................335
Adding Risks..................................................................................................... 336
Calculating Exposure Values ............................................................................ 338
Calculating a Risk’s Impact .............................................................................. 339
Creating and Deleting Risk Types..................................................................... 340
Customizing Risk Layouts ................................................................................ 341
Project Issues and Thresholds ........................................................343
Adding Issues.................................................................................................... 344
Assigning Tracking Layouts to Issues .............................................................. 348
Using the Issue Navigator ................................................................................. 349
Adding Thresholds ............................................................................................ 350
Primavera
Table of Contents xi
Threshold Parameter Definitions ...................................................................... 353

Monitoring Thresholds ..................................................................................... 357
Assigning Tracking Layouts to Thresholds ...................................................... 358
Maintaining a Project’s Document Library ..................................359
Viewing a Document Library and
Adding/Deleting Work Products and Documents........................................... 360
Specifying Document Location References ..................................................... 362
Assigning Work Products and Documents ....................................................... 363
Tracking Projects .............................................................................365
Creating Tracking Layouts ............................................................................... 366
Working with Tracking Layouts ....................................................................... 369
Customizing Tracking Layouts......................................................................... 370
Grouping, Sorting, and Filtering Data in Tracking Layouts............................. 372
Comparing Projects with Schedule Comparison ..........................375
Schedule Comparison Overview ...................................................................... 376
Comparing Projects/Baselines .......................................................................... 377
Comparison Data .............................................................................................. 384
Creating and Using Reflections ......................................................391
Reflection Overview ......................................................................................... 392
Creating and Using Reflections ........................................................................ 393
Reflection Guidelines ....................................................................................... 396
Checking Projects In and Out ........................................................397
Managing Remote Projects............................................................................... 398
Checking Out Projects ...................................................................................... 399
Checking In Projects......................................................................................... 401
Part 5: Customizing Projects

Working with Layouts .....................................................................407
Layout Types .................................................................................................... 408
Creating, Opening, and Saving Layouts ........................................................... 414
Exporting and Importing Layouts..................................................................... 415
Copying and Pasting Resource Spreadsheet Data to Microsoft Excel ............. 416
Grouping, Sorting, and Filtering Data...........................................417
Grouping Data .................................................................................................. 418
Sorting Data ...................................................................................................... 422
Filtering Data .................................................................................................... 423
Primavera
xii Table of Contents
Customizing Layouts .......................................................................427

Modifying Columns .......................................................................................... 428
Adjusting the Timescale.................................................................................... 431
Formatting Gantt Charts.................................................................................... 434
Formatting Activity Network Layouts .............................................................. 442
Modifying Resource and Activity Usage Profile Settings ................................ 446
Customizing Reports .......................................................................455
Reports Overview.............................................................................................. 456
Opening Reports ............................................................................................... 457
Creating and Modifying Reports....................................................................... 458
Using the Report Editor .................................................................................... 461
Adding Data Sources and Rows to Reports ...................................................... 465
Adding Text Cells to Reports ............................................................................ 469
Sorting Report Data Sources............................................................................. 477
Customizing a Report with the Report Editor: an Example.............................. 478
Using Report Groups ........................................................................................ 488
Setting Up Batch Reports.................................................................................. 489
Printing Layouts and Reports.........................................................491
Defining Page Settings ...................................................................................... 492
Previewing Layouts and Reports....................................................................... 496
Printing Layouts and Reports............................................................................ 497
Publishing Layouts and Reports in HTML Format........................................... 499
Publishing a Project on the World Wide Web...............................501
Project Web Site Overview ............................................................................... 502
Publishing a Project Web Site ........................................................................... 504
Customizing the Appearance of a Project Web Site ......................................... 506
Publishing Activity and Tracking Layouts........................................................ 507
Linking the Project Management
and Contract Manager Modules ..................................................509
Linking the Project Management Module to Contract Manager ...................... 510
Linking a Project Management Project to a Contract Manager Project ........... 512
Importing Contract Manager Data to
a Project Management Module Project ........................................................... 514
Index..................................................................................................517
Primavera
Preface xiii
Preface
In this preface Primavera’s Project Management module
is comprehensive, multiproject planning
Primavera Products
and control software, built on SQL,
Using Documentation and Help
Oracle, and SQL Server Express server
Where to Get Support
databases for enterprise-wide project
management scalability. The module can
stand alone for project and resource
management, or it can be used with
companion Primavera products to
manage your project portfolios.
Primavera - Project Management

xiv Preface
Primavera Products
Primavera provides an integrated project portfolio management (PPM)
solution consisting of role-specific tools to satisfy each team member’s
needs, responsibilities, and skills. This solution uses standard Windows
interfaces, client/server architecture, Web-enabled technology, and stand-
alone (SQL Server Express) or network-based (Oracle and Microsoft SQL
Server) databases. Primavera offers the following software components:
Project Management The Project Management module enables users

to track and analyze performance. It is a multiuser, multiproject system
with scheduling and resource control capabilities supporting multi-tiered
project hierarchies, resource scheduling with a focus on roles and skills,
recording of actual data, customizable views, and user-definable data.
The module is ideal for organizations that need to simultaneously manage

multiple projects and support multiuser access across a department or the
entire enterprise. It supports an enterprise project structure (EPS) with an
unlimited number of projects, activities, baselines, resources, work
breakdown structures (WBS), organizational breakdown structures (OBS),
user-defined codes, and critical-path-method (CPM) scheduling and
resource leveling. Large-scale implementations for enterprise-wide project
portfolio management use it with Oracle or SQL Server as the project
database. For smaller implementations, you can use SQL Server Express.
The module also provides centralized resource management. This includes

resource timesheet approval and the ability to communicate with project
resources who use the Timesheets module. In addition, the module
provides integrated risk management, issue tracking, and management by
threshold. The tracking feature enables users to perform dynamic cross-
project rollups of cost, schedule, and earned value. Project work products
and documents can be assigned to activities and managed centrally. The
Report Wizard creates customized reports that extract specific data from
its database.
Methodology Management The Methodology Management module

is a system for authoring and storing methodologies, or project plan
templates, in a central location. Project managers can select, combine, and
tailor methodologies to create custom project plans. These customized
methodologies can be imported into the Project Management module
using the Project Architect wizard and used as templates for new projects.
In this way, your organization can continually improve and refine
methodology activities, estimates, and other information with each new
project.

Preface xv
Timesheets Primavera also provides a Web-based interproject

communication and timekeeping system. As a team-level tool for project
participants, Timesheets helps team members focus on the work at hand
with a simple cross-project to-do list of their upcoming assignments. It
also provides views of project changes and timecards for manager
approval. Because team members use this module to enter up-to-the-
minute information about their assignments and record time against their
workloads, project leaders can make crucial project decisions with the
confidence that they have the most current information possible.
Primavera’s Web application The Primavera Web application

provides browser-based access to project, portfolio, and resource data
across the enterprise. Every web user can create customized dashboards
that provide an individualized and focused view of the specific projects
and categories of project data that are most relevant to their role in
managing project portfolios, projects, and resources. Project Workspaces
and Workgroups extend the model of customizable, focused data views by
enabling designated project team members to create a uniform team view
of data that relates to one specific project or to a subset of activities within
a project. The Primavera Web application provides access to a wide range
of data views and features that enable Web users to manage their projects
from initial concept review and approval through to completion.
Primavera Integration API The Primavera Integration API is a Java-

based API and server that enables developers to create client code that can
seamlessly access Primavera’s project management functionality.
Software Development Kit The Primavera Software Development

Kit (SDK) enables users to integrate the data in the Project Management
module database with external databases and applications. It provides
access to the schema and to stored procedures that encapsulate business
logic. The SDK supports the Open Database Connectivity (ODBC)
standard and ODBC-compliant interfaces, such as OLE-DB and JDBC,
for connecting to the project management database. The SDK must be
installed on any computer that needs to integrate with the database.
Schedule Comparison Schedule Comparison provides the capability

to compare two projects, or a project and an associated baseline, to
determine what data has been added, deleted, or modified from the
schedules. Based on the data fields you select for comparison, this feature
creates a project plan comparison report in one of three file formats.
Schedule Comparison is automatically installed with the Project
Management module. You can access it from the Tools menu.

xvi Preface
ProjectLink ProjectLink is a plug-in that enables Microsoft Project

(MSP) users to work in the MSP environment while being connected to
Primavera's enterprise features. The functionality enables MSP users to
open/save projects from/to the Project Management module database from
within the MSP application. Moreover, MSP users have the ability to
invoke Primavera's resource management within the MSP environment.
ProjectLink benefits organizations that have a substantial amount of
project data stored in MSP but require some users to have the additional
functionality and optimized data organization available within Primavera
applications.

Preface xvii
Using Documentation and Help

For a list of new features This book guides you through the process of planning and controlling
included in this version of the projects using the Project Management module. Read the first chapter to
module, refer to the What’s
New in Project Management? become familiar with the process of PPM, then follow the steps in each
topic of the Help. successive chapter to build projects and project components, set up codes
and documents, manage the resources required to complete the project
plan, update projects as work gets underway, and report results throughout
the project life cycle. This manual is organized as follows:
Part 1: Overview and Configuration Provides an overview of

project portfolio management, simple steps for getting started quickly, and
information about the standard layouts you can use to view project data.
This part also provides a quick tour, including instructions for configuring
administrative (module-wide) and user workstation preferences.
Part 2: Structuring Projects Includes the basics about the enterprise

project structure (EPS) and describes how to set up this structure, add new
projects to build the hierarchy, use and navigate the EPS, open existing
projects, and define project properties. In addition, Part 2 describes how to
■ Use an organizational breakdown structure (OBS) in conjunction with
the EPS to ensure that each project is effectively managed and that
corresponding security measures are in place
■ Establish the personnel and equipment required to perform the work,
define unlimited hierarchical resource codes for grouping and rollups,
and create a standard set of roles based on skill requirements that you
can assign to resources in all projects
■ Establish and use a work breakdown structure (WBS) as the basis for
the budget and spending information, specifications, and milestones
within the EPS
■ Establish project budgets and the funding sources behind them,
monthly spending plans that show how budgets are distributed
throughout project life cycles, and layouts that track and analyze
variance as projects progress
■ Set up project codes to categorize projects for organizing, grouping,
selecting, and summarizing
■ Define custom fields that enable you to track and report project data
in fields customized for your business needs
■ Create calendars that define national and organizational holidays,
project-specific work/nonworkdays, and resource vacation days

xviii Preface
Part 3: Implementing the Schedule Describes how to define a set of

codes you can use to categorize project activities for organizing, grouping,
selecting, and summarizing. Part 3 also explains how to
■ Establish the activities that compose projects and apply durations,
dates, resource information, activity types, activity relationships, and
other activity details
■ Set up the expenses, or nonresource costs, associated with a project,
and create global cost accounts to track activity costs and earned
value according to your organization’s specific cost account codes
■ Assign estimation weights to WBS elements and activities to perform
top-down estimation
Part 4: Updating and Managing the Schedule Describes how to

establish baseline plans against which you can track project cost, schedule,
and performance data. Part 4 also explains how to
■ Create baselines to use for comparison, summarization, and earned
value reporting
■ Update projects by applying actual dates directly to activities or by
using timesheet data from the Timesheets module, and how to
schedule and level projects
■ Summarize and save project data “on-the-fly” or at a regularly
scheduled interval you specify
■ Establish issues, or known problems within a project plan, either
manually or by defining project thresholds, which monitor project
data according to measures you specify
■ Calculate the effect that a project risk—a concern or uncertainty about
a project or one of its components—will have on a project’s schedule,
costs, and durations
■ Catalog and track all project-related documents and deliverables, and
track the schedule by setting up additional layouts to monitor project
status
■ Compare projects and baselines to determine the project data that has
been updated
■ Check projects in and out of the module to maintain the most up-to-
date project data possible throughout the enterprise

Preface xix
Part 5: Customizing Projects Describes how to customize layouts

for analysis and easier data entry, and to display specific information
about projects. Part 5 also describes how to produce reports that detail or
summarize project information and answer key questions that arise as the
project progresses. In addition, this part discusses how to publish a project
on the World Wide Web and how to link and share data with Primavera’s
Contract Manager module.
Project Management Help Provides an extensive online help system

to supplement the documentation. Use Help to access general information
about program options, detailed descriptions of windows and dialog
boxes, and step-by-step instructions for specific project tasks. Help also
includes Hint Help for column values in various windows. Access Hint
Help by clicking the Display Options bar, choosing Hint Help, and then
clicking a value in a column.

xx Preface
Where to Get Support

If you have a question about using Primavera products that you or your
network administrator cannot resolve with information in the documen-
tation or Help, contact Primavera Customer Support at the times and
locations listed below.
Please provide your Primavera product serial number when contacting

Primavera. Each interaction is logged to help Primavera resolve your
questions quickly.
Office Time Zone Hours Telephone FAX E-mail Address*

Bala Cynwyd, ET 8:00–8:00 +1-610-668-3030 +1-610-667-0652 [email protected]
Pennsylvania, (Mon–Fri)
USA 9:00–2:00
(Sat)
London, GMT 8:30–6:30 +44-20-8563-5555 +44-20-8563-5543 [email protected]
England, UK (Mon–Thur)
8:30–5:30
(Fri)
Hong Kong GMT +8 8:00–5:00 +852-2111-8299 +852-2111-9477 [email protected]
(Mon–Fri)
*Primavera's Web site at http:/www.primavera.com/customer/index.asp provides support and product information,
such as knowledgebases, file downloads, user group and newsgroup information, and a product enhancement
request form.
In the United States, Primavera periodically and randomly

monitors technical support calls to ensure that you receive the
highest quality support.
All Primavera products are backed by comprehensive support and training.
To request product literature in the United States, contact your local

dealer, call Primavera at 1-610-667-8600, or send your request via e-mail
to [email protected]. In the United Kingdom, call 44-20-8563-5500
or e-mail your request to [email protected].

Part 1
Overview and
Configuration
In this part Understanding Project Management
Quick Tour
Defining Administrative Preferences and
Categories
Setting User Preferences
R ead this part to learn more about project portfolio
management.
Understanding Project Management discusses Primavera’s

enterprise approach to managing projects. It also defines the
various enterprise-wide project management roles, explains
how these roles can use other Primavera applications to
achieve their project goals, and provides an overview of the
methods used to successfully manage and control projects.
Quick Tour introduces key project portfolio management

concepts and explains how to perform basic tasks, such as
opening a new project and using wizards.
Defining Administrative Preferences and Categories

explains how to apply a series of parameters and values that
apply to all projects.
The Setting User Preferences chapter explains how to

customize the module to fit your special needs.
Understanding Project Management 3
Understanding Project Management

Primavera software products are designed to
In this chapter support the project management needs of
organizations that manage large numbers of
Why Use Project Portfolio
Management? projects at one time.
Your Role in the Enterprise
These integrated applications use project
Project Management Process
Overview portfolio management (PPM) to support the
Planning, Controlling, and management needs of project teams in
Managing Projects different locations and at varying levels of the
enterprise.
This chapter provides an overview of PPM, the

roles used in PPM, and the basic concepts for
planning, managing, and controlling your
projects.

4 Part 1: Overview and Configuration
Why Use Project Portfolio Management?

Large businesses typically have hundreds—even thousands—of projects
underway at one time to create the new products and services that build
their future. These projects cross normal business hierarchies and chains
of command, making project portfolio management (PPM) an enterprise-
wide challenge. The pressure to complete projects on time and within
budget, and maintain a competitive edge, is driving corporations to
develop and implement PPM processes. They are moving away from a
traditional functional structure to a multiple-project organization that must
achieve clear, but urgent goals, using limited, shared resources, and they
need the fastest business payback from those projects to realize potential
revenue and increase shareholder equity.
PPM provides comprehensive information on all projects in an

organization, from executive-level summaries to detailed plans by project.
Individuals across all levels of the company can analyze, record, and
communicate reliable information and make timely, informed decisions
that support their corporate mission. By putting the right tool in the right
hands, PPM enables an organization to
■ Make strategic business decisions

■ Control the minute detail that is necessary to finish projects
■ Understand current resource demands, set priorities, and evaluate
long-term staffing requirements
■ Use skilled resources effectively and productively
■ Reorganize projects to fit shifting priorities without sacrificing quality

Your Role in the Enterprise

By definition, PPM must meet the needs of several types of users. The
following section describes the enterprise roles as they typically apply to
the Primavera applications. Roles may vary or overlap depending on the
organization.
Network administrators Network administrators configure an

enterprise’s network environment (local- and wide-area networks) for
optimal performance with Primavera applications. They install and
maintain the server and client components of the applications. In addition,
they manage user access to enterprise data and develop and maintain a
comprehensive security policy to ensure that PPM data are protected from
unauthorized access, theft, or damage.
Network administrators ensure that the hardware and software supporting

Primavera applications function reliably by
■ Setting up and maintaining the network to ensure reliable connections
and the fastest possible data transfer
■ Creating and maintaining accurate lists of network resources and
users so that each has a unique network identity
Database administrators Database administrators (DBAs) are

responsible for setting up, managing, and assigning access rights for the
Primavera database. They set and oversee rules governing use of corporate
databases, maintain data integrity, and set interoperability standards.
Database administrators ensure reliable access to the Primavera

database by
■ Installing, configuring, and upgrading database server software and
related products as required
■ Creating and implementing the database
■ Implementing and maintaining database security, including creating
and maintaining users, roles, and privileges for the database
■ Monitoring database performance and tuning as needed
■ Planning for growth and changes and establishing and maintaining
backup and recovery policies and procedures

Operations executives Operations executives are responsible for

strategic planning and ongoing performance analysis. They use the Project
Management module and Primavera’s Web Portfolio Management
application to analyze schedule, resource, and cost data across projects.
Senior executives may be responsible for

■ Prioritizing projects
■ The profit/loss for a specific business entity
■ Funding and go/no-go decisions about projects
■ Strategic planning over the future of the business or division
Project controls coordinators Project controls coordinators are

responsible for ensuring that Primavera applications are implemented
properly and operate smoothly. They play a key role during
implementation by
■ Working with operations executives and program/project managers to
set up methodologies in the Methodology Management module
■ Working with operations executives and program/project managers to
structure project, organizational breakdown structure (OBS), and
resource hierarchies, set up basic calendars, and define enterprise-
wide custom fields and codes in the Project Management module
■ Working with the project administrator to create user accounts and
user groups for the Project Management module
■ Assigning security rights to users in the Project Management module
Program managers Program managers oversee several high-level

project managers; they are responsible for multiple projects and use the
Project Management and Methodology Management modules, along with
Primavera’s Web application to:
■ Perform cross-project analysis
■ Manage projects to on-time and on-budget completion
■ Prioritize resources across projects
■ Plan projects before they are funded

Project managers Project managers manage multiple small, repetitive

projects or a single, complex project. They are responsible for on-time/on-
budget completion of the projects and use the Project Management module
and Primavera Web application to
■ Allocate specific named resources to a project in conjunction with the
functional manager of those resources
■ Communicate project information both up and down the chain of
command
■ Manage resources related to the project
Resource/cost managers Resource managers allocate resources

across projects and distribute their workloads. They are responsible for
resource planning, including recruiting, hiring, and training resources, and
they may be responsible for loading resource information in the Project
Management, Methodology Management, and Web Resource
Management modules. Cost managers perform detailed financial analysis
of projects, handle project billing, and integrate financial information
within the company.
Team leaders Team leaders manage the work for a portion of a larger
project. They are managers who produce work and manage a team, and
they often use the Project Management and Timesheets modules, and the
Primavera Web application, to prioritize short-term tasks or objectives,
typically when the duration is less than the planning period of the project.
Team members Team members are trained in a specific skill required

on a project. They work with their manager to develop activities and
durations for incorporation into the schedule. Once activities are added to
the schedule, team members update them using the Timesheets module to
indicate the work they performed during designated accounting periods.
Team members may also use personalized dashboards in the Primavera
Web application to quickly access their projects, activities, documents, and
events.

Project Management Process Overview

When contractors develop plans for a building, one of the first steps is
laying a foundation. This is also a true for building projects using the
Project Management module. The hierarchical structuring of data serves
as the foundation before the addition of actual project data. The following
is a suggested sequence for setting up these structures:
■ Set up the organizational breakdown structure (OBS), which is the
hierarchical arrangement of your company’s management structure,
either as roles or individuals.
■ Set up the enterprise project structure (EPS), which is the hierarchical
structure that identifies the company-wide projects and enables
organization and management of those projects in your organization.
■ Set up a resource hierarchy that reflects your organization’s resource
structure and supports the assignment of resources to activities.
■ For each project, set up the work breakdown structure (WBS), which
is a hierarchical arrangement of the products and services produced
during and by a project.
For information about setting Project controls coordinators, working with operations executives and
up security, see the program/project managers, structure the OBS and EPS hierarchies. Setting
Administrator’s Guide.
up the OBS first enables association of the responsible managers with
their areas of the EPS—either nodes or projects—when the EPS is
structured. User access and privileges to nodes and projects within the
EPS hierarchy are also implemented via a responsible OBS, so the
security profiles that monitor data access by project participants can be
established early on in the process.
Once the OBS is established, the EPS can be set up. An EPS can consist of
multiple root nodes, which enable particular types of projects to be
grouped together, such as project templates or high-risk projects. Within
each root node, you can further break down an EPS into multiple EPS
nodes, such as Capital Improvement projects and Manufacturing projects,
to categorize the types of templates projects.

The WBS acts as a continuation of the EPS for the individual projects in
the enterprise. A WBS provides organization and control of project and
activity information through a hierarchy of WBS elements. When you
create projects, the Project Management module automatically creates a
WBS element at the same hierarchy level and with the same name as the
project. You can set anticipated project dates, budgets, and spending plans
for a WBS at a high level to indicate when the work should occur and how
much its planned budget and monthly spending will be before any projects
are added to the EPS. In addition, you can use the pre-established budget
amounts and funding information you set for WBS elements for their
project and activity counterparts.
For details on setting up these The following example represents how the OBS, EPS, and WBS
structures, see the applicable structures interrelate within one branch of the EPS.
chapters in Part 2.
The responsible manager

used for the root node in the
EPS branch is used as the
default for the EPS nodes
and projects for that branch;
you can change the
assignment(s).
The WBS extends beyond

the project level—all
activities in the project
have a WBS association.

Planning, Controlling, and Managing Projects

Before implementing Primavera to schedule projects, team members and
other project participants should understand the processes involved in
project management and the associated recommendations that help
smooth the Primavera implementation that supports your corporate
mission.
If you were driving to a place you had never seen, would you get in the car
without directions or a map? Probably not. More than likely you’d take the
time to plan your trip, consider alternate routes, and estimate your time of
arrival. Planning the drive before you even left would help your trip be
more successful. And, along the way, should you encounter road blocks or
traffic delays, you would have already identified alternate ways to reach
your destination.
Project management follows the same methodology and purpose—to

achieve each project’s goals, you need to plan them in advance. Good
project management is no longer an option in today’s corporate world. It is
a critical tool to help your company stay on target and accomplish its
goals.
Simply stated, project management is the process of achieving set goals

within the constraints of time, budget, and staffing restrictions. It allows
you to get the most out of your available resources. Resources include
■ People
■ Materials
■ Money
■ Equipment
■ Information
■ Facilities
■ Roles
Project portfolio management factors in all of these variables across

multiple projects, enabling project managers and company executives to
see an accurate picture of how each project’s resource use affects other
projects.

The process of project management is guided by three key principles:

■ Planning
■ Controlling
■ Managing
Planning a project The first step in project management is to define

your project.
1 What is the scope of the work? What activities will make up the
project and what is their relationship to each other? You’ll also want
to identify the major milestones that will help you monitor the
project’s progress.
2 What is the project duration? What are the dates when the project will
begin and end?
3 What resources are available to the project? Beyond labor, think
about all the types of resources you will require.
4 Who will perform what tasks? Determining your labor resources and
their available workhours is a key part of building a successful
project. You’ll need to plan for downtime and holidays and determine
the regular workweek for various staffing types.
5 How much will the project cost? What are the costs per resource? Are
there any hidden project costs?
6 What is the estimated budget? Establishing a project budget estimate
in advance helps you monitor possible cost overruns.
The answers to these questions form the framework of your project.
Controlling a project Once you have built your project and estimated
your budgeting needs, you save this original plan as a baseline, or target
schedule, to help you control the project. A baseline provides a solid point
of reference as your schedule changes over time. It allows you to compare
the original schedule to the current one and identify significant changes
and develop contingency plans.
You control a project to keep it heading in the right direction. You’ll want
to track work progress and costs, compare them to your baseline, and then
recommend what actions should be taken.

Effective project control reaps many benefits. It allows you to keep a close
eye on possible problems before they become critical. It lets the project
team and senior management view cost and scheduling timeframes based
on the reality of the schedule.
Managing a project The process of guiding a project from start to

finish is the responsibility of a project manager. A good project manager
wears many hats, acting at various times as a motivator, communicator,
coordinator, and advisor. As you control the project’s progress, it is your
job to keep your team aware of changes to the schedule and possible
consequences. In many ways, you are the project’s ambassador, ensuring
that your project organization is carrying out its responsibilities for the
best possible outcome.
To be an effective project manager also requires consistency when you

update your projects. Select a day each week, or biweekly, when you will
regularly update projects. This regular update will include progress on
values such as
■ Dates on which activities started or finished
■ Dates when resources are consumed
■ Changes to resource rates
Determine a standard policy for the update and scheduling procedure, and
for reporting progress.
The Project Management module provides many tools to assist you in

reporting progress to both team members and senior management. Use the
Project Web Site option to create a central location where team members
can view project progress. Consider the many system reports as a means
for communicating change. In addition, senior management can use
Primavera’s Web Portfolio Management module to summarize project
data and easily capture a snapshot of how a project or group of projects is
progressing.

Quick Tour 13
Quick Tour
This quick tour introduces you to the Project
In this chapter Management module and its workspace. It
discusses the layout approach to viewing data
Getting Started
and includes samples to help you start creating
Selecting a Language
your own layouts. You will also learn the basic
The Workspace
steps for starting the module, opening a
What Is a Layout?
project, and using wizards to speed up your
Customizing Displays
work.
Sample Layouts
Using Wizards

Getting Started
The installation process guides you through setting up the module on your
computer. Refer to the Administrator’s Guide for detailed instructions.
Start the Project Management module Click Start, then choose
Programs, Primavera, Project Management.
Log in Before using the module, you must enter a valid login name and
password. If you do not know your login name and/or password, see your
system administrator.
4 Click to open the Welcome dialog

1 Type your login name. box.
2 Type your password.
3 Accept the database

shown, or select
another database.
Passwords are case-sensitive. Your login name and password

can be up to 20 characters in length.
Use the Welcome dialog box to create a new project, open an existing
project or the last open project, or open global data only.
Click to select a different portfolio
Starts the Create a New Project

wizard for adding a new project
Displays the Open Project dialog

box for selecting an existing
project or EPS node to open
Opens the last project you used
Opens the module without opening

or creating a project. Only global
data and administrative functions
are available.

Quick Tour 15
Mark the Do Not Show This Window Again checkbox if you do not want
the Welcome dialog box to appear each time you open the module. The
last project used at startup automatically opens. To turn this option back
on, choose Edit, User Preferences, then click the Application tab and mark
the Show the Welcome Dialog at Startup checkbox.
Select a portfolio Select a project portfolio to view a group of projects

that have a common characteristic. A portfolio can contain any number of
projects. Choose File, Select Project Portfolio to select a portfolio.
Click to change
your portfolio
display. You can
change the table
font, color, and
row height, or
expand/collapse
all bands.
Modify a portfolio Use the Project Portfolios dialog box to view and
change general information about the selected portfolio. You can also add
and delete portfolios. Choose Enterprise, Project Portfolios to set up
project portfolios.
The top portion of the Project Portfolios dialog box contains information
about all available portfolios, and the lower portion is divided into two
tabs that display specific information about a selected portfolio.

Select who can access the

selected portfolio. All Users
means the portfolio is
available to all users;
Current User means only
the current user can access
the portfolio; and Another
User means only the
specified user can access
the portfolio.
Click to add projects to the

selected portfolio.
Click to remove projects
from the selected portfolio.

Quick Tour 17
Selecting a Language
Use the Set Language dialog box to select the language in which to display
the information in menus, dialog boxes, and messages.
This option does not affect the data you enter; this information
appears exactly as typed.
Select a language To display the Set Language dialog box, choose

Tools, Set Language.

The Workspace
When you first open a project, the Home workspace displays the main
functions available in the module. For example, click Activities to focus
on activity data and customize layouts. The workspace for each main
window consists of a menu bar, navigation bar, directory bar, toolbar, and
command bar.
Use the toolbar to quickly access options that Use the navigation bar to move
pertain to the window displayed and to change between open windows, display and
the look of your layout. hide the directory, and open Help
quickly for a specific window.
Choose a menu
to open a list
of commands.
Use the directory to

switch your focus.
Click the buttons in the Command

bar to perform various functions
specific to the open window.

Quick Tour 19
Display the directory bar Use the directory to display windows

quickly. Choose View, Toolbars, Directory, to display or hide the
directory bar. To display or hide directory bar button text, choose View,
Toolbars, Directory Button Text.
Displays the Projects window. Use to globally review the global

enterprise project structure (EPS), and to work with individual
projects.
Displays the Resources window. Use to add or modify your
organization's resources.
Display data at the
enterprise level Displays the Reports window. Use to produce reports for all
projects or the open project.
Displays the Tracking window. Use to display and create
tracking layouts for the open project.
Displays the Work Breakdown Structure window. Use to add or

modify the open project's work breakdown structure (WBS).
Displays the Activities window. Use to work with activities in the

open project.
Displays the Resource Assignments window. Use to view, add,
and delete resources assigned to activities.
Display data at the
Displays the Work Products and Documents window. Use to
project level
create and assign work products/documents for the open project.
Displays the Project Expenses window. Use to work with

expense items for the open project.
Displays the Project Thresholds window. Use to add or delete

thresholds for the open project.
Displays the Project Issues window. Use to add or delete issues
for the open project, review issue history, and notify other team
members of issues.
Displays the Project Risks window. Use to add, delete, or
calculate risks for the open project.

Display the navigation bar Use the navigation bar to move between
open windows. You can also use the navigation bar to display and hide the
directory and open Help for the current window or dialog box. The
navigation bar is displayed or hidden when you choose View, Toolbars,
Navigation Bar. To display or hide navigation bar button text, choose
View, Toolbars, Navigation Bar Button Text.
Returns to the Home workspace
Displays the next window in a series of windows

you opened. The Forward button is available
only after you use the Back button to redisplay
a previous window.
Displays the last

window you opened
Displays or hides the directory

Opens Help
Use shortcut menus Instead of using standard menus and buttons,

you can also use the right mouse button to access frequently used
commands. To use shortcut menus, right-click an element or the white
space in any window, then choose the appropriate command.
Select multiple items To select a group of items that are next to each
other in the display, hold down the Shift key, click the first item in the
group, then click the last item in the group. To select multiple items that
are not next to each other in the display, hold down the Ctrl key, then click
each item you want to select.

Quick Tour 21
What Is a Layout?
A layout is a customizable view of project information. To customize a
layout to meet specific needs, you can choose from a wide range of project
information, columns, colors, fonts, and activity groupings, and you can
display these data in the top and/or bottom layouts. For example, show a
Gantt Chart in the top layout and an Activity Table in the bottom layout.
Each time you change the way data are presented in the top and bottom
layouts, you create a unique layout. The module automatically prompts
you to save a layout when you close it, allowing you to define a unique
name for it so you can use the layout again with the current project or a
different project.
You can also customize Activity Table displays activity information in spreadsheet format. Use
the Activity Table and this type of layout to quickly update a project. Use the Fill Down function
Gantt Chart in the Projects to quickly copy and paste contents of rows in the Activity Table. You can
window. use filters and group data to see only those activities that occur in your
current status cycle. You can customize Activity Table columns. You can
also sort, filter, and group activities in the Activity Table, as well as
change the font of the activity information and the color of the table
background. The Activity Table is displayed in the top and bottom
layouts.
For more information on Gantt Chart provides a graphical display of activity progress over the
using the Fill Down function course of the project. You can customize Gantt Chart bars, colors, labels,
in the Activity Table, see the
Help. and symbols. You can also sort, filter, and group activities in the Gantt
Chart. The Gantt Chart is displayed in the top and bottom layouts.
Activity Usage Spreadsheet displays units, costs, or earned value

data by activity over time. Use this type of layout to review per period and
rolled up activity resource/cost data. The Activity Usage Spreadsheet is
displayed in the top and bottom layouts.
Activity Network provides a graphical display of activities, including

logical relationships. You can specify which information you want to
display, and you can change the Activity Network colors and fonts. You
can also group and filter activities in the Activity Network. The Activity
Network is displayed in the top layout only.
Activity Details display detailed information for an activity you select

in either the Activity Table or Activity Network. You can also use
Activity Details to enter and edit an activity’s information, such as dates,
resource assignments, and predecessor and successor relationships.
Activity Details is displayed in the bottom layout only.

Resource Usage Spreadsheet displays resource data in spreadsheet

format. This approach is helpful when you are updating and maintaining
both your organization's resource hierarchy and individual resource
information. This spreadsheet is displayed in the bottom layout only.
Activity Usage Profile displays a time distribution of activity units

and costs in a Bar Chart format. You can customize all aspects of the
Activity Usage Profile display. You can also filter activity information in
the Activity Usage Profile. This profile is displayed in the bottom layout
only.
Resource Usage Profile displays a time distribution of resource units

and costs in relation to activities in a Bar Chart format. You can customize
all aspects of the Resource Usage Profile display. You can also filter
activity and resource information. This profile is displayed in the bottom
layout only. You can also display a stacked histogram for the profile in the
Activity window, and in the Resource Analysis type layout in the
Tracking window.
Trace Logic provides a graphical display of dependency relationships

for an activity you select in either the Activity Table or Activity Network.
Trace Logic is displayed in the bottom layout only.
Use toolbar buttons to

customize the layout.
To completely close the

lower layout and view
only the data in the top
layout, click the Show/
Hide Bottom Layout
button.
To hide or show more of

the information in each
pane, drag the horizontal
split bar between the two
layouts.
In the sample layout above, the top part of the window shows activity data
in a Gantt Chart, while the lower part displays the Activity Details.

Quick Tour 23
Customizing Displays
Most windows and dialog boxes include a Display or Layout Options bar
at the top of the screen that contains commands that enable you to
customize the current display. Click this bar to display a menu of the
commands available for that window or dialog box. You can also access
many of these commands from the View menu.
Click the Layout

Options bar to display a
menu of the options
available for the
Activities window.
For details about customizing You can switch your display from a hierarchical view to a list view when
layouts, see “Customizing displaying information, such as resources and the work breakdown
Layouts” on page 427.
structure, that is displayed in different levels. To switch a display from
hierarchy to list view, click the leftmost column label that appears in the
display.

An outline symbol ( )in the leftmost A triangle symbol ( ) in the leftmost

column label indicates a hierarchy view. column label indicates a list view.
After you change a display to list view, you can also sort the displayed
information by clicking any column label.

Quick Tour 25
Sample Layouts
The sample database included with the module provides standard layouts
that you can use with your own projects.
To open a sample layout, first open one of the projects from the sample
database or your own database in the Activities window, then choose
View, Layout, Open.
In this sample layout,

you can view your
project data based on
the project’s work
breakdown structure
(WBS).

This layout enables

you to compare your
current dates to your
baseline dates.
This Activity Network

layout enables you to
view your project
graphically, by prede-
cessor and successor
relationships. Click
the Activity Network
boxes to move along
the critical path of the
project, or right-click
to make changes to
the data.

Quick Tour 27
Using Wizards
Wizards are a great way to speed up your work. They quickly guide you
through repetitive steps, doing most of the work for you.
The module contains wizards for creating new projects, adding activities,
creating resources, and building reports.
If you prefer to work without

wizards, mark this checkbox
on the first dialog box of each
wizard or choose Edit, User
These navigation buttons step you
Preferences, Assistance,
through the wizard. Click Prev to
and set your choices in the
change your previous entries and Next
Wizards section.
to move forward.
You can specify whether you want wizards to help you add activities and
resources. Other wizards are also available to create new projects, export
and import project data, and define administrative preferences. Wizards
are discussed in more detail in the appropriate chapters of this manual or
in the Help.
Set wizard options Choose Edit, User Preferences. Click the

Assistance tab.

Mark to use the New

Resource Wizard.
Mark to use the New

Activity Wizard.
Navigate wizards To move between different wizard windows, click

Prev or Next. To save your changes and close the wizard at any time, click
Finish. To close the wizard without saving your changes, click Cancel.

Defining Administrative Preferences and Categories 29
Defining Administrative Preferences

and Categories
The Project Management module enables your
In this chapter organization to define a series of module-wide
parameters and values that apply to all projects
Defining Default Settings
in an enterprise project structure (EPS). Use
Defining Standard Categories and
Values these settings to customize the module to meet
Defining Currencies specific project management requirements and
standards. While all users can view these
settings, a user must have special security
privileges to edit them.
This chapter discusses the types of settings you

can specify: Administrative Preferences,
which are default settings; Administrative
Categories, which are standard values that
apply to all projects; and Currencies, which
consist of a base currency used to store costs in
the database and a view currency used to
display cost data in windows and dialog boxes.

Defining Default Settings

Use the Admin Preferences dialog box to specify default settings
established by the project controls coordinator. Choose Admin, Admin
Preferences.
General information Use the General tab to specify general default

options, such as the weekday on which the calendar week begins. You can
also change the character used to separate hierarchy levels in resource,
project, and activity codes; roles; cost accounts; and WBS elements.
The character
that separates
hierarchy levels in
roles, resource
codes, project
codes, cost
accounts, and
activity codes; it
is also the default
The first day of the week for
separator for
global, project, and
WBS codes in all
resource calendars
new projects. You
can enter a WBS
code separator
for specific
The default duration for new projects in the
activities in all projects; Settings tab of
simplifies the process of Project Details.
adding new activities
The start day of the week affects how all days in a week are
displayed in profiles, spreadsheets, and other layouts in which a
weekly timescale can be displayed. For example, if Wednesday
is selected as the starting day of the week, the week is
displayed as WTFSSMT in an Activity Usage Profile.

Timesheets Use the Timesheets tab to specify default setup options

when using the Timesheets module.
Mark to require that all new

resources use timesheets,
unless you specify otherwise.
Mark to enable assign

privileges for all newly created
projects. For individual
projects, you can override this
setting on the Project Details
Resources tab.
Choose to require that all

resources report their
hours on a daily basis for
each assigned activity.
Choose to require that all

resources report their hours
as a single time value for
each assigned activity in a
timesheet reporting period,
regardless of the number of
days included in the
timesheet period.
The Timesheet Approval Level section contains the following options:

■ Auto Submission – Choose to indicate that resource timesheets do
not need to be submitted or approved. Timesheet data are
automatically updated in the database when you apply actuals.
■ Auto Approval – Choose to indicate that resource timesheets do not
require management approval. Timesheets are approved automatically
when they are submitted.
For more information on ■ 1 Approval Level – Choose to indicate that resource timesheets
implementing the Timesheets require approval by the resource/cost manager only. If you select this
module, see the
Administrator’s Guide. option, the status of all submitted timesheets remains “Submitted”
until the approving manager changes the timesheet’s status. If you
previously required both project manager and resource/cost manager
approval, and you select this option, the status of all current
timesheets that have received one level of approval changes to
“Approved.”

■ 2 Approval Levels – Choose to indicate that resource timesheets

require approval by project and resource/cost managers. If you select
this option, the status of all submitted timesheets remains
“Submitted” until both managers approve the timesheet.
■ Project Manager Must Approve Before Resource Manager – If
you choose 2 Approval Levels, mark to indicate that project managers
must approve timesheets before resource/cost managers.
■ Default Resource Manager Approving Timesheets – The name of
the manager who approves resource timesheets, unless you specify
otherwise. Click the Browse button to select a new manager.
Timesheet Privileges Use the Timesheet Privileges tab to define

privileges for reporting hours.
The default number of days users can

preview an activity before it starts
The default
number of
days users
can review an
activity after it
ends

Data limits Use the Data Limits tab to specify the maximum number of
levels for hierarchical structures. You can also specify the maximum
number of baselines and activity codes that can be included in a project.
The maximum combined number of hierarchy

levels in the EPS and WBS: 1 is the lowest, and
50 is the highest.
The maximum number of

hierarchy levels in these
structures: 1 is the lowest,
and 25 is the highest.

activity codes in projects: 0 is
the lowest, and 500 is the
highest.

baselines in projects. You can
enter an unlimited number.
Maximum baselines copied

with project: Specify the
maximum number of
baselines that can be copied
with the project. You can enter
a number between 1 and 50 in
this field.
If you change maximum hierarchy level settings, the new

settings apply only when you add new elements or edit existing
elements.

ID lengths Use the ID Lengths tab to specify the maximum number of

characters for IDs and codes.
The maximum number of characters in
these IDs and codes: 1 is the lowest,
and 20 is the highest.
If you change the maximum number of characters in an ID or

code, the new number applies only when you add new IDs/
codes or edit existing IDs/codes.

Time Periods Use the Time Periods tab to define the default number of
hours in a workday, workweek, workmonth, and workyear. These values
are used as conversion factors when displaying the time units and duration
display formats you select. You can also specify abbreviations for
displaying minutes, hours, days, weeks, months, and years.
Valid entries range from 1.0 to 168.0. Valid entries range from 1.0 to 744.0.
Valid entries range from Valid entries

1.0 to 24.0. range from 1.0 to
8784.0.
Type a one-character
abbreviation to use when
displaying the time units
and duration display
formats you select.
Allowing Users to Define the Default Hours

per Time Period
Primavera calculates and stores time unit values in hourly increments.
However, through User Preferences, each user can choose to display time
unit values as hours, days, weeks, months, or years. When a user displays
data in time unit fields in increments other than hours, the Project
Management module converts the data based on the Admin Preference
Hours per Time Period settings. Conversely, if a user enters time units in
increments other than hours, the Admin Preference Hours per Time Period
settings are used to convert these input values to hours for database
calculation and storage.

As an administrator, you can specify the conversion factors or you can

allow users to specify the conversion factors. If you want to specify the
conversion factors, enter the number of hours to use as a conversion factor
in each Hours per Time Period field. If you want users to specify the
conversion factors, mark the 'Allow users to specify the number of work
hours for each time period' checkbox.
Enabling users to enter their own Hours per Time Period settings in User
Preferences prevents time unit data from being displayed incorrectly when
they view summary or detailed schedule data for their activities in
spreadsheets, reports, etc. (which can occur when the Admin time period
settings and the activity calendar time period settings do not match). If you
do not allow users to specify the User Preference Hours per Time Period
and the user preference for display is set to an increment other than hours,
when a user enters hours for an activity that uses different hours/time
period calendar values than the Admin Preference Hours per Time Period
settings, the display output may not be as expected. This occurs because
the display reflects the conversion factor of the Admin Preference Hours
per Time Period settings, not the hours/time period defined by the
activity’s calendar. For example,
User Preferences, Time Units = day

Admin Preferences, Hours per Time Period = 8h/d
Activity calendar = 10h/d
User-entered activity duration = 30h
Duration display = 3d6h (30h duration/8h per day, based on the conversion
factor)
To avoid an unexpected display result, mark the 'Allow users to specify the
number of work hours for each time period' checkbox. Then, advise users
to set the Hours per Time Period values in User Preferences according to
the activity calendar used by their role in the organization. For example, if
engineers use an 8-hour activity calendar, engineers should enter 8 for the
Hours/Day user preference. Likewise, if construction workers use a 10-
hour activity calendar, construction workers should enter 10 as the Hours/
Day user preference. Advising users to set the user preference according to
their role will provide users with an accurate representation of their
activity durations.

Earned value Use the Earned Value tab to specify default settings for
calculating earned value. You can change the settings for specific WBS
elements in the Earned Value tab in Work Breakdown Structure Details.
For details about the fields

on the Earned Value tab,
see “Reviewing Work
Breakdown Structures” on
page 133.
Choose which type of

baseline value is used to
calculate earned value.
Reports Use the Reports tab to define up to three sets of headers,

footers, and custom labels for reports.
Choose to define a set that

consists of a header, footer,
and custom text label...
...then specify the custom

text for that set’s header,
footer, and custom label.

Options Use the Options tab to specify the time interval to which cost
and quantity summaries should be calculated for Resource and Activity
Usage Spreadsheet displays. Also, select whether users can access
methodologies to add activities or create new projects using Project
Architect. To enable users to launch collaboration documents, type the
URL to the Primavera Web application server. The Workflow
Administrator is the web user responsible for administrative tasks related
to Primavera Web application workflow templates, which are used for
project and process requests. Click the browse button to select. You can
additionally use this tab to set up a link to the Contract Manager module
(formerly known as Expedition) and choose the Contract Manager product
version you want to connect to.
Once a link to the Contract Manager module is set up, users

can create a link to a Contract Manager project to import and
view project-level data. Refer to “Linking the Project
Management and Contract Manager Modules” on page 509 for
more information.
The time interval to which

activity costs and quantities
should be summarized in
spreadsheets
The time interval
to which
resource/role
assignment cost
and quantity
amounts should
To enable users to launch be summarized
collaboration documents, in spreadsheets
type the URL to the
Primavera Web application
server.
If connecting to Contract
Manager version 9.x or
higher, type the URL and port
number to the Contract
Manager Web server.

Rate Types Use the Rate Types tab to provide a title for each of the five
available Price/Unit fields. The title should describe what the rate type
represents. The rate type titles you define appear wherever the rate types
are displayed in a list or column.
You can define new titles

for these rate types, for
example, Commercial
Rate or Government Rate.

Defining Standard Categories and Values

Use the Admin Categories dialog box to define standard categories and
values that you can apply to all projects. Choose Admin, Admin
Categories.
For more information about Baseline types Use the Baseline Types tab to create, edit, and delete
baselines, see “Managing baseline types. Baseline types enable you to categorize and standardize
Baselines” on page 271.
baselines across projects. To change the name of a baseline type, double-
click it, then type a new name. The change applies to all projects to which
the baseline is assigned.
Click the Shift Up/Shift Down buttons to move the selected

category/type to a higher/lower position in the display. This
changes the order in which the categories/types are listed when
you assign them. These buttons are available only when the list
is not sorted alphabetically.

For more information about Expense categories Use the Expense Categories tab to create, edit,
expenses, see “Working with and delete expense categories. Expense categories can be used to
Cost Accounts and Project
Expenses” on page 247. categorize and standardize project expenses, and to organize and maintain
your expense information. To change an expense category, double-click it,
then type a new name. The change applies to all projects to which the
expense item is assigned.
For more information about WBS custom category Use the third tab on the Admin Categories
the WBS, see “Reviewing dialog box to define a custom WBS category and category values. The tab
Work Breakdown Structures”
on page 133. displays the name you define. To change the category name, click in the
field in the top right, then type a new name. Use this category to organize,
filter, and report WBS information in all projects. To change a category
value, double-click it, then type a new name. The change applies to all
projects to which the WBS item is assigned.
If you change the WBS category, the category’s values or value

assignments do not change.

Document categories Use the Document Categories tab to set up

categories for work products and documents, then assign these categories
to documents in the Work Products and Documents window and activities
in the WPs & Docs tab of Activities Details. To change a document
category, double-click it, then type a new name. The change applies to all
projects to which the document is assigned.

For more information about Document status Use the Document Status tab to create, edit, and
work products and delete document status types. Status types identify the current status of
documents, see “Maintaining
a Project’s Document work products and documents within a project. Use them to determine
Library” on page 359. which documents can be assigned to activities or WBS elements. To
change a status type, double-click it, then type a new name. The change
applies to all projects to which the document is assigned.
For more information about Overhead codes Use the Overhead Codes tab to create, edit, and
the Timesheets module, see delete overhead activity codes for Timesheets module users. Timesheets
“Defining Resources and
Roles” on page 109. module users add overhead activities to their timesheets to log timesheet
hours that are not associated with project activities. To change a code,
double-click it, then type a new name. The change applies to all projects in
which the code is assigned.

For more information about Risk types Use the Risk Types tab to create, edit, and delete risk types,
risks, see “Managing Risks” or categories of possible risks. Risk types allow you to classify and
on page 335.
standardize risks across projects. To change a risk type, double-click it,
then type a new name. The change applies to all projects in which the risk
is assigned.

For more information about Notebook topics Use the Notebook Topics tab to create, edit, and
activity notes, see “Working delete notebook topics. Notebook topics typically consist of instructions
with Activities” on page 201.
or descriptions for performing an activity. However, notebook topics can
also be assigned at the EPS, project, and WBS levels. Examples include
Purpose, Entry Criteria, Tools and Techniques, and Exit Criteria. To
change a notebook topic, double-click it, then type a new name. The
change applies to all notebook assignments.
Units of Measure Use the Units of Measure tab to set up units of

measure labels that you can assign to material resources. To change a unit
of measure label, double-click it, then type a new name. The change
applies to all unit of measure assignments.

Defining Currencies
You can specify the monetary unit or base currency used to store cost data
for all projects in the database, as well as the monetary unit or view
currency used to display cost data in windows and dialog boxes.
Only a user with Admin Superuser privileges can change the

base currency and define additional view currency types.
The exchange rate for the base currency is always 1.0. If you select a
different currency than the base currency to view cost data, the base
currency value is multiplied times the current exchange rate for the view
currency to calculate the values displayed in cost and price fields.
For example, if the base currency is U.S. Dollars, the view currency is
Euros, and the exchange rate for Euros is .75, a value of $10 stored in the
database is displayed as 7.5 Euros in cost and price fields in windows and
dialog boxes. Similarly, if you enter 10 Euros in a cost or price field, it is
stored in the database as $13.30.
When you enter values in cost and price fields, they are always
displayed in the view currency.
Indicates the currency is the

base used to store cost data
Use the Currencies dialog box to set up the base and view currencies.

If you are upgrading from a previous version of the Project

Management module, you should set up the base currency in
the new version before you start adding and changing projects.
Define a base currency The base currency, by default, is U.S. dollars.

To define a different currency as the base, choose Admin, Currencies.
Select the base currency, then, in the General tab, type the currency’s ID,
name, and symbol. The exchange rate for the base currency is always one.
Click the Appearance tab to further define how the currency is displayed.
Separates whole values from decimal

values in the currency display, for
example, 500.5 or 500,5
Indicates how many

decimal places to
Separates groups of digits in display, for example,
the currency display, for none (70), one (70.1),
example, 300,000 or 300-000 or two (70.14)
If you want to view costs in the old base currency, you will need
to add it to the list of available currencies.
Add a view currency Choose Admin, Currencies. Click Add. Specify

the currency’s ID, name, symbol, and exchange rate, and indicate how the
currency should be displayed.

Choose Edit, User

Preferences, then click
the Currency tab to
select the currency used
to view costs.
Type an ID that clearly

defines the currency type.
Enter the universal symbol
used to identify the
currency.
Enter the current global exchange

rate for the currency.

Setting User Preferences 49
Setting User Preferences

You can tailor certain options to fit your
In this chapter specific needs. For example, indicate the
format for displaying time units and dates,
Formatting Time Units
specify the currency to use for viewing costs,
Formatting Dates
and set startup display preferences. You can
Setting View Currency and
Symbols also indicate how you want to transfer infor-
Setting Mail Preferences mation to and from e-mail installations of the
Implementing Wizards module, and specify whether you want to use
Creating a Log of Tasks and the latest calculated summarized data or the
Setting Startup, Group and Sort, most current data in Activity/Resource Usage
and Column Options
Spreadsheets and Profiles.
Changing Your Password
Setting Profile and Spreadsheet This chapter describes how to set these
Data Options
options.
Setting Calculation Options for
Resource and Role Assignments
Selecting Startup Filters

Formatting Time Units

Time unit settings affect how time unit values are displayed in tracking
layouts, activity durations, resource prices, availability, and work efforts.
Choose Edit, User Preferences, then click the Time Units tab.
This option is disabled

when Show Unit label
Mark to display the time or Show Duration label
unit abbreviation with the is not marked.
time/duration value.
For each time period,

specify the number of hours
to use as a conversion
factor when you display time
unit fields in increments
other than hours. These
fields are disabled when the
Admin Preference 'Allow
users to specify the number
of work hours for each time
period' is not selected.
Set time unit options In the Units Format section, select the time unit
used to display work efforts, and resource/role prices and availability. In
the Durations Format section, select the time unit used to display activity
duration values.
Mark the Sub-Unit checkbox to include the next smallest time interval for
the Unit of Time selected; the field name changes accordingly. For
example, if you select Day in the Units field, the Sub-Units field displays
Hours. You can also select the number of decimal places you want to
include in time unit displays.
In the Units/Time Format section, choose to show resource units per time
as percentages or as units per duration. Your choice determines how rates
are displayed. For example, 4h/d is the same as 50 percent of an eight-hour
day.

Define the Hours per Time Period Primavera calculates and stores
time unit values in hourly increments. When you display or enter data in
time unit fields in increments other than hours, the Project Management
module converts the data based on the Hours per Time Period settings
(either Admin Preference or User Preference - see note below).
Conversely, if you enter time units in increments other than hours, the
Hours per Time Period settings (either Admin Preference or User
Preference - see note below) are used to convert these input values to
hours for database calculation and storage.
In order to display time unit data accurately, you should set the Hours per
Time Period values according to the activity calendar used by your role in
the organization. For example, if you are an engineer and engineers use an
8-hour activity calendar, enter 8 as the Hours/Day value. If you do not
enter a value that corresponds to your role's activity calendar, activity
durations may be displayed incorrectly when you view your activities in
spreadsheets, reports, etc.
If the Admin Preference option 'Allow users to specify the

number of work hours for each time period' is not selected,
these fields are not editable. When the option is not selected,
the Hours per Time Period settings in the Admin Preferences,
Time Periods tab, are used to calculate display values for time
unit fields.

Formatting Dates
Choose Edit, User Preferences, then click the Dates tab to specify how to
display dates.
Choose to exclude the time

from date fields.
Displays an example of
your format preferences
Specify date format Choose the date format you want to use, then
choose how to display time values in date fields. Mark the applicable
checkboxes in the Options area to indicate how the selected date format
should appear. In the Separator field, select the character you want to use
to separate days, months, and years.

Setting View Currency and Symbols

Choose Edit, User Preferences, then click the Currency tab to specify the
currency used to view cost data, and whether to show or hide the currency
symbol and/or decimal values in cost values.
You must enter all cost data in the view currency selected in
User Preferences.
Click to select the

currency for viewing
Mark to include the symbol costs; this may differ
used for the currency. from the base currency
used to store monetary
values.
Mark to show
decimal values for
costs.
The currencies available for viewing monetary units are defined

by your administrator in the Currencies dialog box.

Setting Mail Preferences

Choose Edit, User Preferences, then click the E-Mail tab to configure the
module to transfer information to and from e-mail installations.
Not needed for

Internet mail
This is typically the

project administrator’s
address.
Configure mail settings The module supports both MAPI (Messaging

Application Interface) and SMTP (Internet) for sending issues to users via
e-mail. Select the applicable protocol for your mail system in the E-Mail
Protocol field. When using SMTP, select Internet. If you are using MAPI
as the protocol, type the profile name in the Mail Login Name/Profile
Name field. The profile name is set in Control Panel in the Mail Settings
dialog box (accessible from the Mail and Fax icon) on the workstation
running the module. Click Password to enter the password to the MAPI
profile.
In the Outgoing Mail Server (SMTP) field, type either the fully qualified
domain name of the Internet mail server or its IP address. In the User E-
Mail Address field, type the Internet mail address for the user from whom
the mail will be sent. If you have a MAPI configuration, clear the
Outgoing Mail Server (SMTP) field, and type the Microsoft Exchange e-
mail address of the person sending the e-mail notification in the User E-
Mail Address field.

Implementing Wizards
Choose Edit, User Preferences, then click the Assistance tab to enable the
use of wizards when adding resources and activities.
To discontinue a wizard’s
use, you can either clear
the checkbox in this
dialog box or mark the Do
Not Show This Wizard
Again checkbox in the If you clear one or both
checkboxes and add a new
wizard dialog box. To
resource or activity, you
enable a wizard for future
will need to use the current
sessions, mark the layout to add the
applicable checkbox information.
again in the Assistance
tab of the User
Preferences dialog box.
Set assistance options Wizards guide you through the steps

necessary to complete a function. Once you feel comfortable adding
resources and activities, you may not need to use them. Mark the
checkboxes in the Wizards section to automatically display the New
Resource Wizard when you add a new resource, and the New Activity
Wizard when you add a new activity.

Creating a Log of Tasks and Setting Startup, Group and

Sort, and Column Options
Choose Edit, User Preferences, then click the Application tab to establish
the default window and dialog box that displays when you start the
module, and to record the actions you perform to a log file. You can also
set options for grouping and sorting.
Make your selection

based on the area in
which you work most
often; you can change
Mark to automatically create a this setting as your
log file called ERRORS.LOG requirements change.
each time you work in the
Project Management module.
Select the range of
financial periods
available for display as
You must choose Show ID/
columns. If you do not
Code, Show Name/
select a range, all
Description, or both.
financial periods are
viewable as columns.
Set startup and log file options Select the window to display each
time you start the module. Select Home if your work varies each day; the
Home workspace enables you to select the applicable window or layout
for each session.
You can also indicate whether to display the Issue Navigator dialog box,
which contains outstanding issues that are generated based on your preset
thresholds, and the Welcome dialog box, which enables you to choose to
create a new project, open an existing project, open the last project opened
in your previous session, or display global/enterprise data only.
Primavera recommends that you use the log file only with the
assistance of Primavera Customer Support staff.

Set grouping and sorting options You can show or hide the ID/
Code or Name/Description fields as labels in the group-by bands when
grouping by hierarchies that include both an ID/code and a name
description. This user preference setting affects windows/dialog boxes
where you cannot access a Group and Sort dialog box.
Mark the Reorganize Automatically checkbox to enable the Project

Management module to immediately re-sort any changes to activity data
in the current view to reflect the layout’s grouping and sorting criteria.
If you do not want the module to automatically reorganize data,

you can choose Reorganize Now from the Tools menu to apply
the group and sort criteria to the updates in the current view.
Set column options for financial periods You can make a range of
financial periods available as columns in the Activities and Resource
Assignments windows, as well as the Resources tab of Activity Details.
Selecting a range limits the number of financial periods that appear in the
Columns dialog box. You may want to enter a range when the Financial
Period dictionary contains several financial periods. For example, if each
financial period in the Financial Period dictionary has a duration of one
month, you may only want to view the previous six financial periods (six
months). If you do not enter a range, every financial period is available for
selection in the Columns dialog box.

Changing Your Password

Choose Edit, User Preferences, then click the Password tab to change your
current password for starting the module.
1 Click to change your

password.
2 Type a new password.
3 Retype the new

password to verify it.

Setting Profile and Spreadsheet Data Options

Choose Edit, User Preferences, then click the Resource Analysis tab to
choose the project data to use when displaying and summarizing
remaining units and costs in Resource Usage Spreadsheets, Resource
Usage Profiles, and tracking layouts. You can also choose options for
displaying and calculating time-distributed data in Resource Usage
Spreadsheets, Resource Usage Profiles, and tracking layouts in the Project
Management module, as well as time-distributed charts in the Primavera
Web application.
If you manually plan

If you choose to calculate future period resource
the role limit based on allocation in the
custom defined role limits Resource Usage
and no limit has been Spreadsheet, this
defined for a role, the setting determines the
module assumes the role minimum timescale
has a limit of zero interval in which you can
maximum units/time. enter a value.
If you do not choose Show Choose the project data to display If you choose Show All Projects
All Projects, the module from the Display Options bar in a Resource Usage Profile or Resource
displays profile/ Usage Spreadsheet, you can specify whether to include data from open
spreadsheet and tracking and closed projects, or only the projects currently open when calculating
data from open projects remaining units and costs. (Closed projects are any projects in the
only, and the data are live
enterprise project structure (EPS) that are not currently open.)
rather than summarized.
■ To include live data from all open projects and stored summary data
from all closed projects (excluding those with a What-If status),
choose All Closed Projects (Except What-If Projects).

Summarized data are available only when projects have been

summarized. To summarize data, choose Tools, Summarize
then select to summarize the open projects in the current view,
all projects in the EPS (includes both open and closed projects
but excludes summary only projects), or summary only projects
(those projects for which the Contains Summarized Data Only
checkbox is marked in the Project Details Settings tab).
■ To include live data from all open projects and stored summary data
from all closed projects with a specific leveling priority, choose All
Closed Projects with Leveling Priority Equal/Higher Than, and enter
the leveling priority you want to use. (Specify the leveling priority per
project in the General tab of the Projects window.) The module uses
this value to consider applicable external projects (those not included
in the current layout) when deducting from resource availability
immediately during leveling.
■ To not include resource data from external (closed) projects in the
remaining units and cost values for Resource Usage Profiles,
Resource Usage Spreadsheets, and tracking layouts, choose Opened
Projects Only.
Choose the time-distributed data to display In the Time-

Distributed Data section of the Resource Analysis tab, choose a starting
point for calculating remaining units and costs for display in Resource
Usage Profiles, the Resource Usage Spreadsheet, tracking layouts, and
Primavera Web application charts. To focus on the current remaining
estimate, choose Remaining Early Dates. To focus on values calculated
from a forecast date, choose Forecast Dates.
Next, select the interval at which live resource and cost calculations are
performed for Resource Usage Profiles and Resource Usage Spreadsheet
displays and in tracking layouts. Profiles, spreadsheets, and layouts are
only affected if their timescale interval is set lower than the interval set in
the Interval for Time-Distributed Resource Calculations field.
For Primavera Web Finally, choose to display role limits based on custom role limits defined
application users, you can in the Roles dictionary or on the calculated limit of each role’s primary
choose how you want to resource. The Resource Usage Spreadsheet, Resource Usage Profile,
display role limits in the tracking layouts, and Primavera Web application charts display the role
Resource Staffing section limit according to the option you select.
of Global Preferences.

Setting Calculation Options for Resource and Role

Assignments
Choose Edit, User Preferences, then click the Calculations tab to specify
how cost and units are allocated when you add or delete multiple resource
assignments. You can also choose the default behavior when replacing a
resource/role on an existing activity assignment with a different resource/
role.
Choose resource assignment defaults You can specify how to

calculate remaining values when new resource assignments are added to or
removed from activities. Remaining duration, remaining units, and
remaining units/time will not change for existing assignments, regardless
of the duration type.
When the first assignment is added, units/costs are calculated

based on the activity’s duration type.

■ Preserve the units, duration, and units/time for existing

assignments
When adding or removing multiple resource assignments on activ-
ities, choose this option for units, durations, and units/time to remain
constant when additional resources are assigned to any activity.
Regardless of the duration type of an activity, this equation is always
true:
Remaining Units = Remaining Duration x Remaining Units/Time
■ Recalculate the units, duration, and units/time for existing
assignments based on the activity duration type
When adding or removing multiple resource assignments on activ-
ities, choose this option to calculate a resource assignment’s
remaining values based on the activity’s duration type, specified in the
Activity Details General tab.
Choose assignment staffing defaults In the Project Management

module, you can choose the module’s default behavior when you replace a
resource on an existing activity assignment with a different resource and
when you assign a resource to an existing role assignment.
When replacing a resource on an existing activity assignment, you can

choose to always use the units/time and overtime factor of the new
resource or of the current assignment (i.e., the resource you are replacing);
or, you can choose to be prompted to select which units/time and overtime
factor you want to use each time.
When assigning a resource to an existing role assignment, you can choose

to always use the price/unit of the resource or role; or, you can choose to
be prompted to select which price/unit you want to use each time.
If you choose to always use the role's price/unit, in the Activity

Details, Resources tab, the Rate Source is set to Role. If you
choose to always use the resource's price/unit, the Rate
Source is set to Resource. The price/unit value used to
calculate costs for the assignment is determined by the rate
type you select in the Rate Type field (which are resource- and
role-specific).

Selecting Startup Filters

Choose Edit, User Preferences, then click the Startup Filters tab to choose
the data filters you want to run when starting the module. You can choose
to view data for your current projects only, or all data in the database.
These filters can reduce the time it takes for your projects to open.
When you change an These filters can be

option in the Startup changed in the individual
Filters tab, you must exit views by clicking the
and then restart the Display Options bar and
module for the change to
then Filter By.
take effect.
Your security privileges control which data are displayed when

you select View All Data (No Filter).

Part 2
Structuring Projects
In this part Setting Up the Enterprise Project
Structure
Setting Up the Organizational
Breakdown Structure
Defining Resources and Roles
Reviewing Work Breakdown Structures
Defining Budgets
Establishing Project Codes
Working With User-Defined Fields
Creating Calendars
T his part describes how to start planning and creating
projects.
The first four chapters explain how to structure and add

projects to the hierarchy; establish the managers directly
responsible for projects and the users associated with
them throughout the enterprise; set up project resources
and roles; and use the work breakdown structure (WBS)
to plan and manage project information.
Subsequent chapters explain how to set up project

budgets, funding sources, and spending plans; track and
analyze variance as projects progress; define project codes
and assign values to project information so you can
organize it in different ways across the enterprise; and
define custom user fields. Once your project structures are
set up, you can define the calendars that determine when
work can and cannot occur.
Setting Up the Enterprise Project Structure 67
Setting Up the Enterprise Project

Structure
This chapter describes how to define the
In this chapter enterprise project structure (EPS) that will be
used to organize and manage the projects in
Enterprise Project Structure
your organization. In addition, it explains how
Overview
to develop, create, and add projects to the EPS,
Setting Up the Enterprise Project
Structure and define project attributes.
Adding a New Project to the
Enterprise Project Structure
Using Project Architect
Working with the Enterprise
Project Structure
Defining Enterprise Project
Structure Details

68 Part 2: Structuring Projects
Enterprise Project Structure Overview

Typically, users in an enterprise will have access to a large database that
contains all the projects and related information for their company. The
information this database contains must be structured in a way that allows
individuals to access the project data they need, quickly and accurately. In
addition, users must be able to review project data at the level appropriate
for their role in the enterprise and the specific questions they need to
answer.
Your database of projects is arranged in a hierarchy called the enterprise

project structure (EPS). The EPS can be subdivided into as many levels or
nodes as needed to parallel work in the enterprise. Nodes at the highest, or
root, level might represent divisions within your company, project phases,
site locations, or other major groupings that meet the needs of your
organization, while projects always represent the lowest level of the
hierarchy. Every project in the enterprise must be included in an EPS
node.
Use the Admin The number of EPS levels and their structure depend on the scope of your
Preferences, Data Limits projects and how you want to summarize data. For example, you may want
tab to specify the to define increasingly lower levels of EPS nodes, similar to an outline, to
maximum number of EPS represent broad areas of work that expand into more detailed projects. In
levels you can define. the following example, the Caprini Corporation EPS node includes a
Specify up to 50 combined
lower-level node called Apex Project. The Apex Project node is further
EPS/WBS levels.
divided into the Apex Construction node. This node contains the projects
that constitute their part of the Apex Project. For example, the Apex
Construction node contains the Automated System, Office Building
Addition, and Conveyor System projects. You can specify as many
projects as necessary to complete the required work and fulfill the scope
set forth by operations executives and program managers in your
organization.
This EPS shows the Caprini

Corporation node, which is
further divided into nodes
that contain projects
corresponding to the types of
projects within the enterprise.
A project is the
lowest level in the
EPS.

Multiple levels enable you to manage projects separately while retaining

the ability to roll up and summarize data to higher levels. For example,
you can summarize information up to each node in the EPS. Conversely,
top-down budgeting can be performed from higher-level EPS nodes down
through their lower-level projects for cost control.
Ideally, one person or group controls the EPS across the enterprise. The
project controls coordinator creates the hierarchical structure that
identifies the company-wide projects. The coordinator works with the
project manager in each area of the enterprise to define basic project
information for each group and to develop standards before any projects
are added. The following diagram is a simplified representation of
responsibilities and projects within a hierarchy.
Review Performance in
the Primavera Web
Operations Executive
Portfolio Management
and Program Manager
application
High-level Project Controls Coordinator

EPS node
Lower-level
Project Manager and
EPS node
Resource/Cost Manager
Project Team Leader

Timesheets
Team Members
module
Project Team Leader
Move around in the EPS When you first start the module, click Open
Existing on the Welcome dialog box, or choose File, Open, from within
the module. EPS nodes that contain other nodes and projects are identified
by a pyramid symbol. A + symbol indicates that more nodes or projects
are rolled up beneath the selected node. Click + or double-click the node
to display additional levels in the hierarchy.

Root level of the

enterprise project
structure
Indicates that this
level is expanded.
Click the + to expand
the item; click the - to
collapse it.
Indicates that this
node contains more
rolled up nodes or
projects
Identifies a project,
the lowest level of the
hierarchy
Select the EPS node or project you want to open, then click Open. To view
the EPS structure, click Projects from the Home workspace.
You can right-click in the Projects window and choose Open

Project to display the Open Project dialog box.

Click Projects to
display the
enterprise project
structure.
You can group and

sort by any defined
project code; click the
Display Options bar,
then choose Group
and Sort By to select
a code.
The Specifications project

was opened from the
Open Project dialog box;
this project is located
under the Manufacturing
to Specifications node in
the EPS.
If you converted projects from a version prior to 4.1 to version

4.1 or later, the Project Management module displays the
project groups and member projects in the EPS as a two-level
hierarchy showing the project group as the EPS node, and the
member projects as projects of the node.
Other project structures Other project data, such as the

organizational breakdown structure (OBS), the work breakdown structure
(WBS), resources, and project codes, use a similar structure. These data
correspond directly with the various levels of the EPS to denote logical
and meaningful divisions in the enterprise.

Work breakdown structure Each project has its own WBS, which
shows the hierarchy of products and services produced during and by a
project. The summary rollup of the highest WBS level is equal to that of
the project level in the EPS. This effectively extends the EPS hierarchy
down to the activity level in the EPS, as shown in the following example.
Both EPS and WBS

nodes can be
assigned dates and
budgets—essential
elements for top-
down planning.
For more information about Organizational breakdown structure User access and privileges to
the OBS hierarchy, see nodes within the EPS hierarchy are implemented through a global OBS
“Setting Up the
Organizational Breakdown that represents the management responsible for the projects in the EPS.
Structure” on page 97. Each manager in the OBS is associated with his or her area of the EPS,
either by node or by project, and the WBS of the particular level of the
hierarchy.
Each level of the OBS is

associated with a level of
the EPS hierarchy,
whether it be a node or a
project.

Resources Resources are the personnel and equipment that perform the
work across all projects. You can set up a resource hierarchy that reflects
your organization’s resource structure and supports the assignment of
resources to activities.
For more information

about the resource
hierarchy, see “Defining
Resources and Roles” on
page 109.
Project codes Project codes are another way to group and sort projects
in the enterprise. When you have many projects in the hierarchy, codes
enable consolidation and/or filtering of potentially vast amounts of
information located in different areas of the enterprise.

When you open a high-level

EPS node, you can organize
the layout by project code to
quickly see only projects
assigned to that code.
For more information about Summarizing Projects

summarizing data, see
“Summarizing Projects” on You can view summary data for all projects in the enterprise in the
page 325. Projects window of the Project Management module and in many
Primavera Web application views. The Project Management module
enables you to summarize data at regularly scheduled intervals or on
demand, using the Tools, Summarize command. Summarize data to obtain
a broad overview of project information and to display project data more
quickly.

Setting Up the Enterprise Project Structure

To establish the EPS nodes that will contain your enterprise projects,
choose Enterprise, Enterprise Project Structure.
This dialog box presents a

high-level picture of your
EPS, enabling you to set up
appropriate divisions of
information in the
enterprise.
You must specify a

responsible manager for
each node in the EPS to
enable security rights and
privileges; the module uses
the OBS root as the default
for all nodes if you don’t
provide one.
Click to move nodes up/down

or indent/outdent.
Add a node to the EPS Select the node under which you want to add
a node. The new node will be placed below the selected node in the
hierarchy. Click Add in the Enterprise Project Structure (EPS) dialog box.
Type a unique ID and name for the node directly in the column cells, or in
the EPS ID and EPS Name fields. Accept the responsible manager shown,
or click the Browse button in the field to select a different OBS element
for the node. Use the arrow keys to indent/outdent a node to denote its
placement in the EPS, and to move a node up/down in the hierarchy.
Click Close.
Add multiple root nodes You can distinguish different branches of

the EPS hierarchy by including more than one root node. For example, you
might want to separate current projects from completed projects or from
template projects that you use as the basis for new projects. Add a root
EPS node the same way you add an EPS node, but outdent the root to the
left-most position in the hierarchy.

Add root nodes to separate

projects with an Inactive
status or to distinguish
projects used as templates.
For more information about Build the hierarchy After you set up an EPS, you can define additional
security profiles, see the data about each EPS node, such as anticipated dates, budgets, and
spending plans. Use the Project Details to specify this information, as
described later in this chapter. Or, you can begin adding projects under the
applicable nodes in the structure if you have access rights to these
functions. Access rights are set by your network or database administrator.

Adding a New Project to the Enterprise Project

Structure
A project is a set of activities and their associated information that
constitutes a plan for creating a product or service. A project has a start
and finish date, work breakdown structure (WBS), and any number of
activities, relationships, baselines, expenses, risks, issues, thresholds, and
work products/documents. A project may also have its own Web site.
While resources typically work on several projects, each project has its
own resource assignments. Similarly, while calendars, reports, and activity
codes may span all projects, they may also be project specific.
Determine your requirements for adding a new project to the hierarchy. As

a project manager who manages one or more higher-level projects in the
enterprise, you’ll probably want to add an EPS node that encompasses
these projects. If you are a team leader, you’ll probably want to add an
individual project that incorporates the tasks your group needs to perform
to complete the higher-level EPS node. You will create this individual
project below one of the EPS nodes previously established by your project
manager.
You can also use the Project Use the Projects window to add a project to the EPS hierarchy. Define
Architect wizard to create general information such as the project’s ID and name, planned start and
new projects. See “Using
Project Architect” on must finish by dates, and the responsible manager.
page 79.
Add a project to the EPS Choose Enterprise, Projects, or click
Projects on the Home workspace to open the Projects window. Select the
EPS node to which you want to add a project. (If you have not yet created
any EPS nodes, select the root EPS node created for you when you
installed the module.)
Click Add. The Create a New Project Wizard guides you through the steps
required to add a project, including selecting the node in which to place
the project in the EPS, naming the project, and identifying the responsible
manager for the project.
You cannot add projects below existing projects.

The root node was

selected as the EPS
node in which to place
the new project.
Identify the new project

using the General tab in
Project Details.
Use the default information

provided, or change it to
accommodate the project
requirements.
To define additional project information, display Project Details at the

bottom of your layout (click the Display Options bar and choose Show on
Bottom, Project Details), then refer to the “Defining Enterprise Project
Structure Details” on page 89.
For more information about Import projects You may want to build your EPS using projects
importing and converting previously created in an earlier version of the Project Management
projects, see the
Administrator’s Guide. module, Microsoft Project, or Primavera Project Planner 3.0 (P3). The
Import Wizard prompts you to specify the information to be imported and
where the project should be placed in the current EPS hierarchy.

Using Project Architect

The Project Architect wizard helps you select and import methodologies
as pre-built project plans from the Methodology Management module.
Use Project Architect to create a new project plan or to add activities and
associated information to an existing project. Because Project Architect
copies methodologies from the Methodology Management module
database, the information you change does not affect source
methodologies.
For more information on In addition to providing access to methodologies, Project Architect also
using methodologies, see the contains a bottom-up estimation feature that allows you to estimate
Methodology Management
Reference Manual. resource units and costs for your methodology selections. Project
Architect bases this estimate on the project complexity value that you
specify during the architect process. This enables you to estimate work
effort and cost before adding a project.
You can also access the Start Project Architect Wizard Choose File, New to start the Create a
Project Architect wizard New Project wizard. Select the EPS level in which to place the new
from the File menu. Use project. Name the project, specify a start date, select the responsible
this option to incorporate manager, and choose the default rate type. Choose Yes, run the Project
methodologies into the Architect.
current project.
Select methodologies and estimate project complexity Click
Select Base Methodology or Plug-in Methodology to select the
methodology you want to import. Click Next to select the Base or Plug-in
Methodology you want to import. Click Next and type a value for the
project complexity, or click the Size and Complexity Wizard button to
calculate a value for the project complexity. The module uses the project
complexity percentage to calculate a value between the low and high
estimated values defined for the labor and nonlabor units, material costs,
and expense costs defined for each activity in the project.
The project complexity value can be between 0 and 100 percent. If the
project complexity value equals 0, the module uses the low estimate for
each activity. If the project complexity value equals 100, the module uses
the high estimate for each activity. For project complexity values between
0 and 100, the module calculates an intermediate value between the low
and high estimates for each activity. The value calculated using the project
complexity value is then copied into the planned labor/nonlabor units,
material costs, and expense costs for each activity.

Click to select a methodology from

the list of base methodologies
stored in the Methodology
Management module.
Click to display information about this

Project Architect session. You can
enter additional information to explain
your choice of a base methodology.
The Rationale information is added as
a Notebook Topic at the project level.
Tailor the WBS elements You can modify the Work Breakdown
Structure (WBS) elements associated with the selected methodology.
Click Tailor to view the details and activities of each WBS element.

For organizations using Primavera ProjectLink, you cannot

modify Microsoft Project (MSP)-managed WBSes in the Project
Management module. For more information on ProjectLink,
refer to the Primavera ProjectLink Help in Microsoft Project
(available only if ProjectLink is installed). You can access the
help by clicking the Help button on any ProjectLink screen.
Click to include the selected

WBS element.
Click to view the details of the

selected WBS element.
Click to specify which of the

activities for the selected WBS
you want to include in your
project plan. Clear the
corresponding checkbox to
exclude the selected activity.
Tailor the WPs and Docs You can view the work products and
documents associated with the selected methodology. Click Tailor to view
the details of each work product or document and to select which
documents to include in the project plan.
Review the tailored methodology Click Next to view the results

after tailoring the methodology. Click Overview to review the changes
made to the selected methodology.

Choose update project options Select a layout configuration to use

when bringing methodology data into the project. You can create and save
several different configurations; however, only one configuration is used
to import the file. Select Yes in the Use field next to the configuration you
want to use.
Click to customize the

layout configuration.
Click to create a new

Modify a layout configuration To modify the options specified in a

layout configuration, select the layout in the Update Project Options
dialog box, then click Modify. The Action specified in the layout
determines how to import data that match in the import file and in the
existing project database.

The Modify Import Configuration dialog box lists the data types for which
you can set options. Select one of the following in the Action field to
indicate how you want to update the data type:
■ Keep Existing Retains data in the existing database and does not
overwrite them with the updated methodology data; adds new data if
the record does not exist.
■ Update Existing Overwrites data in the existing database with the
updated methodology data; adds new data if the record does not exist.
■ Insert New Retains data in the existing database and adds any new
data items. For example, if a new role was added in the Methodology
Management module, but you don’t want to change the existing roles,
choose Insert New to add the new role to the project management
database.
■ Do Not Import Retains data in the existing database and does not
import the methodology data.
Click OK to save changes to the modified layout configuration. Click Next

to specify where you would like to place the Base or Plug-in methodology,
then click Finish to create the project.

Working with the Enterprise Project Structure

Open an EPS node to open all the projects that compose it, or open
projects individually. You can also select nonconsecutive projects to see
their combined status, resources, or costs. Choose File, Open, select the
nodes or projects you want to open, then click OK.
Click to view a list of users who currently

have the selected project open.
Depending on your security

profile or the way in which
other users have opened the
project, one or more of these
options may not be available.
Only one user at a time can have Exclusive access to a project.
Use status for filtering projects in the EPS You can change an
open (Active) project to closed (Inactive) when the project is completed.
You can also assign a What-If status to a copied project that you want to
use for analysis. Project status can be used to organize and summarize
information, and to filter projects.
Choose File, Open. Select the EPS node or project whose status you want
to change and click Open. Then, click Projects in the Home workspace.

In the General tab,

select the project’s
status.
To view only those projects with a specific status, choose View, Filter By,
Status, then choose the status you want to use. You can also choose View,
Filter By, Customize. In the Filters dialog box, mark the applicable Select
checkboxes for the statuses of the projects you want to see.
Status filters

Using Root Nodes to Denote Project Status

Another way to distinguish projects with statuses other than Active is to
place them under separate root nodes in the EPS. The projects remain part
of the hierarchy, but they are not considered when you budget, schedule,
and level your active projects. Choose Enterprise, Enterprise Project
Structure, to set up root nodes as placeholders within the EPS. You can
then drag and drop projects to these root nodes when status changes.
You may want to place the

status root nodes at the
bottom of the EPS to keep
them separate from the rest
of the hierarchy.
Click to move a selected node to the

left-most position and designate it as a
root node.
Copy an EPS node or project You can copy an existing node or

project to use as a template for a new one. Rename the node or project
after you copy it, then make the necessary changes to it.

When you open the Projects window, include the node/project you want to
copy as well as the node to which you want to copy it. Select the node/
project you want to copy, then click Copy from the command bar. Select
the node to which you want to copy the node/project, then click Paste in
the command bar. When you copy a project to another location in the EPS,
you can also choose to copy the links to the WBS, documents, OBS, and
other related elements. Mark the applicable checkboxes in the dialog
boxes that are displayed when you click Paste. Click OK in each dialog
box to proceed with the copy.
Mark the
checkboxes for
the elements
you want to
copy.
You can only delete Delete an EPS node or project When you delete a node, all projects
projects that are opened in in that branch of the hierarchy will also be removed. If you don’t want to
Exclusive mode. delete these projects, you must copy and paste them to another area of the
hierarchy before you delete the higher-level EPS node.
To delete an EPS node, choose Enterprise, Enterprise Project Structure.

Select the EPS node you want to delete, then click Delete. Confirm that
you want to delete the selected node by clicking Yes. To delete a project,
open the Projects or WBS window with that project included. Select the
project, then click Delete. Confirm that you want to delete the selected
project by clicking Yes.

Click to delete the selected project.
Click to delete the

selected node.

Defining Enterprise Project Structure Details

Define project details and defaults used throughout a project using the
Project Details tabs in the bottom portion of the Projects window. You can
also define information specific to the EPS nodes in your hierarchy. To
display Project Details, click the Display Options bar, then choose Show
on Bottom, Project Details (the box next to Project Details should be
marked).
Make sure Project Details

are displayed so you can
define properties.
To include/exclude tabs,
right-click in the Details
area, and choose
Customize Project Details.
Open each tab to view and edit that type of information for the selected
node or project.

For details about the Budget General information The General tab enables you to view and edit
Log, Spending Plan, Budget general information about the selected node or project. This information
Summary, and Funding tabs,
see “Defining Budgets” on includes the ID, name, responsible manager, leveling priority, and risk
page 151. level. You can also view or edit the project’s Web site address, if
applicable.
Use status to identify active (Active) or closed

(Inactive) projects. You can also select What-If
status for analysis before establishing a more The node’s/project’s assigned organizational breakdown
permanent project schedule, or Planned status structure (OBS) element. The Responsible Manager is a
for use during the project planning phase. mandatory assignment for each level of the EPS.
The name of the user and the The overall risk in performing the node/ Use this value to
date and time the user checked project. Use the risk level to organize, consider applicable
out the project. This field is blank filter, and report project information. external projects
when the Check Out Status is (those not included in
Checked In. the current window)
when deducting from
resource availability
immediately during
leveling.
Leveling Priority
You can include assignments from closed projects during leveling. Mark
the Consider Assignments in Other Projects with Priority Equal/Higher
Than checkbox in the Level Resources dialog box and indicate a Project
Leveling Priority for those projects on the General tab in the Projects
window. You can enter a value from 1 to 100, with 1 being the highest
priority. To use the priority level as a tie breaker during leveling, include
Project Leveling Priority under Leveling Priorities in the Level Resources
dialog box.

Dates The Dates tab enables you to edit schedule information for the
selected project. This information includes the current data date, planned
start date, and the scheduled finish date. If you have an EPS node selected,
you can also enter the dates you anticipate the node will start and finish.
The latest early finish date calculated A date constraint The user-defined date
when the project was last scheduled placed on the the project is expected
project end date to start or finish
The start date of the

project
The date used as the

starting point to calculate
the schedule
The actual finish date of the project, if

the project has finished—all activities in
the project have actual finish dates.
Anticipated Dates
Anticipated start and finish dates are used during the project planning
stage, and can be set at the EPS, project, or WBS level. If the selected
project has no activities, or the activities have not started, the Start date or
Finish date (in columns) is set equal to the Anticipated Start or Anticipated
Finish. Click the Browse button to select a new date.

Notebook The Notebook tab enables you to assign notebook topics and
details to the selected node or project. These topics are defined in the
Notebook Topics tab of the Admin Categories dialog box.
Click to add a topic,

select a topic in the
Assign Notebook Topic
dialog box, then click
Assign. Click in this area to type a
description of the selected topic.
For free-form, user-defined details, you can use HTML editing

features, which include formatting text, inserting pictures,
copying and pasting information from other document files
(while retaining formatting), and adding hyperlinks.
Project codes The Codes tab enables you to assign project code values
to the selected project. You must first add project codes and values (choose
Enterprise, Project Codes).
To sort the display, click

the applicable column
label.

Default values The Defaults tab enables you to specify the default
settings for the selected project. This information includes the default cost
account for resource assignments to activities, the defaults for automatic
activity numbering, and the default activity calendar, duration type, and
percent complete type.
If you change the default calendar, The default cost account
the module applies the default for resource assignments
calendar only to new activities. to activities and project
The default duration, expenses in the project
percent complete, and
activity types for
activities in the project.
Changing these
settings does not affect
existing activities.
Mark to automatically
number new activities
one increment greater
than the selected
activity, when adding
manually. New activity IDs are numbered
according to this increment.
Auto-Numbering Activity IDs

When a new activity is created, the activity ID is automatically generated
using auto-numbering. Activity ID auto-numbering concatenates the
prefix and the suffix, with the suffix incremented to make the ID unique.
For example, “A” (prefix), “1000” (suffix), “10” (increment) yields
activity IDs of “A1010,” “A1020,” “A1030,” and so on. If you change the
activity ID prefix, suffix, or increment, the change applies to new activities
only.
Resources The Resources tab enables you to specify project level

resource permissions for the Timesheets application. Permissions include
allowing resources to assign themselves to activities and to report their
activities and assignments as completed. You can also specify whether
resources enter remaining units or activity completion percentages for
their assigned activities and whether to allow the dates of new resource
assignments to be independent of the activity or to allow new assignments
to force a recalculation of activity dates and duration.

This setting is used to calculate the cost for activities that

have labor/nonlabor units with no assigned resources/
roles or resources/roles that do not have prices.
Mark to allow new resource/role assignments to

determine the dates and durations of the activity.
Marking the Drive Activity Dates by Default checkbox simply

flags the corresponding resource in the RBS—if you customize
columns in the Resources window to include the “Drive Activity
Dates” editable column, a checkmark will appear in that column
for the corresponding resources.
Settings The Settings tab enables you to view and specify

summarization information and project-level settings for the selected
project.

Mark to maintain only The month the project’s

summarized data for fiscal year begins. You can
the project. select a new month.
Maximum WBS level the

project data can be stored
to in the database for
summarization. This
summarize level impacts
the data shown in the
Primavera Web
application when viewing
summary, rather than
“live,” data.
Choose to identify all activities The maximum float time for

that have an early finish equal activities in the project
to the latest calculated early before they are marked
finish for the project with driving critical. You can type a new
relationships traced to the number and timeperiod.
project start date.
Marking the Contains Summarized Data Only checkbox

enables an organization to maintain summary-level data for
projects managed externally from the Project Management
module.
Calculations The Calculations tab enables you to set activity and

resource/role assignment preferences for the selected project.
In the Resource Assignments area, for the setting When Updating Actual
Units or Cost, to calculate a new At Complete as the sum of the actual and
remaining units or costs (At Complete = Actual units/costs + Remaining
units/costs), choose Add Actual to Remaining. Actual units and costs are
normally calculated using this option. To calculate the remaining units or
costs as the difference between the At Complete and actual units or costs
(Remaining units/costs = At Complete units/costs – Actual units/costs),
choose Subtract Actual from At Completion.

This setting is used to calculate the cost for Choose to determine the true At
activities that have labor/nonlabor/material Complete units/costs.
units with no assigned resources/roles or
resources/roles that do not have prices. Choose to track the amount
remaining before you exceed the
budget.
Mark to base percent
complete on activity steps
when using the physical
Mark to update the

Planned unit/cost values,
and finish dates, when the
Remaining or At
Completion values are
changed on activities that
Mark to recalculate actual or actual
have not started. Then,
this period units and costs when one
choose how to calculate
of these values is updated. This
the duration and units
option must be selected to store
when progress is removed
period performance.
from an activity.
Refer to the Help for further Mark the Recalculate Actual Units and Cost when Duration% Complete
information about the Changes checkbox to automatically update the actual units and costs when
calculation settings. the Duration% complete is updated. If this checkbox is cleared, the
module does not estimate actuals, and the actual fields remain blank unless
you specify values.
If you use timesheets or Apply Actuals to update or apply

actuals, this setting will not apply and the module will not
recalculate actuals.
You must have the project privilege Edit Project Details except
Financials to edit this setting. You can check the project
privileges in Admin, Security Profiles.
To recalculate units when costs are updated for resource assignments,

mark the Update Units when Costs Change on Resource Assignments
checkbox.
Mark the Link Actual and Actual This Period Units and Cost checkbox if
you intend to store past period actuals in the Store Period Performance
dialog box. If this option is not selected, you cannot store period
performance or edit past period actuals.

Setting Up the Organizational Breakdown Structure 97
Setting Up the Organizational

Breakdown Structure
An organizational breakdown structure (OBS)
In this chapter is a hierarchical arrangement of a project’s
management structure. User access and
The Enterprise OBS
privileges to nodes and projects within the
Viewing an OBS
enterprise project structure (EPS) are
Setting Up an OBS
implemented via responsible managers,
Editing OBS Elements
defined in an enterprise-wide OBS hierarchy.
An OBS is not the same as a resource pool.

While resources are assigned to activities,
OBS elements are associated with EPS nodes
and projects. The OBS element corresponding
to an EPS node is the project manager
responsible for all work included in that
branch of the hierarchy. In this way, an OBS
supports larger projects that involve several
project managers with different areas of
responsibility.
Read this chapter to learn how to set up an

OBS and associate its elements with the EPS.

The Enterprise OBS

The organizational breakdown structure (OBS) is a global hierarchy that
represents the managers responsible for the projects in your enterprise.
The OBS usually reflects the management structure of your organization,
from top-level personnel down through the various levels constituting your
business. You can associate the responsible managers with their areas of
the EPS—either nodes or individual projects. When you associate a
responsible manager with an EPS node, any projects you add to that
branch of the EPS are assigned that manager element by default. The OBS
hierarchy is also used to grant users specific access privileges to projects
and the WBS levels within projects.
Click the Display Options bar,

then Filter By, Current EPS/
Projects to view only the OBS
elements assigned to the
open projects.
You may want to create your OBS to match each EPS node and project set
up in the EPS. You can initially match OBS names to the EPS node and
project names. For example, for the Corporate (Corporate IT) node, name
the OBS element, Corporate IT Manager.
For more information about Assign users, by their login names, to the OBS elements to grant access to
setting up security, see the the corresponding EPS nodes or projects. The type of access granted to a
user is determined by the project security profile assigned to the user.
Security profiles are set up on the Security Profiles dialog box (choose
Admin, Security Profiles) and then assigned to users on the Users dialog
box (choose Admin, Users).

This user will have project

manager rights for the OBS
element to which he or she
is assigned.
Enterprise OBS nodes Creating an EPS node or a project in the

Projects window automatically creates and associates an OBS node as the
responsible manager.

The module automatically

associates the OBS assigned
to the EPS node in which the
new project is added.
The OBS can mirror the EPS at the node and project level, or include
additional OBS levels to accommodate your management organization.
For example, you may want to specify team leaders as the responsible
managers for the WBS levels of a project, and the project manager above
the team leaders in the OBS as the responsible manager of the project. In
this way, you can delineate appropriate access and security measures at
various levels of the EPS while maintaining an OBS that accurately
reflects your organization chart.
An OBS can have only one root element.
For more information about You can also produce reports based on your OBS; several standard OBS
producing OBS and other reports are included with the sample projects.
standard reports, see Part 5,
“Customizing Projects” on
page 405.

Viewing an OBS
You can view an OBS in two ways: as a chart or a table. Choose
Enterprise, OBS, to open the Organizational Breakdown Structure dialog
box.
View the OBS chart Click the Display Options bar, then choose Chart
View. To change the information included in the chart and the way it is
displayed, click the Display Options bar and choose Chart Box Template,
Customize.

This chart shows the OBS

name and associated users
for each OBS element;
choose Chart Box Template,
Customize to edit the
information shown in the
boxes and the box height and
width.
OBS Details are hidden so

that more of the chart is
visible.
View the OBS table Click the Display Options bar, then choose Table
View.
Click the OBS Name

column once to view the
OBS hierarchy; click it
again to list and sort OBS
elements.

Setting Up an OBS
Use the Organizational Breakdown Structure dialog box to create, view,
and edit the global OBS. You can also use this dialog box to view a list of
users who can access an OBS element’s global and project information,
and to see how people are assigned across the enterprise of projects.
For more information about Create an OBS A root OBS node is automatically assigned to the root
establishing EPS nodes, see EPS node so that a default OBS element can be assigned to each project
“Setting Up the Enterprise
Project Structure” on page 67. you add to the EPS root. When you use the Enterprise Project Structure
dialog box to set up the EPS nodes that make up the foundation of the
EPS, you can use the existing root EPS as the default for each node, or you
can set up the OBS before you build the EPS. You can then assign actual
responsible managers when you create EPS nodes. Once your basic OBS
is in place, you can include additional OBS elements to provide access to
specific EPS nodes, projects, and WBS elements, to users not included
with the original enterprise OBS node.
Choose Enterprise, OBS. Select the OBS element immediately above and
of the same hierarchy level as the element you want to add, then click
Add.
Click the OBS Name

column to display the OBS
hierarchy, as indicated by
this symbol.
The module inserts the new
OBS element at the same
level as the selected
element.
Type a meaningful name for

the new OBS.

Click in the OBS Description area on the General tab to type a description
of the OBS element. You can use HTML editing features, which include
formatting text, inserting pictures, copying and pasting information from
other document files (while retaining formatting), and adding hyperlinks.
For details on establishing View users associated with OBS elements Click the Users tab in
users and profiles, see the the Organizational Breakdown Structure dialog box to view the users and
corresponding security profiles associated with an OBS element. You can
also assign users from this tab, if you have appropriate access rights.
The user associated with the selected OBS at

that particular level of the hierarchy.

View a responsibility list Click the Responsibility tab to quickly see

where responsible managers (OBS elements) are assigned across the
enterprise. Select the OBS name for whom you want to see assignments.
Assignments for the

selected manager are
shown by WBS level
across the EPS.

Editing OBS Elements

You can edit an OBS in several ways. You can change an existing OBS
element’s position and information, you can add an OBS element
(described earlier), and you can delete an OBS element.
Edit an OBS element Choose Enterprise, OBS. Click the OBS Name
column label to display the OBS hierarchy. An outline symbol ( ) in the
OBS Name column label indicates a hierarchy display. Select the OBS
element you want to edit. To change the element’s information, click the
General tab and enter new information. To change the element’s position
in the OBS, click the appropriate arrow buttons.
The Scheduling Manager

OBS element is moved to the
right using the right-arrow
button, to make it an element
of the Project Coordinator
OBS.

Delete an OBS element Choose Enterprise, OBS. Click the OBS

Name column label to display the OBS hierarchy. Select the OBS element
you want to delete, then click Del/Merge. If the OBS element you want to
delete has WBS, issue, threshold, risk, or any other data item assignments,
you are prompted to merge the element with its higher-level OBS element.
Click Yes, then click Yes again.
If you delete a higher-level OBS element, the module deletes

all of the elements contained in that element.

Defining Resources and Roles
Resources include the personnel and
In this chapter equipment that perform work on activities
across all projects. Labor and nonlabor
Resources Overview resources, such as engineers and equipment,
Viewing and Adding Resources are always time-based and are usually assigned
Defining and Assigning Resource
to other activities and/or projects; material
Codes and Values resources, such as supplies and other
Setting Up Roles
consumable items, are recorded in terms of
cost per unit, rather than hours.
Assigning Roles to Resources
Defining Custom Resource You can create a resource hierarchy that
Curves reflects your organization’s resource structure
and supports the assignment of resources to
activities. You can establish unlimited
hierarchical resource codes for grouping and
rollups.
In addition, you can set up roles with specific

skill sets and use them as resource assignments
until specific resources can be assigned. This
enables you to schedule and plan costs by role
at the project planning stage. You can also
assign resource calendars and define a
resource’s contact information and price over
time. This chapter describes resources, roles,
and resource codes.
Resources Overview
You can develop a resource plan that integrates resources, costs, and the
schedule so you can effectively control your projects. Begin by defining a
list of all the resources necessary to complete the projects included in your
enterprise project structure (EPS). For each resource, set availability
limits, unit prices, and a calendar to define its standard worktime and
nonworktime. Define shifts and apply one or more of the shifts to the
resources to whom they apply. Group the resources by broad categories so
you can easily find a specific resource when assigning resources to a
project.
To enable grouping and rollups of your resources across the enterprise set
up resource codes and assign code values. Use this information to produce
resource reports and profiles. Analyze the resource allocation, and adjust
your project plan to avoid overallocation and peaks and valleys of resource
use.
Resources are different than expenses. While some resources are time-
based and generally extend across multiple activities and projects,
expenses are one-time expenditures for nonreusable items required by
activities.
Roles If you are in the planning stage of your project or want to see how
certain resource assignments will affect the schedule, you can assign roles
as temporary placeholders for resource assignments. Roles are project
personnel job titles or skills. They represent a type of resource with a
certain level of proficiency—rather than a specific individual. Roles can
also be assigned to specific resources to further identify that resource’s
skills.
For information about Primary resources An activity’s primary resource is typically the
assigning resources to resource who is responsible for coordinating an activity’s work. The
activities, see “Working with
Activities” on page 201. primary resource updates the activity’s start date, finish date, and expected
end date. In addition, if an activity has any material resources, the primary
resource may be responsible for reporting the material resource’s hours/
units.
Primary resources are also responsible for editing the physical percent
complete when weighted steps are linked to activity percent complete for
the corresponding activities in a selected project.

Defining Resources and Roles 111
Viewing and Adding Resources

Use the Resources window to view and add the resources required to
complete all projects across the enterprise. Structure the hierarchy of
resources according to the work performed. For example, you may have
various teams comprised of individuals in several resource groups in the
enterprise. You can set up the hierarchy so that the people managing these
groups are at a higher level than the resources in the groups.
You can set up multiple root, or top-level, elements in a resource

breakdown structure (RBS). A root RBS element serves as the lead person
(such as a manager), instead of a division or a department. For this reason,
you cannot roll up lower-level resources to the root resource.
You can also open the

Resources window at the
global level—without any
projects open.
Team leaders, project managers, and resource managers in charge of teams

or groups in the enterprise should jointly establish the resource hierarchy.
The program manager and/or project controls coordinator may need to
participate in this process to make sure resources are distributed
consistently based on availability.

View resources Choose Enterprise, Resources, or click Resources on

the Home workspace. Click the Display Options bar, then choose one of
the following:
To change the resource n To view detailed information about a specific resource, choose
display from hierarchy to Details, then select the resource whose information you want to view.
list view, click the Resource
ID column label. A triangle n To view resources as a chart, choose Chart View.
symbol in this column label n To select the columns to include in the display, choose Columns,
indicates a list display. You
Customize, or one of the predefined column displays.
can sort resource
information in a list display n To select the resources to display, choose Filter By, then choose All
by clicking a column label. Active Resources, All Resources, or Current Project’s Resources.
n To organize the resource hierarchy, choose Group and Sort By, and
choose one of the predefined groupings or customize your own.
If resource security is enabled, the module only displays the

resources you have access rights to view. Refer to the
Primavera Administrator’s Guide for more information.
Add a resource Choose Enterprise, Resources. Click the Display

Options bar, then choose Group and Sort By, Default, to display the
resource hierarchy. Select the resource immediately above and at the same
level as the resource you want to add, then click Add. Depending on your
user preferences, the New Resource wizard may be started. The wizard
prompts you to add the information included on each tab in Resource
Details. If you do not use the wizard, this information can also be entered
directly on each tab. To display Resource Details, click the Display
Options bar, then choose Details.
Refer to this section to establish basic resource information. To specify

additional information, refer to the following sections later in this chapter:
n Codes – “Defining and Assigning Resource Codes and Values” on
page 119
n Roles – “Setting Up Roles” on page 122 and “Assigning Roles to
Resources” on page 127

Use Resource Details to

add, view, and edit detailed
information about a new or
selected resource.
Click the left/right arrows to indent or

outdent a selected resource to denote its position in
the hierarchy; click the up/down arrows to move a
selected resource up or down in the hierarchy.
General information Use the General tab to enter general information

about the selected resource, including the resource’s ID, name, title,
employee ID, e-mail address, office phone numbers, and status.
The employee identifier

corresponding to the
resource, such as social
security number, used
for the employee in your
company
If the resource is associated with a user in If this checkbox is marked, the

the Timesheets module, this field will resource is available for assignment;
correspond to the E-Mail Address on the if cleared, it indicates an inactive
Contact tab of the Users dialog box. status or unavailability.

Details Use the Details tab to specify a resource’s labor classification—

labor (personnel), nonlabor (equipment), or material (supplies), indicate
whether a resource can log overtime hours, assign a calendar to the
selected resource, specify the resource’s default units/time, specify how
actual and remaining units are applied for a resource’s assignments, and
indicate that any assignments for a resource will have its quantities
recalculated whenever any cost changes occur.
The module uses your calendar assignments for activity scheduling, The minimum amount of
tracking, and resource leveling; you can select a global calendar or a time a resource is available
resource calendar for the resource. to work on an activity
You can select a unit of

measure name and
abbreviation for the
material resource.
By default, displays the
view currency selected in
User Preferences when
the resource was added;
you can select a different
currency to associate with
the resource.
Mark to automatically calculate the
Mark to enable the labor
selected resource’s actual quantity of
or nonlabor resource to
work according to project plan rather
record overtime hours for
than reported hours in the
activities in the
Timesheets module; clear if you are
Timesheets module.
using the Timesheets module to
Type the number by which the resource’s update actuals.
standard price should be multiplied to determine
Mark to indicate that any new
the resource’s overtime price (standard price *
assignments for this resource will
overtime factor = overtime price).
have its costs recalculated
whenever any quantity changes
occur, such as changing the
estimate to complete for an activity.

Default Units/Time
You can enter the default units/time value as a numeric value followed by a
forward slash (/) and the appropriate time duration, depending on your
user preference setting for time units, or as a percentage for labor and
nonlabor resources. For example, if the selected resource is one person, a
reasonable value may be eight hours (units) per day (duration). In this
case, the Default Units/Time would be 8.00h/d, or eight hours of work per
day. If you are entering a percentage, you would enter 100% indicating
that the resource is available to work full-time. Similarly, if the selected
resource is a department with five people, the Max Units/Time may be
40.00h/d, or 500%. This means that five people can perform 40 hours of
work per day, rather than one person performing 8 hours of work per day.
The module uses this value in conjunction with the calendar assignment to
calculate resource allocation/distribution during scheduling and leveling.
Marking the Calculate Costs From Units checkbox simply flags

the corresponding resource in the RBS—if you customize
columns in the Resources window to include the “Calculate
Costs From Units” column, a checkmark will appear in that
column for the corresponding resources. The actual setting to
perform a recalculation of resource quantities is on the
Calculations tab of Project Details.
Units and prices Use the Units & Prices tab to specify available
quantities (limits) for the resource. Setting limits helps you quickly
identify areas of resource overload in Resource Usage Profiles using
different colors to represent limits and overallocated units in histograms.
The module automatically adjusts the resource’s costs for its assigned
activities to reflect price changes for different timeperiods.

Select the resource’s shift calendar and type the applicable Double-click the cell, then type
shift number for which you are setting limits, if the shift the resource’s price followed by
calendar has more than one shift. See the Defining Resource a forward slash (/) and the unit
Shifts section for information about defining shifts. associated with the price.
You can set varying limits The number of units available during each workperiod
and prices over time by (hour, day, week, or month) of the specified timeframe;
specifying the effective start you can enter a percentage, or a numeric value followed
date for each change. by a forward slash (/) and the appropriate time duration,
depending on your user preference setting for time units.
To level resources, you must set availability limits (Max Units/

Time).
You can rename the five available Price/Unit fields in Admin

Preferences, Rate Types tab.
Using Limits for Delayed Resource Start

Use limits to delay the start of a resource in the project schedule until the
resource is available. For example, suppose you hire a new engineer, Joe,
but he does not start for another month. You can add Joe’s activities and
assignments to the project and then set the resource limits as follows:
Effective Date Max Units/Time
10AUG01 0h/h
10SEP01 1h/h
Notes Use the Notes tab to enter comments about the resource. You can
use HTML editing features, which include formatting text, inserting
pictures, copying and pasting information from other document files
(while retaining formatting), and adding hyperlinks.
For more information about Timesheets Use the Timesheets tab to specify the selected resource’s
configuring resources for use timesheet login name and whether the resource uses timesheets to record
with the Timesheets module,
see the Administrator’s hours for assigned activities. You must first set up login names in the
Guide. Users dialog box. Choose Admin, Users, then click the General tab.
Click the Browse button to select Mark if the resource uses

a login name for Timesheets. timesheets to record time
spent on his or her activities.
Click to access the Users dialog Click the Browse button to select
box, where you can specify a the resource’s timesheet
different login name and password. approval manager.

Defining Resource Shifts

You can globally define shifts that span specific work hours over a certain
period of time and apply one or more shifts directly to the resources to
whom they apply. The module considers the shift hours when calculating
units and prices during leveling. The resource calendar is used to
determine when the resource can work, and the limits for that period are
determined from the shift definition on that resource.
Define resource shifts Choose Enterprise, Resource Shifts. Click

Add, then type the new shift’s name. To edit the new shift, click Modify.
The total shift hours must add

up to 24 hours, and each shift
must have a duration of at least
one hour.
The start hour must begin and

end on the hour, for example,
8:00 rather than 8:30.
Choose Enterprise, Resources to assign the resource shifts to resources in

the Resources Window, Units & Prices tab.

Defining and Assigning Resource Codes and Values

Resource codes provide another way to categorize project resources. For
example, establish a code called Classification, and create values for it, for
example, Management and Engineering. Assign these values to the
appropriate resources so you can quickly group, filter, or sort by all
managers or all resources on the engineering team.
Set up resource codes Choose Enterprise, Resource Codes. Click

Modify to add resource code definitions—broad categories for which you
will be adding values. Type the resource code name and enter the
maximum number of characters for each value you will be assigning to the
code. Click Close when you are finished adding codes and value lengths.
Add resource code values In the Resource Codes dialog box, select
the code for which you want to establish values, then click Add. Type the
resource code value name; the maximum number of characters is preset at
the resource code level. Type a description for the value. To create a
hierarchy of code values, click the right arrow key to indent the selected
value one level.

You can further categorize

code values by arranging
them in a hierarchy.
Assign resource code values You can assign code values to

resources using the Codes tab in Resource Details or by creating resource
code columns in the Resources window and then assigning values in the
columns. To use the Codes tab, click the Display Options bar and choose
Details (the box next to the Details command should be marked). Click the
Codes tab, then click Assign. To use columns, click the Display Options
bar, then choose Columns, Customize, and add one or more resource code
columns. Refer to the following example:
Customize columns to
include the resource
codes for which you want
to assign values; click in
the column cell for each
resource to select the
resource code value
assignment...
or
click Assign to select the

resource code value for
the selected resource

Group and summarize using resource codes One way to use

resource codes is for grouping and sorting in Resource Usage
Spreadsheets. Right-click in a Resource Usage Spreadsheet layout and
choose Group and Sort By, Customize. Grouping by resource codes
enables you to quickly see the activities that are assigned to a particular
area of responsibility or are being performed by a specific group
throughout your enterprise. Click a group band to see a summary or rollup
of a particular group.
This section lists the activity assignments

for selected resources or roles.
This section is grouped

by resource code.

Setting Up Roles
Roles are project personnel job titles or skills, for example, project
planner, quality assurance tester, and engineer. You can create a standard
set of roles that you can assign to labor and nonlabor resources and
activities in all projects in the enterprise. You can establish an unlimited
number of roles and organize them in a hierarchy for easier management
and assignment. The set of roles you assign to an activity defines the
activity’s skill requirements. You can also define multiple price per unit
rates and unit/time limits for each role to accurately plan future costs and
allocation.
Assign roles to activities as you would resources during project schedule

and cost planning. When your plans are finalized, you can replace roles
with resources, based on each activity’s role and skill requirements.
View roles Choose Enterprise, Roles, then click the Display Options
bar.
n To view only those roles that have assignments in the open project,
choose Filter By, Current Project’s Roles.
n To view all roles, choose Filter By, All Roles.

View roles for a specific resource Choose Enterprise, Resources.

Select the resource whose roles you want to view. Display Resource
Details by clicking the Display Options bar and choosing Details. Click
the Roles tab.
Add a role Choose Enterprise, Roles. Select the role immediately above
and at the same level as the role you want to add, then click Add. Type the
role’s ID and name. To create a hierarchy of roles, click the right arrow
key to indent the selected role one level. For example, you may want to list
specific roles included under Project Manager, such as Design Manager.
Type a description of the role’s responsibilities. You can use HTML

editing features, which include formatting text, inserting pictures, copying
and pasting information from other documents (while retaining
formatting), and adding hyperlinks.

Replace the highlighted

text with the ID and name
of the new role.
Click the up/down arrows to move a role up or down in the list;

click the left/right arrows to change a role’s hierarchy level.
For more information on Add rates to a role You can add up to five price per unit rates for each
assigning roles to activities, role in the roles dictionary. When you assign a role to an activity during
refer to “Assigning Resources
and Roles” on page 219. project planning, you can choose which rate you want to use to calculate
cost. Defining rates for specific roles yields more accurate project cost
planning results.
To add rates to a role choose Enterprise, Roles. If tabs are not displayed in
the Roles dialog box, click the Display Options bar and choose Roles
Details. Select the role you want to assign rates to, then click the Prices
tab. Enter up to five Price/Unit rates for the selected role.
For example, if the price per unit is $25/hour, enter 25h; if the price per
unit is $50000/year, enter 50000y. You can only enter unit values in
minutes, hours, days, weeks, months, and years. Your system
administrator defines the abbreviations for these units in the Admin
Preferences, Time Periods tab.

Mark to indicate that any

new assignments for this
role will have its costs
recalculated whenever any
quantity changes occur,
such as changing the
estimate to complete for an
activity.
Enter the price and unit for the selected role. The
unit must be the same for each rate defined for a
specific role (e.g., you cannot mix hourly and weekly
time units for the same role). If multiple rates are
defined for a role and you change the unit for one
rate, the module changes the unit for all other
defined rates. If you enter a price but not a unit, the
default unit is hours.
Define role limits Use the Limits tab to specify available quantities
(limits) for a role. Setting limits helps you quickly identify areas of role
overload in Resource/Role Usage Profiles, using different colors to
represent limits and overallocated units in charts and histograms.
In the Primavera Web By default, role limits are calculated based on the limit defined
application, you can view for each role’s primary resource, which may not accurately
role limits in all charts and reflect a role’s planned allocation. In the Project Management
histograms that display module, on the User Preferences, Resource Analysis tab, you
role data, such as the can choose to display role limits based on the custom role
Capacity Planning chart limits you define in the Roles dictionary. In the Primavera Web
(Portfolios section), Role application, you can set this same option in the Global
Usage histogram Preferences, Resource Staffing section.
(Resources section), and
Team Usage histogram
(Projects section).

To define role limits, choose Enterprise, Roles. If tabs are not displayed in
the Roles dialog box, click the Display Options bar and choose Roles
Details. Select the role you want to define limits for, then click the Limits
tab. Click Add at the bottom of the Roles dialog box. Double-click in the
Effective Date column, then click the Browse button to select the date the
limit takes effect. In the Max Units/Time column, enter the allocation limit
for the role as a unit value or as a percentage, depending on your user
preference settings for resource units/time (User Preferences, Time Units
tab).
The number of units

available during
each workperiod
(hour, day, week, or
month); you can
enter a percentage,
or a numeric value
followed by a forward
slash (/) and the
You can set appropriate time
varying limits duration, depending
over time by on your user
specifying the preference setting
effective start for time units.
date for each
change. Each
effective date
must be
unique.

Assigning Roles to Resources

The set of roles you assign to a resource describes the resource’s skill
capabilities. These role assignments make it easy to assign resources to
activities according to role. You can also assign roles to activities directly
when you are unsure of the actual resources available to work on those
activities. You can later replace the roles with the applicable resources.
For information on assigning You can assign roles to resources in two ways: from the Resource Details
resources to activities by role, window or from the Roles dialog box.
see “Working with Activities”
on page 201.
Assign roles to resources from the Resource Details window
Choose Enterprise, Resources, select the resource to which you want to
assign a role, click the Display Options bar, then choose Details. Click the
Roles tab, then click Assign.
Mark the checkbox for the role you want to use as the default
role, if there are more than one listed for the resource.
Displays resource roles

for the selected resource;
click the Role ID column
label to sort the display.
You can modify role names in You can analyze resource and skill
the Roles dialog box (choose supply and demand using role and
Enterprise, Roles). proficiency usage profiles.
Assign roles to resources from the Roles dialog box Choose

Enterprise, Roles. Click the Display Options bar, then choose Roles
Details. Select the role you want to assign. Click the Resources tab, then
click Assign.

Select the resource to which

you want to assign the
selected role; click the
Assign button, then click the
Close button.
Double-click the displayed proficiency level, then select the appropriate

proficiency level.

Defining Custom Resource Curves

Resource/cost distribution curves enable you to specify how you want
resource units or costs spread over the duration of an activity. Resource
units and costs are distributed evenly during an activity unless you specify
nonlinear distribution using curves. The Resource Usage Profile and
Resource Usage Spreadsheet reflect resource curves. Resource curves are
not used when leveling.
If some of your activities The module contains a set of pre-defined resource curves you can assign to
require unique future resource/role assignments. When the pre-defined resources curves do not
period allocations because accurately capture how units should be spread for some of your project’s
planned work cannot be activities, you can create global custom resource curves. If many activities
accurately distributed require resource/role units to be spread using the same distribution curve,
using custom resource
you can define the custom curve and assign it to the necessary resource/
curves, you can manually
role assignments.
enter future period planned
and remaining units values
for assignments in the If timesheet data exists for the actuals, curves are ignored for the actuals
Resource Usage and are spread using the timesheet data. Activities with timesheet data
Spreadsheet (Resource continue to spread the remaining units using the curve. To use curves to
Assignments and Activities calculate the Actual Units/Cost and EV Units/Costs, mark the Recalculate
windows). Refer to Actual Units and Costs when duration % complete changes checkbox in
“Manually Planning Future the Calculations tab in Project Details.
Period Assignments” on
page 224 for more
information. Resource curves do not support expenses. The Accrual Type
field will continue to spread the expenses.
For instructions on assigning Add a custom resource curve Choose Enterprise, Resource Curves.
resource curves to resource Click Add. Select an existing curve from which to copy the curve value
and role assignments, see
“Assigning Resource Curves percentages, then click Select. Type a name for the new resource curve.
to Resource or Role
Assignments” on page 223.

You can type

up to 60
alphanumeric
characters for
the new
resource curve
name.
Click Modify to define the curve’s distribution. Edit the curve value
percentages to create a curve that indicates how your costs/units should
distribute over time. Curves are defined by 21 points (at 5% intervals from
0 to 100). Click Prorate to make the total of the distribution values equal to
100% while maintaining the shape you specified. Click OK, then Close.

Resource lag is taken into consideration. The curve should

begin on the “lagged” start date.
Delete a custom resource curve Choose Enterprise, Resource

Curves. Select the global curve you want to delete. Click Delete, then click
Yes.
You cannot delete the default curves. If you delete a resource

curve assigned to a resource or role assignment, the curve is
removed from the assignment, and earned value for those
assignments is recalculated.

Reviewing Work Breakdown Structures 133
Reviewing Work Breakdown

Structures
A work breakdown structure (WBS) is a
In this chapter hierarchical arrangement of the products and
services produced during and by a project. The
The Enterprise WBS
project is the highest level of the WBS while
Viewing a WBS
an individual activity required to create a
Grouping by WBS Path
product or service is the lowest level. Each
Adding WBS Elements and
Assigning Properties project in the enterprise project structure (EPS)
Using WBS Milestones has its own WBS.
Assigning WBS Category Values When creating a project, the project manager
Defining Earned Value Settings typically develops the WBS first, assigns work
for Specific WBS Elements
products and documents to each WBS
Assigning Estimation Weights to
WBS Elements element, and then defines activities for
performing the element’s work. Specific
earned value calculations can be specified for
each WBS element, along with an organiza-
tional breakdown structure (OBS) element
responsible for all work included in the WBS
element.
Read this chapter to learn how to set up and

implement a WBS.

The Enterprise WBS

The enterprise work breakdown structure (WBS) consists of the WBS for
each project included in the enterprise project structure (EPS), in effect,
extending the EPS beyond the project level. You can view the entire WBS
at once, or you can display only the work breakdown structures for a
specific node or project. Open the EPS element whose WBS you want to
view, then choose Project, WBS.
When you create a project,

the module automatically
creates a WBS element at the
same hierarchy level and with
the same name as the
project; you can differentiate
the WBS level from that of the
project by adding numbers or
letters such as Bldg.1,
Bldg.D&E.
You can break down the work

further, essentially extending
the EPS to another level.
Planning and budgeting You can set anticipated dates, budgets, and
spending plans at a high level in a WBS to indicate when the work should
occur and how much its planned budget and monthly spending will cost.
Because financial information is shared between projects and their WBS
elements, you can use the preestablished budget amounts and funding
information you set for WBS elements immediately for their project and
activity counterparts.

The budget
and spending
plan can stand
alone to
represent
financial data
for the WBS
level.
You can also summarize project data to a specific WBS level when
calculating and maintaining summary data.
Project Details
The WBS levels to which

you want to summarize data
for viewing in the Primavera
Web application.
You can also use the WBS at the planning stage of a project for top-down
estimations and summary rollups of data not yet associated with projects.
For example, you can create a WBS for a higher-level node of the EPS and
include summary data, planned budgets, and dates, independent of any
project.

Viewing a WBS
You can view a WBS as a chart or a table. Open the Work Breakdown
Structure window by choosing Project, WBS; you can also click WBS
from the Directory bar or from the Home workspace.
View the Work Breakdown Structure chart Click the Display

Options bar, then choose Show on Top, Chart View. To change the
displayed information, click the Display Options bar and choose Chart
Box Template, then an information type.
To change the display’s

content and appearance,
click the Display Options bar,
then choose Chart Box
Template and/or Chart Font
and Colors.
View the Work Breakdown Structure table Click the Display

Options bar, then choose Show on Top, WBS Table. To list and sort WBS
elements, click the WBS Code column label. To change the information
the table displays, click the Display Options bar, then choose any of the
following:
■ To view detailed information about a specific WBS element, choose
Show on Bottom, WBS Details, then select the WBS element whose
information you want to view. To hide WBS Details, choose Show on
Bottom, No Bottom Layout.
■ To change the columns in the WBS display, choose Columns, then
one of the predefined displays, or customize the columns.

You can also choose to display a Gantt Chart to the right of the WBS
table. Click the Display Options bar, then choose Show on Top, Gantt
Chart.
Click the Display Options bar,

then choose Columns,
Customize, to select only the
columns you want to display.
This display is grouped

according to OBS
assignment.

Grouping by WBS Path

You can organize multiple projects that use the same work breakdown
structure (WBS) by grouping their identical WBS levels. The WBS path
lists activities grouped by WBS levels, without displaying the project level
node. Group by WBS path in the Activities and WBS windows. You can
also filter or display the WBS path as a column in projects and reports.
Further organize a layout by sorting to arrange the order of activities. If
you use both grouping and sorting to organize a layout, the items are
grouped first, then sorted.
Organize multiple projects

that follow the same work
breakdown structure path.
Group activities by WBS path Choose Project, Activities, then

choose View, Group and Sort. In the Group By section, click the cell, then
select WBS Path. Click Sort, then select a sort order for the WBS path.
Click OK. Click Sort, then select a sort order for the WBS path. Click OK.
To view the WBS path in the WBS window, choose Project,

WBS, then View, Group and Sort by, WBS Path.

Adding WBS Elements and Assigning Properties

When you create projects, the module automatically creates a WBS top-
level element with the same name and EPS and project IDs as the project.
Use the Work Breakdown Structure window to view and edit the open
project’s WBS.
Add a WBS element Choose Project, WBS. Select the WBS element
immediately above and under which you want to add the new element,
then click Add. The new WBS element is indented one level under the
selected WBS element.
Display Work Breakdown Structure Details by clicking the Display

Options bar and choosing Show on Bottom, WBS Details. Refer to the
following sections to establish basic WBS properties. To specify
additional information, refer to the following chapters:
To include/exclude tabs, ■ Notebook tab – “Setting Up the Enterprise Project Structure” on

right-click in the Details page 67
area, and choose
Customize WBS Details. ■ Budget Log, Spending Plan, and Budget Summary tabs – “Defining
Budgets” on page 151
■ WBS Milestones – “Using WBS Milestones” on page 143
■ WPs & Docs tab – “Maintaining a Project’s Document Library” on
page 359
■ Earned Value tab – “Defining Earned Value Settings for Specific
WBS Elements” on page 146

Display Work Breakdown

Structure Details so you
can add and assign
information for each WBS
element you create.
General information Use the General tab to view and edit the selected
WBS element’s general information. This includes the code, name, status,
and responsible manager.
The user-defined dates the project/activities associated with the
WBS element are expected to start and finish; used during the
project planning stage, and set at the WBS, EPS, or project level
Determines whether
Timesheets users have
access to activities within the
WBS. In general, only Active
status enables access.
However, a project level
option can be set to enable
read-only access when the
WBS status is Inactive. The name of the selected WBS
element’s root OBS element
You can also directly edit Edit a WBS element Select the WBS element you want to edit. To
some WBS information in change the element’s position in the WBS, click the appropriate arrow
the Work Breakdown buttons at the bottom of the command bar on the right side of the Work
Structure table. Double- Breakdown Structure window. Display Work Breakdown Structure Details
click the information you by clicking the Display Options bar and choosing Show on Bottom, WBS
want to change, then type
Details, then enter new information in the tabs.
or select the new value.

Delete a WBS element Choose Project, WBS. Select the WBS

element you want to delete, then click Delete. If the WBS elements you
want to delete have activity assignments, you are prompted to delete the
WBS element and all of its activity assignments, or delete the WBS
element and reassign, or merge, all of its activity assignments to the
element’s higher-level WBS element. Click OK, then click Yes.
If you delete a higher-level WBS element, the module also

deletes all elements contained in that element.
How a WBS Element’s Status Affects

Timesheets Users
There are four status types for WBS elements: Planned, Active, Inactive,
and What-If.
Planned WBS elements If a WBS element’s status is Planned,
Timesheets users cannot view any activities included in the WBS element.
This prevents Timesheets users from assigning themselves to and
performing work on activities assigned to a WBS element that is not
authorized for actual use.
Active WBS elements If a WBS element’s status is Active,

Timesheets users can view all activities included in the WBS element.
Depending on their timesheet privileges, users may also be able to assign
themselves to and perform work on activities that are included in an Active
WBS element.
If a WBS element belongs to a higher-level WBS element, the element has

the same status as that element.
Inactive WBS elements If a WBS element’s status is Inactive, a

project level setting, which appears on the Project Details Resources tab,
determines whether Timesheets users can view activities that belong to the
WBS. When this option is turned on, Timesheets users can view, but can
not edit activities that are included in the Inactive WBS element.

What-If WBS elements If a WBS element’s status is What-If,

Timesheets users cannot view any activities included in the WBS element.
This prevents Timesheets users from assigning themselves to and
performing work on activities assigned to a WBS element that is not
authorized for actual use.
If a WBS element belongs to a higher-level WBS element, both elements

have the same status.

Using WBS Milestones

In the initial stages of project planning, the project manager, and other
individuals responsible for establishing project processes, need to decide
how the module will calculate earned value, percent complete, resource
use, and financial data.
You can add an unlimited number of WBS milestones, which can also be
used to calculate earned value. Milestones are assigned at the WBS level,
and each milestone is given a weight that indicates its importance to the
project schedule. When you mark a WBS milestone as complete, the
module uses its weight to calculate the performance percent complete of
all activities included in the WBS level. That is, the performance percent
complete is applied to all activities under that WBS level and then rolled
back up to the WBS.
For example, suppose a particular level of the WBS includes 10 activities,

and actual finish dates have been entered for 5 of these activities. The
same WBS level is also assigned four WBS milestones having equal
weights, but only one of these milestones is marked as complete. The
module uses the completed WBS milestone to calculate the WBS level’s
performance percent complete as 25, even though half the activities
included in the WBS level are finished.
You may want to use WBS milestones when higher-level task increments
comprise a body of activities and you want to control the activities at the
WBS level. For example, to control the design of a new product, you
might assign WBS milestones to the major steps required to complete the
design—such as drafting the requirements, writing the design
specifications, and so on. Each of these milestones would contain the
detailed activities required to complete it.
The first milestone is

complete, and the
corresponding
performance percent
complete, relative to the
other WBS milestones, is
shown.

If a WBS element has no activities beneath it, and you mark

milestones as complete, the performance percent complete will
remain zero. To calculate performance percent complete, add a
dummy activity to the WBS element.
Add WBS milestones Use the WBS Milestones tab to add an

unlimited number of WBS milestones to a WBS element. Click Add, then
type a name for the milestone and assign a weight for calculating
performance percent complete for all activities in the WBS element.
The module calculates this performance percent Type a number indicating the significance
complete, or earned value, based on the weighted of this milestone relative to the others
milestones you mark as Completed on this tab, listed, and to calculate a corresponding
independent of the child activities corresponding to the percent complete value when the
selected WBS element. milestone is marked Completed.
When you mark the checkbox for a milestone, the module

calculates the performance percent complete for the WBS
element based on the milestone’s weight value in combination
with the other milestones listed.
How Weights Affect Percent Complete

If all weighted milestones for a WBS element have a value of 1.0 and you
have a total of four milestones, marking one as Completed would indicate
that the WBS element is twenty-five percent complete. If this same
milestone had a weight of 9.0, and the other three had 1.0 weights,
marking it Completed would indicate that the WBS element is seventy-
five percent complete. The module uses the following formula to calculate
percent complete from weighted milestones:
Actual Weight of Completed Milestones / Total Possible Weight of All Milestones
Applying this formula to the previous example, the completed milestone
has a weight of 9.0, and is divided by the total weight of all milestones
(12.0), to equal seventy-five percent complete.

Assigning WBS Category Values

Depending on your security profile, you can define a custom category and
category values for WBS elements. This category and its values are not
project-specific; you can assign category values to all WBS elements in
the EPS, which allows you to customize the module to reflect your
organization’s terminology and unique requirements. This category and its
values also enables you to group, sort, and filter WBS elements.
For more information about Establish a custom category and its values using the Admin Categories
defining a WBS category and dialog box. The Admin Categories dialog box appears when you choose
values, see “Defining
Administrative Preferences Admin, Admin Categories.
and Categories” on page 29.
Assign a WBS category value Choose Project, WBS. Add the WBS
category as a column by clicking the Display Options bar and choosing
Columns, Customize. Select the WBS category name under General in the
Available Options area, then click the right arrow button to move it to the
Selected Options column; click OK. Select the WBS element to which you
want to assign a category value, then click the Browse button in the WBS
category column.
Select the value to

assign to the WBS
element, click the
Select button, then click
the Close button.

Defining Earned Value Settings for Specific WBS

Elements
Earned value is a technique for measuring project performance according
to both project costs and the schedule. This technique compares the
budgeted cost of the work to the actual cost. While earned value analyses
are typically performed for WBS elements, you can also perform an
earned value analysis for activities and groups of activities.
Use the Earned Value tab in Work Breakdown Structure Details to specify
settings for calculating the selected WBS element’s earned value. Earned
Value cost is the portion of the budgeted total cost of the activity that is
actually completed as of the project data date; it is calculated as
Earned Value = Budget At Completion (BAC) x Performance % Complete
The method for calculating the performance percent complete depends on
the earned-value technique selected for the activity’s WBS.
To define default earned Define earned value settings for a specific WBS element
value settings for all WBS Display Work Breakdown Structure Details by clicking the Display
elements, choose Admin, Options bar and choosing Show on Bottom, WBS Details. Select the WBS
Admin Preferences, then element whose earned value settings you want to define, then click the
click the Earned Value tab. Earned Value tab.

In the Technique for Computing Performance Percent Complete area,

choose the completion percentage method you want to use when
calculating an activity’s earned value:
■ Activity Percent Complete: Calculates earned value according to
current activity completion percentages and the percent complete type
selected on the General tab of Activity Details. Mark Use Resource
Curves / Future Period Buckets if you want to override the Activity
Percent Complete type for activities that have a resource curve
assigned to at least one of the resource assignments, or for activities
that have assignments with manually-defined future period bucket
values. If a curve is assigned, Units Percent Complete is always
multiplied by the Budget at Completion to calculate Earned Value.
■ WBS Milestones Percent Complete: Calculates earned value
according to completion of the WBS element’s weighted milestones,
rather than the completion percentages of the element’s activities.
■ 0/100 Percent Complete: Calculates earned value as 100 percent
only after the activity ends. Until the activity is complete, the
activity’s earned value is zero percent.
■ 50/50 Percent Complete: Calculates earned value as 50 percent after
the activity starts and until the activity ends. After the activity ends,
the activity’s earned value is 100 percent.
■ Custom Percent Complete: Calculates earned value as a percentage
you specify. This percentage applies after the activity starts and until
the activity ends. After the activity ends, the activity’s earned value is
100 percent.
In the Technique for Computing ETC area, choose the method you want to
use when calculating an activity’s estimate to complete (ETC) value:
■ ETC = Remaining Cost for Activity: Calculates ETC values as the
remaining cost to complete an activity (ETC = remaining duration of
activity * applicable resource rates).
■ PF = 1: Calculates ETC values as Budget At Completion (BAC) less
Earned Value Cost. This method yields an optimistic result.
■ PF = 1/CPI: Calculates ETC values according to a Performance
Factor (PF) of 1 divided by the Cost Performance Index (CPI).This
method yields the most likely result.
■ PF = 1/(CPI*SPI): Calculates ETC values according to a PF of 1
divided by the product of the CPI and Schedule Performance Index
(SPI). This method yields a pessimistic result.
■ PF =: Calculates ETC values according to a PF you specify.

Assigning Estimation Weights to WBS Elements

You can assign estimation weights to work breakdown structure (WBS)
elements and activities to perform Top-down estimation. You can assign
estimation weights directly in the Project Management module or import
them from the Methodology Management module using Project Architect.
For information about using The Project Management module uses the estimation weights to calculate
Top-down Estimation, see the number of units that each WBS element receives in relation to its
“Performing Top-down
Estimation” on page 261. lower-level elements in the WBS hierarchy. For example, if 1,000 days of
labor are applied top down to three WBS elements with estimation
weights of 30, 30, and 40, then each WBS element receives 300 days, 300
days, and 400 days, respectively. Top-down estimation weights are relative
values between elements in the WBS hierarchy; the absolute values of the
estimation weights have no meaning.
Top-down estimation uses the WBS Estimated Weight field to determine

how to “push down” the units within each branch of the WBS. The
algorithm is:
WBS 1.1 Weight

WBS 1.1 Units = Sum of All WBS Weights at WBS Level x Est Units
where:
WBS 1.1 Weight = Weight of WBS 1.1

WBS 1.1 Units = Number of Units Allocated to WBS Element 1.1
Sum of All WBS Weights at WBS Level = Sum of Weight of All WBSs at
Same Level of Hierarchy as WBS 1.1
Est Units = Number of Estimated Units Distributed Among All WBSs at
WBS Level 1.N
For example, if you select a WBS with three, level-one WBS elements
beneath it, and each of those elements has a weight of 1 with an estimate
of 100 days, the module calculates each WBS as having 33.3 days, as
follows:
1
Units = 1 + 1 + 1 x 100d = 33.3d
Alternatively, if the weights for each WBS element vary, such as 6 for one
element and 2 each for the other two elements, the result is 60 days for the
first element, and 20 days each for the other two elements:
6
Units = 6 + 2 + 2 x 100d=60d

The algorithm continues to calculate any lower-level WBS elements in the

WBS branch to distribute the units accordingly. This process continues
until all WBS levels in the branch have been considered; it then continues
with the next branch in the hierarchy. The module ignores any WBS
element that does not have activity assignments when distributing units
within a branch of the WBS.
If an activity has multiple resources assigned, each resource will be

allocated remaining units in proportion to how many remaining units each
resource previously was assigned for that activity. For example, if
Resource 1 previously had six hours of remaining units on an activity with
remaining units of five days, and Resource 2 previously had four hours of
remaining units, Resource 1 will now have remaining units of three days
(24 hours) and Resource 2 will have remaining units of two days (16
hours).
If an activity is completed, that activity is allocated zero

remaining units. If all activities under a WBS are completed,
zero units are distributed to that WBS.
Assign estimation weights to WBS elements Choose Project,

WBS. Click the Display Options bar, then choose Columns, Customize. In
the Est Weight column, enter the applicable weights for each element
listed.

You can also right-click to

select the columns to
display for entering data.
Type directly in the column

field for the WBS element to
enter its estimated weight.
Assign estimation weights to activities Choose Project, Activities.

Click the Display Options bar, then choose Columns. Add the Est Weight
column by selecting it in the Available Columns list and clicking the right
arrow. Click OK. Enter the applicable weights in the Est Weight column
for each activity listed.
Est Weight is located under

the General listing.

Defining Budgets 151
Defining Budgets
Budgets consist of the total estimated effort
In this chapter (or quantities) necessary, and the cash flow
required, to complete a project. Before a
Top-Down Budgeting
project starts, the resource/cost manager, along
Establishing Budgets
with the operations executive, program
Establishing a Monthly Spending
Plan manager, and project manager, determine
Tracking Budget Changes scope and budget requirements, and set these
Establishing Funding estimates. As requirements change, resource
Tracking and Analyzing Budgets and financial support are adjusted to
compensate for those changes. The individuals
involved in project funding and financial
support can perform top-down estimating and
log changes to the budget in the project
planning stage, or after the project is
underway. The module tracks these changes,
while retaining the original amounts. Read this
chapter to learn how to establish a budget, note
and implement changes to it, and track
monthly spending and variance at various
levels in your enterprise—enterprise project
structure (EPS) node, project, and work
breakdown structure (WBS).

Top-Down Budgeting
The ability to perform top-down planning is key to enterprise-wide
planning and control. If an organization’s projects have a budget of $5
billion over the next two years, the details probably will not be worked out
until some period after the first project commences. The structure used by
a company to organize its projects must be flexible enough to allow each
project and group of projects to maintain its WBS and to draw only against
the resources normally allotted to it.
The module facilitates a top-down budgeting approach to cost

management. The resource/cost manager or other person responsible for
making decisions about project launches generally establishes high-level
budget estimates. These estimates are set at each EPS node. Project
managers distribute the budgets to the projects for which they are
responsible in each node, as shown in the following example.
Set original budget estimate at EPS node. Assembly $6,000,000
Distribute original budget at the project level. Values

Auto $4,000,000
do not roll up, and distributed values do not have to
equal the budget of the higher-level EPS node.
Conv $2,000,000
Corporate $1,500,000
FS-upg $1,500,000
Facilities $3,000,000
Bldg $2,500,000
Hydra-DE $500,000
Once budget estimates are set at the EPS level, you can establish a
monthly spending plan to keep track of cash flow for each node and
project.

Assembly $6,000,000
MAY03 $180,000
JUN03 $360,000
Spending plan at EPS node
JUL03 $710,000
AUG03 $2,000,000
AUTO $4,000,000 CONV $2,000,000
MAY03 $100,000 MAY03 $100,000
JUN03 $200,000 JUN03 $170,000
JUL03 $300,000 JUL03 $450,000
AUG03 $850,000 AUG03 $850,000
Spending plan at project level
With spending plans in place, you can compare the monthly totals for the
EPS node with those of all projects in the node, to ensure monthly
spending does not exceed your original budget estimates.
Spending Plan Spending Plan Tally

(Assembly) (AUTO+CONV) Variance
MAY03 $180,000 $200,000 – $20,000
Negative variance indicates a
JUN03 $360,000 $370,000 – $10,000 need to reevaluate planned
spending during these
JUL03 $710,000 $750,000 – $40,000 months.
AUG03 $2,000,000 $1,700,000 $300,000
If your projects use funding to support budgets, you can also set up a
Funding Source dictionary, which you can then use to quickly assign
specific funding sources to budget items as you develop projects.
When estimates are firmly established, resource/cost managers and team

leaders can set budget amounts and spending plans at the WBS levels for
which they’re responsible. Resources and budgets can then be allocated at
the activity level.

Once projects are underway, you can monitor budget changes using
change logs, and continue to track monthly spending as actual costs are
applied.
When your projects are complete, you can record and maintain the benefit,
or return on investment (ROI), of performing each project. This value
assists the operations executive in the strategic planning process when
undertaking future projects.
The remainder of this chapter discusses how to establish budgets,

spending plans, and funding, as well as how to track changes.

Establishing Budgets
You can establish budget estimates at the planning stage, then refine them
as projects progress. Document budget changes as they occur, and then
use these changes to calculate the latest budgeted amounts for the project.
You can also record monthly spending of budgeted funds, track the
current and undistributed variance amounts, and roll up the monthly
spending plan of each project in a branch to its higher EPS nodes.
Set up the total budget for each EPS node in the hierarchy first, then enter
the applicable portion of the total budgeted amount to each project in the
node’s branch. Once these initial total amounts are entered, you can start
apportioning anticipated monthly spending amounts per project. The
module then tallies the amounts for the projects so you can keep track of
the total spending plan and assess the variance between this total and the
current budget. This process is ongoing through the project life cycle.
Close to the completion of the project, you can better determine
profitability and enter the ROI. This amount can be used as a gauge when
determining whether a project of this type should be undertaken in the
future.
Display Project Details by Establish budgets Choose Enterprise, Projects, to open the Projects
clicking the Display window. (If you already set budget estimates for nodes and projects, open
Options bar and choosing the WBS window to enter budgets for the WBS levels in your projects.)
Show on Bottom, Project Click the Budget Log tab for the selected node/project (or WBS element).
Details. Enter the total budgeted amount you anticipate for this project in the
Original Budget field.

Enter the total estimated

budget amount for the
selected EPS node or project.
After you have entered budgeted totals for a node and its projects, you can
start apportioning anticipated monthly spending amounts for each of the
projects in the branch. Read the next section for more information.

Establishing a Monthly Spending Plan

You can distribute the budget monthly for each EPS node and project to
create a spending plan. The Spending Plan tab also totals the spending
plans of lower levels of the EPS on a monthly basis so you can compare
how much you distributed at a high level to how much was actually
distributed at lower levels. In the following example, at the EPS node level
Assembly, the spending plan for 01MAY is $150,000. The combined
spending plans of Assembly’s projects (AUTO and CONV) is $160,000.
Because this amount is $10,000 more than was planned, it appears in red
($10,000) in the Undistributed Current Variance column.
Monthly spending plan of levels The difference between the EPS

beneath the EPS node selected node’s monthly spending and that
of its projects’ tallies.
Enter monthly spending amounts at the EPS level Click the

Spending Plan tab in the Projects window for a selected EPS node or
project. Enter total expenditures for each month in the Spending Plan
column. The Spending Plan Tally column shows any amounts previously
recorded for project spending plans.

You can also use the Spending Plan tab to establish a monthly benefit
plan. This plan helps you track the financial benefit of performing the
projects on a monthly basis. Enter the benefit amount, or profit return on
your monthly spending, in the Benefit Plan column. The module also
tallies the benefit plans for the combined project amounts in a selected
EPS node branch.

Tracking Budget Changes

As projects progress, changes in scope, resource reallocation, funding
additions/withdrawals, or other factors that affect original budgeted
amounts, often occur. The Budget Change Log enables you to track
modifications that affect the budget; this log also provides a clear
indication of the who, what, when, where, and how behind the change.
Change amounts are not incorporated in the current budget until these
amounts have an Approved status. Only authorized project participants
may issue budget changes and mark them as approved. You may post a
change amount as Pending; the program manager of the affected EPS
node, or the project manager of the affected project, must then mark the
amount as Approved or Not Approved. The module recalculates the new
budgeted amount and adjusts the current budget based on approved
changes to the log:
Proposed Budget = Original Budget + Approved Budget Changes + Pending

Budget Changes
Current Budget = Original Budget + Approved Budget Changes

Enter the budget. As the

project progresses, record
any changes.
The module calculates these fields based on the

original budget and approved and pending
budget changes.
Click the Budget Summary tab to track budget and spending totals as
projects progress and changes occur. The Budget Summary tab enables
you to see the current budget, distributed current budget, and benefit plan
totals for an overall picture of how your projects are doing financially.
Current Budget –Total Spending Plan
Total Spending Plan – Total Spending Plan Tally

Establishing Funding
If you are working on government, capital, or other projects that are
traditionally funded by sources outside or within your organization, you
can set up a Funding Source dictionary, which you can then use to quickly
assign specific funding sources to budget items as you develop projects.
You can apply unlimited Define funding sources Choose Enterprise, Funding Sources. Select
funding assignments to the funding source immediately above and at the same level as the fund
each EPS and project you want to add, then click Add. You can set up the Funding Source
level. dictionary as a hierarchy to categorize and group similar funds, such as
those affiliated with a particular agency.
Type any additional information about the fund in the Description area
using HTML editing features, which include formatting text, inserting
pictures, copying and pasting information from other document files
(while retaining formatting), and adding hyperlinks, then click Close.
To display your funding hierarchy as a chart, click the Display

Options bar and choose Chart View.

The funds you establish

are global, or available to
any EPS node or project in
your EPS hierarchy.
Use the arrows to change

the placement of a selected
fund in the hierarchy.
Specify your
funding source,
amount, and fund
share percentage at
the EPS or project
level.
The fund share value is the portion of the total funded amount contributed
by the funding source for the assignment. You can assign the same
funding source multiple times with varying monetary amounts and share
contributions for different levels of the EPS. You define both the amount
and share values for the fund. Funds do not roll up; you edit them for each
EPS level to allow for top-down planning. You can add a Total Funding
column in the Projects window to display the sum of the funding for each
project and EPS node.

The totals shown represent

the total funding amount for
a particular EPS node or
project; you can assign one
or more funds to each node
or project.
Set up fund contributions

individually to the applicable
EPS nodes and projects.

Tracking and Analyzing Budgets

The resource and cost spreadsheets provide an overall picture of unit and
cost budget distributions, along with the variance amounts resulting from
current use versus original estimates at the activity level. At the EPS level,
you can customize columns and produce reports to display original budget
amounts per project, along with the current variance amounts. This is
beneficial in the early stages of your projects when you may not have all
resources and estimates in place to cover the scope and goals set forth by
upper management.
Create a layout for budget and variance comparison Open the

Projects window, then click the Display Options bar and choose Columns,
Customize. You can select any budget-related columns from the list of
choices. The following example compares the original budget amounts
assigned to the projects and the current variance resulting from budget
spending on those projects to date.
For information about

assigning and analyzing
budgets at the WBS,
activity, and cost account
levels, see “Reviewing
Work Breakdown
Structures” on page 133,
“Working with Activities” When current spending differs from original
on page 201, and “Working budget estimates, a variance results. A variance
with Cost Accounts and amount shown in parentheses indicates a
Project Expenses” on negative variance amount for the project.
page 247, respectively.
running reports, see
“Printing Layouts and
Reports” on page 491.

Establishing Project Codes 165
Establishing Project Codes

You can organize the projects in the enterprise
In this chapter project structure (EPS) in groups according to
specific categories, such as location and
Defining and Assigning Project
Codes division, using project codes. The module
Grouping, Summarizing, and supports an unlimited number of hierarchical
Filtering by Codes project codes; you can establish as many as
you need to meet the filtering, sorting, and
reporting requirements for your projects. For
example, use project codes to arrange projects
hierarchically when your EPS contains many
projects within many levels.
Read this chapter to learn how to set up project

codes, assign code values to projects, and use
project codes to organize your enterprise
layouts.

Defining and Assigning Project Codes

You can use project codes to group projects and consolidate large amounts
of information, and to generally distinguish one project from another. You
can group by project code in the Open Project dialog box and in the
Projects window, by right-clicking anywhere in the dialog box or window,
choosing Group and Sort By, then selecting the project code name. All
projects assigned a value for that code display in the Open Project dialog
box or the Projects window, grouped by their corresponding value. Any
project not assigned a value for the project code is placed at the bottom of
the window under a No Code group band.
Choose to group the

selected projects by project
code; all predefined project
codes are available in the
Group and Sort By menu.
Project codes are set up in the Project Codes dictionary, which is available
to the entire enterprise. You can create values for the predefined codes, or
you can create new project codes and values for use with your projects.
Assign code values to projects using the Codes tab in Project Details.

Define project codes and values Choose Enterprise, Project Codes.

Click Modify in the Project Codes dialog box, then define as many project
code definitions as you need.
Click Modify, then supply a project code

name, along with the number of
characters that will be available for each
code value.
To add values to a project code, click Close in the Project Code Definitions
dialog box. In the Project Codes dialog box, select the project code for
which you want to establish values, then click Add and type the values and
descriptions. To change a code value’s position in the project codes
hierarchy, select the code, then click the appropriate arrow button.
For example, if you create a code called Location, you may then want to
specify code values for the different cities in which your company has
offices, such as Philadelphia, Chicago, and San Francisco. Within these
office locations, you can create values for the specific departments located
in that city. To indent a department beneath a city location, first select the
department, then click the up or down arrow buttons until it is directly
below the city location. Click the right arrow button to indent the
department.

Click the
arrows to
move values
up or down in
the list, or to
change a
selected
value’s
position in the
hierarchy.
To see a graphical display of your project codes hierarchy, click the

Display Options bar and choose Chart View. You can also modify the
appearance of the table or chart using the other menu commands available
from the Display Options bar.
Defining weighted project codes Weighted project codes enable
you to rank or prioritize projects using a weight value and then view
projects by score. The Project Management module works with the
Primavera Web application’s project codes and scoring feature to
determine the score of each project code. For example, assume you rank
projects in terms of risk. Project codes with the highest score have the
most risk; those with the lowest score have the least risk.
To add weight to a project code, in Project Codes enter a value in the

Weight column. To display the Weight column, click the Display Options
bar, select Columns, then choose Weight. The Project Score field, located
on the Primavera Web application’s Project Statistics portlet, can show
you the score of each weighted project code you create.
In Project Code Definitions, you can display the Weight column

along with the Weight Percent and Max Code Value Weight
columns. To display these columns, click the Display Options
bar, select Columns, then choose Weight. The Weight Percent
column displays the project code weight divided by the total of
all project code weights. The Max Code Value Weight column
enables you to enter the maximum allowed weight value for a
specific project code type.

If the Codes tab is not Assign project code values In the Projects window, select the
shown in Project Details, project for which you want to assign project code values. Display Project
right-click in the Details Details by clicking the Display Options bar and choosing Details (the box
area of the Projects next to the command should be marked). Click the Codes tab, then click
window and choose Assign. In the Assign Project Codes dialog box, click the value for the
Customize Project Details;
applicable code, then click the Assign button.
select Codes from the list
of available tabs, click the
right-arrow button to move
it to the Display Tabs
column, then click OK.
Close
button
Assign
button
Click the Close button in the Assign Project Codes dialog box when you
are finished assigning project code values to the project.
You can also assign several values at once. Press and hold the
Ctrl key, then select each value you want to assign. Click the
Assign button.

Grouping, Summarizing, and Filtering by Codes

Use project codes to group projects in Activity Table and Gantt Chart
layouts within the Projects window. Grouping enables you to focus on a
particular aspect of projects, such as product line or location. In the
following example, projects assigned the same division values are grouped
together and identified by description bands. Current bars, which represent
the early or actual start and finish dates for each project, and summary
bars, which represent all projects within each group band, are included in
the layout. The summary bar begins at the earliest start date of all projects
that are assigned the code value and extends to the latest early finish date
of all projects that are assigned the code value.
Group by project codes so

the layout is easy to read.
To select the bars

included in the Gantt
Chart, click the Display
Options bar, then choose
Bars.
Summary bar Current bar
Group by project code Click the Display Options bar, then choose
Group and Sort By. Choose a specific project code or choose Customize to
include additional codes or other project elements in your layout. The
module creates a group band for each Group By parameter you select in
the Group and Sort dialog box.

You can customize the

appearance of each group
band, choose whether to
show summary data,
indent the group band,
specify the lowest level
you want to include for the
Group By element, and
enter the time interval by
which to group date-
related elements.
Mark to hide group title

bands that do not contain
activities within the group.
Click in the first row of the Group By column, then select the project code
or other parameter by which you want to group. You can group by more
than one item by adding additional rows. Mark the Indent checkbox for
hierarchical items to show all levels or only levels up to the number
indicated in the To Level cell. You can indent only one level per group. If
you select a date Group By item, you can select the time interval in the
Group Interval cell. To change the font and background color of the group
bands, double-click the Font & Color cell for each item.
For more information about Summarize project code groups By default, the module
summarizing data, see summarizes the data included under each group band at the group band
“Summarizing Projects” on
page 325. level in the layout and shows summary bars in the Gantt Chart. If the Gantt
Chart is not displayed, click the Display Options bar, then choose Show on
Top, Gantt Chart. The summary data are current up to the date when data
were last summarized.

Mark to display a summary

bar for each group band in
the layout. If your layout is
grouped by EPS also, mark
the Display checkbox for the
EPS Summary bar.
To exclude the project details and show only a summarized band, double-
click the band. A plus sign (+) displays before the group band name when
a group is summarized. To summarize all groups in the layout, click the
Layout Options bar and choose Collapse All.
Filter by project code You can create custom filters that use project
codes to limit the projects that are included in the Projects window. For
example, to review only the projects within a specific division, select the
Division project code. Click the Display Options bar, then choose Filter
By, Customize. Click New in the Filters dialog box to add a filter.
Identify the filter with a

meaningful name.
Select the filter

parameter. In this case,
all projects with the
project code value of
Accounting for the
Division project code will
be selected.

Click OK to return to the Filters dialog box. The new filter is listed under
User Defined filters, and the corresponding select checkbox is marked,
indicating it is active. Click Apply to see the projects selected by the filter,
or click OK to apply the filter to the layout and close the dialog box.
This layout contains the

projects selected by the
filter. You can also display
specific information for
these projects by modifying
column data—click the
Display Options bar, then
choose Columns,
Customize.

Working With User-Defined Fields 175
Working With User-Defined Fields

User-defined fields enable you to customize
In this chapter fields and values and add them to the project
database. For example, you can use them to
Creating User-Defined Fields
track additional activity data such as delivery
Working with User-Defined Fields
dates and purchase order numbers. You could
Working with Indicators
also track resource- and cost-related data such
as profit, variances, and revised budgets.
This chapter describes how to configure user-

defined fields to meet your project’s needs.

Creating User-Defined Fields

User-defined fields (UDFs) enable you to add an unlimited number of
custom fields and values to the project database. Examples of UDFs
include purchase order numbers, delivery dates, drawing numbers, profit,
variances, and revised budgets.
Subject areas You may customize an unlimited number of UDFs in

any of the following subject areas: Activities, Activity Steps, Activity
Resource Assignments, Projects, Resources, WBS, Expenses, Issues,
Risks, and Work Products & Documents. In each of these subject areas,
you can add columns and group, sort, and filter data based on the UDFs
applicable to the subject area.
Data types For each custom field you create, you can specify any of the
following data types for that field: Cost, Integer, Number, Text, Start Date,
Finish Date, and Indicator. The data type you select determines the type of
data you can specify in a field. For example, if you select Start Date, when
you create a column for the Start Date you can only enter dates in the Start
Date column.
For more information on The Indicator UDF is a special type of field that enables you to
Indicator-type UDFs, refer to enter color-coded values and display them in columns and
“Working with Indicators” on reports.
page 180.
The following table summarizes the data types available and their uses in
user-defined fields:
Data Type Use For
Text Text or combinations of text and numbers
Start Date Start date

Finish Date Finish Date
Number Numeric value with two decimal places
Cost Currency value
Indicator An indicator field that you can use to

enter color-coded icon values in columns
and display color-coded text in reports
Integer Numeric data except money

Defining user-defined fields Choose Enterprise, User Defined

Fields. Select the subject area to which you want to add a new field, then
click Add.
Double-click in the Title column and type a name for the UDF. Double-
click in the Data Type column and select the appropriate data type, then
click Close.

define or assign values to UDFs for Microsoft Project (MSP)-
managed projects in the Project Management module. For
more information on ProjectLink, click the Help button on any
ProjectLink screen to access the Primavera ProjectLink Help in
Microsoft Project (available only if ProjectLink is installed).
You must select a subject

area before entering a Title
or Data Type.
Enter a Title and Data

Type for the user-defined
field. For example, in the
Project Expenses subject
area, you could enter
Change Order # as the
title and select Cost as
the data type.
The Add and Delete buttons are disabled if you do not

have edit privileges for user-defined fields.
Only users with security privileges to edit UDFs can add,

modify, or delete UDFs in the User Defined Fields dialog. Users
that do not have access rights to edit UDFs can still view them
in the User Defined Fields dialog. Any user can assign values to
existing UDFs in columns. Also, only users with project security
privileges to view project cost data can view UDF values with a
Data Type of Cost.

Working with User-Defined Fields

Like other data fields, you can create columns for UDFs, group, sort, and
filter based on UDF data, and view UDF data in reports. Read the
following sections to learn more about utilizing these capabilities.
Creating UDF columns You can display UDFs in the columns of the
Activity Table, Activity Steps, Activity Resource Assignments, Projects,
Resources, WBS, Project Expenses, Issues, Risks, and Work Products and
Documents.
For detailed information on You can only create columns for a UDF in the layout of the
adding columns, refer to subject area in which you created the UDF. For example, if you
“Customizing Layouts” on create a UDF called Purchase Order Number in the Project
page 427.
Expenses subject area, the Purchase Order Number UDF can
only be viewed in the Expenses layout.
For detailed information on Group, Sort, and Filter UDFs When a layout is grouped by user field,
grouping, sorting, and you can group, sort, filter, and view summaries. To group and sort based
filtering data, refer to
“Grouping, Sorting, and on UDFs, click View, Group and Sort. To filter data based on a UDF, select
Filtering Data” on page 417. View, Filters.
For detailed information on Global change using UDFs You can use Global Change to assign
Global Change, refer to values to Activity, Activity Resource Assignments, and Expenses user
“Using Global Change” on
page 242. fields. To assign a global change click Tools, Global Change.
You must create UDFs in the User Defined Fields dialog before
you can assign and populate UDFs using Global Change.
There are no pre-existing UDFs available in the database.
For detailed information on Viewing UDFs in reports You can view UDFs in reports and display
reports, refer to “Customizing them in columns. In the Report Wizard, you can select any UDF to be
Reports” on page 455.
included in the report. You can also group, sort, and filter data based on a
UDF. After you run the report, any UDFs you selected will appear in
columns.
For detailed information on Formatting UDF date bars You can create bars for user-defined date
formatting bars, refer to fields and view them in the Gantt chart. Click View, Bars. In the Bars
“Formatting Gantt Charts” on
page 434. dialog, click Add. Enter a name in the Name field. In the Timescale field,
select User Dates (the User Start Date and User Finish Date fields will
become enabled). Select the user-defined start and finish date values in the
User Start Date and User Finish Date fields.

You must create user-defined start date and finish date fields in
the User Defined Fields dialog before you can create bars for
these fields in the Gantt chart. Also, the User Finish Date and
User Start Date columns are only editable when you select
User Dates in the Timescale column.
Click in the Filter column to open the Filters dialog. Select a filter and
click Apply, OK. If desired, click on the Bar Style tab to change the bar’s
appearance. Click Apply, OK.
If you select a User Finish Date that is earlier than the User
Start Date, or if there is no value associated with those fields,
the bar will not be displayed.
Select User Dates in the The User Finish Date and User Start Date
Timescale column. fields are automatically enabled when you
select User Dates in the Timescale column.
If desired, click the Bar Labels tab

and enter information to display
UDFs as a label on any bar.

Working with Indicators

Indicators are a special type of user-defined field (UDF) that enable you to
select color-coded icons as values for display in columns, group and sort,
filters, and reports. Indicator UDFs can be used to highlight Activities,
Activity Steps, Activity Resource Assignments, Projects, Resources,
WBS, Expenses, Issues, Risks, and Work Products & Documents. For
example, you could group activities based on priority or status using
Indicator UDFs.
Like all other UDFs, you can perform the following functions using
Indicator UDFs:
• display in columns
• group and sort data based on indicators
• filter data based on indicators
• perform global changes
• display as labels on timescale bars
• view indicator data in reports using columns, group and sort, and
filters
For more information on Defining Indicator UDFs From the Enterprise menu, click User
defining UDFs, refer to Defined Fields. Click Add, then select the Subject Area to which you want
“Working with User-Defined
Fields” on page 178. to add the indicator UDF. In the Data Type field, select Indicator. Enter a
name (e.g., High Priority) in the Title field and click Close.
Selecting Indicator UDF values Once you create an indicator UDF,

you can assign indicator values. You must create columns for indicator
UDFs in order to assign values to a particular activity, resource, project,
etc.
An indicator UDF can have one of four values: red, yellow, green, or blue.
These values, shown in the next figure, are selectable icons in a drop-down
list when you click on a UDF field. You must select one of these values
whenever you enter a value for an Indicator UDF, whether in columns,
group and sort, filters, reports, global change or bars.

Indicator UDF example As an example, assume you want to create an

Indicator UDF that signifies status and priority of activities based on the
following parameters:
• Red - high priority activities that have not started

• Yellow - high priority activities that have started
• Green - completed activities
• Blue - low priority activities that have started
First, you could create an Indicator UDF in the User Defined Fields dialog
called Priority Indicator. Then, in Activities, you would create a column
for the Priority Indicator UDF. In the Priority Indicator column, you
would identify the activities you want to add an indicator value to, click in
the Priority Indicator field, and select the appropriate value. You could
then group, sort, and filter data based on the Priority Indicator value. The
Activity Table would look similar to the following figure, with Indicators
grouped by type.

Indicator UDFs in columns, group and sort, filters, bars, global

change, and reports Modifying columns, group and sort, filters, bars,
global change, and reports to include Indicator UDF data is functionally
the same as other types of UDFs.
The values will display as icons in each of these cases, except reports. In
reports, Indicator UDF columns show the text value of the icon (i.e., rather
than displaying the icon, the value is red, yellow, green, or blue), as shown
in the next figure.
Indicator UDF icon values

display as text in reports.

Creating Calendars 183
Creating Calendars
You can create and assign calendars to each
In this chapter resource and each activity. These calendars
define the number of available workhours in
Adding Calendars
each calendar day. You can also specify
Modifying Calendars
national holidays, your organization’s
holidays, project-specific work/nonworkdays,
and resource vacation days. The module uses
your calendar assignments for scheduling and
tracking activities, and leveling resources. An
activity’s type determines whether the activity
uses the calendar of an assigned resource or its
activity calendar.
You can link resource and project calendars to

global calendars. Changes to a global calendar
apply to all resource and project calendars
linked to the global calendar.
Read this chapter to learn how to add and

modify calendars.

Adding Calendars
You can establish an unlimited number of calendars to accommodate
different work patterns. For example, if some activities require a five-day
workweek, while others are performed part-time (such as Monday,
Wednesday, and Friday), you can create different calendars and assign the
activities and resources in your projects to them.
For information about There are three calendar pools: global, resource, and project. The global
assigning global or project calendar pool contains calendars that apply to all projects in the database.
calendars to activities, see
“Working with Activities” on The project calendar pool is a separate pool of calendars for each project
page 201. in the enterprise. The resource calendar pool is a separate pool of
calendars for each resource. You can assign resource or global calendars to
resources, and global or project calendars to activities.
For information about Create a global calendar Choose Enterprise, Calendars. Choose
modifying calendars, see Global, then click Add. Select the calendar you want to copy for the new
“Modifying Calendars” on
page 186. global calendar, then click the Select button. Type the new calendar’s
name. To make the new calendar the default global calendar for activities
and resources, mark the Default checkbox. To edit the new calendar, click
Modify. To view the calendar’s assignments before changing it, click Used
By.

For information about Create a resource or project calendar Choose Enterprise,

assigning resource calendars Calendars. If you are creating a project calendar, you must first open a
to resources, see “Defining
Resources and Roles” on project. Choose Resource or Project, then click Add. Select the calendar
page 109. you want to copy for the new resource or project calendar, then click the
Select button. Type the new calendar’s name. To edit the new calendar,
click Modify. To view the calendar’s assignments before changing it, click
Used By.

create/edit project-specific calendars for Microsoft Project
(MSP)-managed projects in the Project Management module.
For more information on ProjectLink, click the Help button on
any ProjectLink screen to access the help in Microsoft Project
(available only if Primavera ProjectLink is installed).
Click to
convert a
resource
or project
calendar
to a global
calendar.

Modifying Calendars
For additional information Use more than one calendar when your projects contain activities that can
about modifying calendars, occur on different schedules. For example, you can create one calendar
refer to the Help.
that specifies a normal Monday-through-Friday workweek and another
calendar that specifies continuous worktime (24 hours/day). If you define
multiple project calendars, you must assign each activity to the specific
calendar that indicates the worktime available for performing that activity.
The module schedules each activity only during the worktimes of the
calendar to which it is assigned.
A calendar consists of a You can also create multiple calendars to control the times when work is
standard workweek and a performed by resources throughout your organization. You can then
list of exceptions. associate different holidays/exceptions from the global calendar for each
work cycle to indicate individual resource availability.
Define the workhours for each day in the regular workweek. Use the
Calendar dialog box to view and edit a global, project, or resource
calendar.
Modify calendars Choose Enterprise, Calendars; choose the calendar

type (Global, Resource, or Project), select the calendar you want to
modify, then click Modify.
To base a resource or project calendar on another calendar,

select a new global calendar in the Inherit Holidays and
Exceptions from Global Calendar field.
Choose the month you want to modify by clicking the appropriate arrow
button next to the month-year title. Modify the year by clicking the month/
year title, and clicking the appropriate arrow button. To change the
number of hours in a specific workday, click the date you want to change.
Work hours defined with decimal values other than .0 or .5 will

round up or down to .0 or .5.

Displays a yearly calendar so you can

select a specific month to view
Choose to define the total

work hours in each day.
Set the number of hours

available to work for a
specific day.
Click to make the selected

day a nonwork day.
To apply the same change to all instances of a specific

weekday in the displayed month, click the weekday’s column
label.

Choose to define which hours

of the day are work or nonwork
hours.
Select the hours you want

to change and click either
Work or Nonwork.
To make an exception into a

workday and apply the default
number of work hours to that
day, click the exception you want
to change, then click Standard.
Click to specify the number of default work hours

for the selected day in the open calendar.
If the date’s display color changes to white, the number of

hours you entered does not equal the default number of work
hours for that weekday.
Each calendar’s work/nonworktime is based on its regular workweek. The

changes you make to the regular workweek are reflected in the global,
resource, or project calendar dialog box. The calendar dialog box shows
normal/standard, nonworktime, and exceptions in the colors indicated in
the legend.
Apply exceptions directly in the calendar dialog box. To apply the same
change to all instances of a specific weekday in the displayed month, click
the weekday's column label.
Specify default work hours Use the Calendar Weekly Hours dialog
box to specify the number of default work hours for each week day in the
open calendar.

Select a day of the week to

set its default number of work
hours.

hour a work hour.

hour a nonwork hour.
Check this display for the
default number of work hours
for the selected day in the
open calendar.
Delete a calendar Choose Enterprise, Calendars. Choose Global,

Resource, or Project, depending on the type of calendar you want to
delete. Select the calendar you want to delete, then click Delete. If
activities or resources are assigned to the calendar, the Calendars in Use
dialog box is displayed.
To delete the calendar and link its assignments to a different calendar,

choose Select Replacement Calendar, click OK, then select a replacement
calendar when prompted. To delete the calendar and link its assignments
to the default global calendar, choose Link to Default Global Calendar,
then click OK.

Part 3
Implementing the Schedule

In this part Establishing Activity Codes
Working with Activities
Working with Cost Accounts and Project
Expenses
Performing Top-down Estimation
R ead this part to learn how to define and use activity
codes to organize and filter project activities, add
activities and relationships to projects, and monitor
project expenses using cost accounts.
Establishing Activity Codes describes how to structure

project data using activity codes so you can organize the
information in different ways.
Working with Activities describes how to create a schedule

consisting of activities and resource assignments.
Working with Cost Accounts and Project Expenses

discusses tracking activity costs and earned value
throughout the project life cycle.
Performing Top-down Estimation shows you how to

perform and apply top-down estimation to WBS elements
and activities.
Establishing Activity Codes 193
Establishing Activity Codes

You can define a set of codes to categorize the
In this chapter activities in your projects. You can then sort,
filter, and group activities according to the
Creating Activity Codes and
Values activity codes and values you assign.
Grouping and Summarizing by
Codes This chapter describes how to use global codes
to organize project activities across an
enterprise project structure (EPS) according to
specific categories, such as product and
division. You will learn how to use EPS-level
activity codes to organize project activities.
You will also learn how to establish project
activity codes to filter and organize activities
based on unique, project-specific features or
requirements.

194 Part 3: Implementing the Schedule
Creating Activity Codes and Values

Activity codes represent broad categories of information, such as design,
quality control, or location. For each code, you can define specific values
that further describe that category. For example, if your organization has
more than one location, you can create a Location code with values such
as New York, San Francisco, and Chicago. You can then associate
activities with a specific location, such as New York, and define an
unlimited number of values for each code.
Create global activity codes Choose Enterprise, Activity Codes.

Choose Global, then click Modify. Click Add, then type the name of the
global activity code. Specify the maximum number of characters for the
activity code’s values.
Click the Display Options

bar, then Filter By,
Current Projects’ Values
to view only the values
assigned to the open
projects.
Activity code values Activity codes
Create global activity code values Choose Enterprise, Activity

Codes. Choose Global. Select the activity code for which you want to
create a value, then click Add. Type the value’s name and description. The
value cannot exceed the maximum character length specified for the
activity code.

Create EPS-level activity codes Choose EPS, then click Modify.

Click Add to select the EPS to which you want to apply the activity code.
Next, type the name of the EPS activity code. Specify the maximum
number of characters for the activity code’s values.
Click to select an EPS

level to which you want
to add an activity code.
Displays the EPS levels that

have assigned activity codes,
and which you have security
access to, based on the user
security profiles.
The Project Management module lists EPS-level activity codes

that you do not have access rights to, under the “No EPS ID”
level. More information about EPS-level activity code security is
available in the Project Management Help.
Create EPS-level activity code values Choose Enterprise, Activity

Codes. Choose EPS. Select the activity code for which you want to create
a value, then click Add. Type the value’s name and description. The value
cannot exceed the maximum character length specified for the activity
code.

Click to remove
the activity code
value and its
assignments.
Create project-level activity codes Open the project for which you
want to create activity codes, then choose Enterprise, Activity Codes.
Choose Project, then click Modify. Click Add, then type the name of the
project activity code. Specify the maximum number of characters for the
activity code’s values.
Project activity codes are

listed beneath the name of
the open project.
Create project-level activity code values Choose Enterprise,

Activity Codes. Choose Project. Select the activity code for which you
want to create a value, then click Add. Type the value’s name and
description. The value cannot exceed the maximum character length
specified for the activity code.
Type the new value name

and description directly in
these cells; the name’s
length cannot exceed the
length specified in the Max
Length field for the code. Use these arrows to
indent/outdent a value
in the activity code
hierarchy, and to
move a selected value
up or down in the list.
Convert EPS-level activity codes and values You can convert an

EPS-level activity code and its values to a global activity code with global
values. Choose Enterprise, Activity Codes. Choose EPS, then click
Modify. Select the code you want to convert, then click Make Global.
Click Yes to convert the code and its values.
For instructions on assigning Convert project-level activity codes and values You can convert
activity codes and values to a project activity code and its values to a global activity code with global
activities, see “Working with
Activities” on page 201. values. Choose Enterprise, Activity Codes. Choose Project, then click
Modify. Select the code you want to convert, then click Make Global.
Click Yes to convert the code and its values.
If you change activity codes or values, the module applies your

changes to all activity assignments. In addition, if you convert
project activity codes to global activity codes, the module
applies these changes to all activity assignments.

Grouping and Summarizing by Codes

Use global, EPS, and project activity codes to group activities and projects
in Activity Table, Gantt Chart, and Activity Network layouts. Grouping
enables you to focus on specific activities, such as those within a particular
phase or department. The following example shows activities grouped by
the global activity codes Location and Project Manager.
Group by location and

project manager so the
layout is easy to read.
When you summarize an

activity group, the early
date bar begins at the
earliest start date of all
activities in the code value
and extends to the latest
early finish date of all
activities in the code value.
Summary bar
For more information about Group by activity code In the Activities window, click the Layout
grouping and sorting, see Options bar, then choose Group and Sort. Under Group By, click the first
“Grouping, Sorting, and
Filtering Data” on page 417. available line, then select the project, EPS, or global activity code by
which you want to group.

If you are grouping by a hierarchical element,

you can select the lowest level you want to
include in the layout.
Group by as many
fields as necessary
for your layout.
For more information about Summarize groups By default, the module summarizes the data
summarizing data, see included under each group band at the group band level in the layout and
page 325. shows summary bars in the Gantt Chart. If the Gantt Chart is not
displayed, click the Layout Options bar, and choose Show on Top, Gantt
Chart. The summary data are current up to the date when data were last
summarized.
Mark to display a summary

bar for each group band in
the layout.

To exclude the project details and show only a summarized band, double-
click the band. A plus sign (+) displays before the group band name when
a group is summarized. To summarize all groups in the layout, click the
Layout Options bar and choose Collapse All.

Working with Activities 201
Working with Activities

Activities are the fundamental work elements
In this chapter of a project. They are the lowest level of a
work breakdown structure (WBS) and, as such,
Activities Overview
Adding Activities
are the smallest subdivision of a project that
Defining General Activity Information directly concerns the module. If you divide
Defining Schedule Information activities into steps, an activity’s primary
Establishing Relationships resource is typically responsible for managing
Displaying Activity Details for Assign- and tracking the progress of the steps, while
ments
the project manager is typically responsible for
Assigning Resources and Roles
Assigning Resource Curves to
managing and tracking the progress of the
Resource or Role Assignments overall activity.
Manually Planning Future Period
Assignments This chapter describes how to add activities
Assigning Activity Codes and Adding
Expenses
and their properties.
Viewing Activity Feedback and
Posting Resource Notes
Assigning Work Products and
Documents
Adding Steps
Creating and Assigning Activity Step
Templates
Viewing Activity Summaries
Viewing Contract Manager
Documents
Using Global Change
Activities Overview
Activities represent work that must take place in a determined amount of
time. Use the Activity Table or Activity Network layouts to add activities
and build your projects. Within these layouts, you can define the following
activity information:
■ Activity ID and name – to uniquely identify and describe the activity
■ Predecessor and successor relationships – to define relationships with
other activities in the same project or in different projects in the
enterprise project structure (EPS)
■ Activity start and finish dates
■ Activity calendar
■ Activity type, duration type, and percent complete type; whether an
activity is a start or finish milestone; how to keep an activity’s unit
values, duration values, and resource units/time values synchronized;
and how to calculate an activity’s percent complete
■ WBS element
■ Activity codes and values – to categorize activities
■ Constraints on the activity’s scheduled start and finish dates
■ Expenses
■ Work products and documents, standards, and deliverables
■ Resources
■ Roles – to identify skill requirements for staffing the activity
■ Notes and feedback – to communicate with the resource working on
an activity
■ Notes about performing the activity
■ Steps – to divide the activity into smaller units
■ Activity Step Templates – to define sets of reusable steps common to
many activities in a project or across projects

Adding Activities
Use the Activities window to create, view, and modify activities for the
open project. The Activities window can be divided into upper and lower
layouts. For example, show an Activity Table, Gantt Chart, Activity Usage
Spreadsheet, or Activity Network in the top layout, and/or show Activity
Details, an Activity Table, Gantt Chart, Activity or Resource Usage
Spreadsheet or Profile, or Trace Logic in the bottom layout. Customize the
layouts to suit your requirements.
Choose Project, Activities, to display the Activities window.
To open a layout, click the

Layout Options bar and
choose Show on Top/
Show on Bottom, then
select the layout type.
To add an activity to a project, use the Activity Table and Gantt Chart, or
Activity Network. Depending on your user preferences, the New Activity
wizard may start to help you add an activity.
Add activities in the Activity Table Select an activity within the

group to which you want to add a new activity, then click Add. The new
activity is placed according to the sorting options selected for the layout.

Include the Gantt Chart to

see a timescaled version of
your schedule as you add
activities.
Type information directly

in the column cells for
the new activity...
...or use Activity Details to

complete activity
information.
Add activities in Activity Network In Activity Network, select the

group band or an activity box within the group band into which you want
to add the new activity, then click Add.
The new activity was added

to this second-level WBS
group band.
If no groups have been set up in Activity Network, the activity

will be added to the bottom of the layout.

Defining General Activity Information

Use the General tab to define general information for the selected activity,
including duration type, WBS assignment, primary resource, activity type,
and activity calendar.
In the Activities window, select the activity whose general information

you want to define. Click the Layout Options bar, then choose Show on
Bottom, Activity Details; click the General tab.
Layout Options bar
To specify which Activity

Details tabs you want to
display and their order,
click the Layout Options
bar, then choose Bottom
Layout Options.

Activity type Select the activity type according to the activity’s function
in the project and the calendar that should be used for the activity during
scheduling.
■ To indicate that the activity’s resources are scheduled according to the
activity calendar, select Task Dependent.
■ To indicate that each of the activity’s resources are scheduled
according to the resource’s own calendar, select Resource Dependent.
■ To indicate that the activity’s duration is dependent on its predecessor
and/or successor activities, select Level of Effort (LOE). LOE
activities do not have constraints and are considered to be ongoing;
examples include project management tasks, reviews, and meetings.
The module does not include Level of Effort activities when leveling
resources.
All finish to start and start to start predecessors and start to

finish and start to start successors drive the start date of the
LOE activity; all finish to finish and start to finish predecessors
and finish to start and finish to finish successors drive the finish
date of the LOE activity.
■ To indicate that the activity marks the beginning of a major stage in

the project, select Start Milestone. Milestones do not have time-based
costs or resource assignments. However, a primary resource can be
specified. Start milestone activities have a zero duration.
■ To indicate that the activity marks the end of a major stage in the
project, select Finish Milestone. Milestones do not have time-based
costs or resource assignments. However, a primary resource can be
specified. Finish milestone activities have a zero duration.
■ To indicate that the activity’s duration is dependent on the earliest

start date and latest finish date of the activities that share a common
WBS level, select WBS Summary.
Driving resources can not be assigned to WBS Summary

activities.
Duration type Select the duration type based on whether resources, the
schedule, or costs will be most important when activities are updated in a
project. The duration type applies only when resources are assigned to the
activity. The following equation must hold true regardless of which data
are updated:
Remaining Units (resource) = Units/Time x Remaining Duration (activity)

For example, if a resource is assigned to an activity for 8 hours/day for 5

days, the remaining units or work effort is calculated as 40 hours. The
duration type enables you to control which variables of this equation are
calculated when you change a value.
■ Select Fixed Duration & Units/Time or Fixed Duration & Units to
indicate that the schedule is a limiting factor in your project. The
activity's duration does not change regardless of the number of
resources assigned when you modify or update activities. You usually
choose these duration types when you are using task dependent
activities.
When you update the remaining duration for the activity, you can
choose to calculate either the remaining units or the units per
timeperiod. If you want to recalculate the remaining units and keep
the units/time for the resource constant, choose Fixed Duration &
Units/Time. The module uses the equation:
Remaining Units = Units/Time x Remaining Duration
If you want to keep the remaining units constant instead and
recalculate the units/time, choose Fixed Duration & Units. The
module uses the equation:
Units/Time = Remaining Units/Remaining Duration
■ Select Fixed Units/Time to indicate that resource availability is the
most critical aspect of your project. In this case, the units/time or rate
of the resource remains constant, even if the activity's duration or
work effort changes. You most often use this duration type when you
are planning resource dependent activities.
■ Select Fixed Units to indicate that the budget (units or cost) is a
limiting factor; that is, the total amount of work is fixed. When you
update activities, the work effort required to complete the activity
does not change, even if the activity's duration or the resource rate
changes. Typically, you would use this type in conjunction with
resource dependent activities. Increasing resources can decrease the
activity duration.
For more information on the Percent complete type You can choose to calculate an activity’s
percent complete type, see percent complete according to activity duration, activity units, or a
Part 4, “Updating and
Managing the Schedule” on physical percent complete that you enter for each activity. You must define
page 269. a percent complete type for each activity.
■ To indicate that the activity’s percent complete will be entered by the
user for this activity, select Physical.
■ To specify that the activity’s percent complete be calculated from the
planned and remaining duration, select Duration.

■ To specify that the activity’s percent complete be calculated from the

actual and remaining units, select Units.
Activity calendar This field displays the selected activity’s calendar.

Click the Browse button to select a new calendar.
WBS Click the Browse button to assign a new WBS element to the
selected activity.
Responsible manager This field displays the name of the responsible

manager (in the OBS) assigned to the selected activity’s WBS element.
Primary resource This field displays the name of the selected

activity’s primary resource. The primary resource is the person responsible
for the overall work on the activity and for updating activity status. Click
the Browse button to select a new primary resource.

Defining Schedule Information

Use the Activity Details Status tab to view and edit detailed schedule
information for the selected activity, including actual start and finish dates,
free float, total float, constraints, and duration. You can also view and edit
the activity’s labor and nonlabor unit/cost values and material cost values.
The module automatically recalculates the time value and period you enter
according to the project's calendar and the standard timeperiod defined by
your network/database administrator. To view the available timeperiod
abbreviations, choose Admin, Admin Preferences, then click the Time
Periods tab. You must have appropriate access rights to edit Admin
Preferences.
In the Activities window, select the activity whose schedule information

you want to define. Click the Layout Options bar, then choose Show on
Bottom, Activity Details; click the Status tab.
Duration Update the Duration fields when you are setting the duration
or updating the activity as a whole. (Most likely, the activity type will be
Task Dependent.)
For more information on ■ To enter the planned duration for the activity, in the Planned field
updating the schedule, see enter the expected number of workperiods required to complete the
Part 4, “Updating and
Managing the Schedule” on selected activity.
page 269.
■ To enter the remaining duration for the activity, in the Remaining field
enter the remaining number of workperiods needed to complete the
selected activity. If the selected activity is in progress, type a new
number immediately followed by the timeperiod abbreviation.
Use the General tab of the Admin Preferences dialog box to

specify the default duration for activities in all projects. Choose
Admin, Admin Preferences, then click the General tab.

■ To enter a new at completion estimate, in the At Complete field enter

an estimate of the duration at completion time for the selected activity.
If the selected activity is in progress, type a new at completion
estimate (At Complete Duration = Actual Duration + Remaining
Duration).
If the Link Budget to EAC checkbox is cleared in the Projects

Details, Calculations tab in the Project Window, the original
planned /remaining units and costs, and the durations, will
remain constant when you update the At Complete value for
activities that have not started.
Status Once an activity is underway, update its start and finish dates and
other status information.
■ To enter the activity’s planned start date, click the Browse button in
the Started field, then select a date. If the activity has actually started,
mark the Started checkbox, then specify the actual start date in the
Started field.
■ To enter the activity’s planned finish date, click the Browse button in
the Finished field, then select a date. If the activity is complete, mark
the Finished checkbox, then specify the actual finish date in the
Finished field.
If the planned date you enter differs from its scheduled date,
you are prompted to apply a constraint to hold the activity in
place. If you do not constrain the activity, your dates are
overwritten when the schedule is calculated.
■ If the selected activity has started, the Exp Finish field displays the
date the activity is expected to end. (Only the primary resource can
edit this date in the Timesheets module.) Anyone who has access to
the project can edit this date.
The % field name changes ■ If the selected activity’s percent complete type is set to Duration, the
depending on the percent Duration % is calculated from the planned and remaining durations. If
complete type set on the the selected activity’s percent complete type is set to Units, the Units
Activity Details General % is calculated from the actual and remaining units. If the selected
tab. activity’s percent complete type is set to Physical, you can enter its
physical percent complete in the Physical % field.
To edit the Physical % field, the activity must have started.

■ Total float is the amount of time the selected activity can be delayed,
without delaying the project’s finish date.
■ Free float is the amount of time the selected activity can be delayed,
without delaying the immediate successor activities.
Constraints Use constraints when activities must start or finish on a

specific date. Network logic alone cannot reflect all project situations.
Sometimes activity must be accomplished according to specific dates
rather than on dates determined by other activities in the project. To model
dependence on specific dates, assign primary and secondary constraints to
activities.
The module uses the date constraints only when they create a tighter
schedule. For example, an imposed Start On date of December 1 will not
affect a schedule-determined early start date of December 15. Conversely,
if an imposed Start On or After date is set to December 30, the module
schedules an activity whose early start is December 15 to the imposed start
date.
■ Choose the primary constraint for the activity, then click the Browse
button in the Date field to select the date to which the primary
constraint applies.
■ Choose a secondary constraint if necessary. This list is filtered based
on the value you select in the Primary field. Click the Browse button
in the Date field to select the date to which the secondary constraint
applies.
You can enter a constraint date only after you select a

constraint type.
Labor/Nonlabor Units/Cost or Material Cost Click the Options bar

and select Labor or Nonlabor units or cost, or Material cost. The amounts
in the Status tab total the amounts for all resources assigned in the
Resources tab.
■ The planned amount is the expected number of labor/nonlabor units
or cost, or material cost the selected activity’s resources will use.
■ The actual amount is the actual number of labor/nonlabor units or
cost, or material cost the selected activity’s resources have used. If the
selected activity has started, type a new actual value.
■ The remaining amount is the remaining number of labor/nonlabor
units or cost, or material cost the selected activity’s resources will use.
If the selected activity is in progress, type a new remaining value.

■ The at complete amount is an estimate of the labor/ nonlabor units or

cost, or material cost at completion time for the selected activity’s
resources, (At Complete Units/Cost = Actual Units/Cost + Remaining
Units/Cost). If the selected activity is in progress, type a new at
complete estimate.
If the Link Budget and At Completion for Not Started Activities

checkbox is cleared in the Projects Details, Calculations tab on
the Project Window, the original planned /remaining units and
costs and the durations will remain constant when you update
the At Complete value for activities that have not started.

Establishing Relationships
Create relationships between activities to indicate whether an activity can
begin only after other activities start or finish. Once you assign
relationships, schedule the project to calculate early and late dates for each
activity.
Establish relationships between activities in the same project, or link

projects by creating relationships between activities in different projects
within the EPS. You can define relationships to activities in any other
project (not including what-if/inactive projects), even if the project is not
opened in the current display.
There are several methods for assigning relationships. Use the Activity
Network to visualize the flow of logic as you link activities, or use the
Gantt Chart to view relationships according to time. You can also use the
Relationships tab in Activity Details to assign relationships to activities in
the same project or in other projects in the EPS.
Relationship types and lag You can define the following four types
of relationships. Typically, you define relationships from the predecessor
to the successor activity.
Finish to start. The successor activity can begin only

when the predecessor activity completes.
Finish to finish. The finish of the successor activity

depends on the finish of the predecessor activity.
Start to start. The start of the successor activity depends

on the start of the predecessor activity.
Start to finish. The successor activity cannot finish until

the predecessor activity starts.
When a successor activity cannot start or finish as soon as its predecessor

starts or finishes, you can define a lag time for the relationship. Lag is the
number of time units from the start or finish of an activity to the start or
finish of its successor. Lag can be a positive or negative value. For
example, a start to start relationship with a three-day lag indicates that the
successor activity can start three days after the start of its predecessor.

For more information on You can select a calendar to calculate the lag between predecessors and
advanced scheduling options, successors for all activities. If you do not select a calendar, the Successor
see “Updating, Scheduling,
and Leveling” on page 283. Activity Calendar is used to calculate lag. You can calculate lag based on
the Predecessor Activity Calendar; the 24 Hour Calendar, which uses
continuous, 7 days/week, 24 hours/day workperiods; or the Project
Default Calendar, which is the calendar selected as Default for New
Activities on the Defaults tab of Project Details. To select the calendar for
scheduling relationship lag, choose Tools, Schedule. Click Options. In the
General tab, select a calendar in the Calendar for Scheduling Relationship
Lag field.
View relationships in the Gantt Chart To assign relationships in the

Gantt Chart, make sure relationships are displayed onscreen. Click the
Layout Options bar, then choose Bars. Click Options in the Bars dialog
box. Click the General tab in the Bar Chart Options dialog box and mark
the Show Relationships checkbox, then click OK.

While you are dragging the Create relationships in the Gantt Chart or Activity Network
relationship line between Drag the mouse between any two activities that you want to connect. Point
two activities, a hint to the left or right of the predecessor activity and drag the mouse to the left
window displays that or right of the successor activity. The mouse pointer changes to a as
indicates the type of you define relationships.
relationship that will be
created when you release Drag the mouse from the end of activity
the mouse button. A114380 to the start of A1143820 to
define a finish to start relationship.
To modify or delete a relationship, double-click the relationship

line.
Dissolving Activities
To maintain relationships when deleting activities, choose Edit, Dissolve,
in the Activities window. Dissolving deletes an activity and joins its
predecessor and successor activities with a finish to start relationship. The
selected activity to be dissolved must have a predecessor and successor.
This sequence of activities above can be completed with just two activities.
Dissolve activity A114400. Activity A114390 and A114410 automatically join with
a finish to start relationship.

To assign a relationship Assign relationships using Activity Details In the Activities

between projects, click the window, select the activity to which you want to add a predecessor or
Display Options bar in the successor relationship. Display Activity Details by clicking the Layout
Assign Predecessors/ Options bar and choosing Show on Bottom, Activity Details, then click the
Assign Successors dialog Relationships tab. Click Assign in either the Predecessors or Successors
box, then choose Select
section. Select the predecessor or successor activity you want to assign,
Project. Select activities to
click the Assign button, then click the Close button. Double-click the
define relationships the
same way as you would Relationship Type field, then select a relationship type. Double-click the
from the same project. Lag field, then type the relationship’s lag time value.
Click the arrows to

move from one
activity to the next
activity in the
display.
To expand either the Predecessors or

Successors area, drag the split bar
separating the right and left panes.
You can also use the Predecessors or Successors tabs in

Activity Details to assign relationships. The Relationships tab
combines the predecessor and successor information in a
single tab. The data stored in the Relationships tab is
synchronized with the information in the Predecessors and
Successors tabs.
Trace Logic The Trace Logic layout enables you to examine a path
while still viewing the entire project. Click the Layout Options bar and
choose Show on Bottom, Trace Logic. In the Gantt Chart or Activity
Network upper layout, select the activity from which you want to begin
tracing logic.
To move through the chain of activities, click a predecessor or successor of

the selected activity. To modify the number of predecessor/successor
levels, click the Layout Options bar and choose Bottom Layout Options.

This Trace Logic layout

shows three levels for
both predecessors and
successors.

Displaying Activity Details for Assignments

Display the following Activity Details tabs so you can assign additional
project information:
■ Resources, which include the personnel and equipment that perform
work on activities across all projects. You can also assign and remove
project personnel job titles or skills, known as roles.
■ Codes, which are used to categorize activities according to your
organizational and project needs.
■ Notebook, which provide additional information that further
describes the activity according to specific categories of information.
■ Steps, which divide activities into smaller units. You can apply a
weight to each step, which can be linked to the activity’s physical
percent complete for the completed steps.
■ Feedback, which allows you to exchange notes with an activity’s
primary resource to and from the Timesheets module.
■ WPs & Docs, which enable you to catalog and track all project-
related work products and documents.
■ Expenses, which are one-time expenditures for nonreusable items.
You can associate predefined cost accounts with expenses to
categorize them.
■ Summary, which displays detailed cost and unit information for the
selected activity.
■ Contract Manager Docs, which enables you to view Contract
Manager (Expedition) documents associated with the selected
activity.
Modify Activity Details tabs In the Activities window, click the

Layout Options bar, then choose Show on Bottom, Activity Details. Click
the Layout Options bar, then choose Bottom Layout Options. In the
Available Tabs column, click the tab that you want to display, then click
the right arrow button. To shift the tab to the left in the Activity Details
display, select the tab name in the Display Tabs column and click the up
arrow button; to shift the tab to the right in the display, click the down
arrow button.

Assigning Resources and Roles

In the Activities window, select the activity to which you want to assign a
resource or role. Click the Resources tab in Activity Details.
For information about Click Add Resource to assign a resource to the selected activity; click Add
establishing resources and Role to assign a role to the selected activity. Select the resource or role you
roles for your projects, see
“Defining Resources and want to assign. To assign multiple resources or roles, hold down the Ctrl
Roles” on page 109. key, then click each resource/role you want to assign. Click the Select
button, then click the Close button.
Organizations who do not want to assign resources to activities

can use the activity Owner attribute to specify one person who
is responsible for an activity. Primavera Web application users
with the appropriate license can update progress for activities
they are associated with as activity Owner. Additionally, to
support oversight and approval processes, the activity Owner
designation can be combined with the use of the new Reflection
project feature, which provides the capability to review changes
before updating an active project. For information about activity
Owner and Reflection project features, see the Project
Management Module online Help and the Administrator’s
Guide. Also refer to “Creating and Using Reflections” on
page 391.
You can customize the To define detailed information, double-click each appropriate cell and
Resources tab columns to enter the resource’s or role’s information for the selected activity. To
include other information replace a resource or role assigned to the activity, select the resource or
for resources and roles. role you want to replace, click Add Resource or Add Role, then click the
Right-click in the Columns Replace button. Select the new resource or role with which you want to
area of the Resources tab,
replace the existing resource/role, then click the Close button.
then choose Customize
Resource Columns.

Recalculating Costs/Units for Assignments

If you want to calculate costs from the units indicated or to recalculate
units based on actual cost, include the Cost Units Linked column in
Activity Details. If you mark the assignment’s checkbox for the Cost Units
Linked column, the module notifies you that costs will be recalculated. If
no progress has occurred for the activity, the Planned Cost/Units,
Remaining Cost/Units, and At Completion Cost/Units are equal. When
you apply an actual start to the activity, and record an actual quantity value
or an actual cost value for the resource or role assignment, the Planned
Cost/Units value is retained and the Remaining and At Complete Costs/
Units are recalculated automatically.
Roles with specific skill sets can be assigned resources to enable schedule
and cost planning until specific resources are identified. You can later
replace the role with the correct resource, based on the proficiency
requirements established for the role.
To remove a role assigned to an activity, the activity must have

a resource assignment. In the Resources tab of Activity Details,
double-click the Role cell for the role you want to remove. (Add
the Role column if it is not included in the tab.) Click the Clear
button in the Select Role dialog box.
Assign resources to activities by role At least one role must be

assigned to activities to assign resources by role. Click Assign by Role; the
Assign Resources by Role dialog box lists the roles assigned to the
selected activity. The resources who can fulfill each role are listed below
it. Select the resources you want to assign. Click the Select button, then
click the Close button.
Once you assign a resource or role and specify the planned units
anticipated for its use on activities, you can use Activity or Resource
Usage Spreadsheets and Profiles to track its use as the project progresses.

To analyze role use

per time-period or by
selected role, include
a Role Usage Profile
in the bottom portion
of your layout.
This Activity Usage

Spreadsheet is
organized by resource,
so you can see the
weekly spread of
resource use each
month over the course of
each activity’s duration.

Choosing the Rate Source and Rate Type for

an Assignment
Up to five price/unit rates may be defined for each resource and role in the
database. When both a resource and a role share an assignment on the
same activity, you can choose to use the rate of the resource or role to
calculate costs, or enter a custom rate. If you choose to use the rate of the
resource or role, you can select which price/unit rate associated with the
resource or role you want to use to calculate costs for the assignment.
Choose Project, Activities. Select the activity that contains the resource
and role assignment. Display Activity Details, then click the Resources
tab. Customize the tab to display the Rate Source, Rate Type, and Price/
Unit columns. Double-click in the Rate Source field and choose Resource,
Role, or Override.
When a resource and role Choose Resource to calculate costs for the assignment based on the
share an assignment on resource's price/unit value. Choose Role to calculate costs for the
the same activity, you can assignment based on the role's price/unit value. Choose Override if you
choose to always use the want to enter a custom rate in the Price/Unit column. If you choose
rate of the resource or the Resource or Role, select the rate type you want to use to calculate costs for
rate of the role in the
the assignment in the Rate Type field. (If rates have been defined for the
Calculations tab of User
resource or role, some or all of the rate types have an associated price/unit
Preferences.
value.) When you select the rate type, the Price/Unit field displays the
price/unit value defined for the resource or role.
If only a resource is assigned to an activity, the rate source

must be Resource or Override. If only a role is assigned to an
activity, the rate source must be Role or Override.

Assigning Resource Curves to Resource or Role

Assignments
For information on creating You can assign a resource distribution curve to any resource or role
custom resource curves, refer assignment on activities with a duration type of Fixed Duration and Units/
to “Defining Custom
Resource Curves” on Time or Fixed Duration & Units. Resource usage and costs are distributed
page 129. evenly during an activity unless you specify nonlinear distribution using
custom curves (or manually enter future period values as described in the
next section).
You can also assign a resource curve in the Resources tab in

Activity Details.
To learn how to manually Choose Project, Resource Assignments. Select the resource/role
plan future period resource/ assignment to which you want to assign a resource curve. To display the
role distribution, refer to the
next section, ““Manually Curve column, click the Display Options bar, then choose Columns,
Planning Future Period Customize. Select Curve from the General group and add it to the Selected
Assignments” on page 224.” Options list.
Double-click in the Curve

column, select the curve you
want to assign to the
resource/role assignment,
then click Select.
Remove a resource curve from a resource or role assignment

Choose Project, Resource Assignments. Select the resource/role
assignment from which you want to remove the resource curve. Click in
the Curve column, then click Clear in the Select Curve dialog box. You
can also remove curves from the Resources tab in Activity Details.

Manually Planning Future Period Assignments

Your project’s may contain activities for which you know work will be
performed sporadically and at varying levels of effort. For these activities,
it is difficult to plan a resource/role assignment’s work on an activity using
pre-defined or custom resource curves because the work you plan to
perform per period on an activity may not be fully reflected by the curve.
As a result, performance against the project plan cannot be accurately
measured.
For example, assume an activity has a planned duration of 28 days and

planned units of 80 hours. For this activity, you know that the actual work
will not be spread evenly across the duration of the activity; rather, the
planned units will be spread as follows:
Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4
10h 30h 15h 25h
After planning future period Assigning a pre-defined or custom resource curve to the resource/role
resource allocation, you assignment may not reflect the actual work being performed on the
can create a baseline from activity at any given time. To achieve the most precise resource/role
the project plan. As the distribution plan, you can manually enter the planned resource/role
current project schedule allocation per assignment in the timescale unit you choose (days, weeks,
progresses and you apply
months, quarters, years, or financial periods).
actuals, you can track how
the project is performing
against plan by comparing As the project progresses, if work on an assignment is not proceeding
the current project’s according to plan, you can manually update the remaining units for an
planned future periods to assignment's future periods, enabling you to measure the remaining work
the current project’s for an assignment without changing the original plan. You can manually
actuals. modify an assignment’s planned past and future periods at any time, even
if the activity associated with the assignment is in progress.
When you manually enter future period bucket values for an

assignment, the module automatically identifies the future
period values as a MANUAL resource curve.

There are many factors to Guidelines When manually planning future period assignment buckets,
consider when manually adhere to the following guidelines:
planning future period
resource distribution. For a
more detailed list of
guidelines and You CAN enter future period You CANNOT enter future
considerations, refer to the values for . . . period values for . . .
“Future Period Bucket
Planning FAQ” topic in the . . . assignments in the Resource Usage
Project Management module Spreadsheet of the Resource Assign-
Help.
ments and Activities windows.
. . . all resource/role assignments.

. . . Planned Units and Remaining . . . any other field.
(Early) Units.
. . . assignments to Task Dependent, . . . assignments to milestone activities.

Resource Dependent, Level of Effort,
and WBS Summary activities.
. . . assignments to activities with . . . assignments to activities with
duration types of Fixed Duration & duration types of Fixed Units and Fixed
Units and Fixed Duration & Units/Time. Units/Time.
Additionally, if the project-level setting 'Link Planned and At Completion

for not started activities' is marked (Project Details, Calculations tab), the
total planned values of the Planned Units and Remaining (Early) Units for
the assignment will always be equal for not started activities. For example,
when you enter a value for a future period in the Planned Units field, the
Remaining (Early) Units field is automatically populated with the same
value; the reverse is also true. If this setting is not marked, you can enter
different values for the same future period in the Planned Units and
Remaining (Early) Units fields; in this case, the total values for each field
are calculated independently for the assignment.
Once an activity is in progress, the Planned Units and

Remaining (Early) Units fields are automatically unlinked.
When choosing the Display spreadsheet fields for future period bucket planning in
spreadsheet fields to the Resource Usage Spreadsheet Display the Resource Usage
display, you can also Spreadsheet in either the Activities window or the Resource Assignments
display Actual Units to window. To display the Planned Units and Remaining (Early) Units fields
compare the completed in the Resource Usage Spreadsheet, click the Display Options bar and
work against the planned choose Spreadsheet Fields, Customize. Move the Planned Units and
and remaining work.
Remaining (Early) Units fields to the Selected Options list and, if desired,
remove all other fields from the Selected Options list. Click Apply, OK.

To sort the display in an

alphabetical list, click the
Available Options bar and
choose Group and Sort
By, List.
Create a future period bucket planning layout You can plan

future period resource/role assignments in any type of layout in the
Resource Assignments and Activities windows. Here are some helpful
hints to consider before you begin:
For detailed information on ■ Create or open a layout that enables you to easily identify resources,
creating layouts, modifying the activities to which they are assigned, and the activities’ associated
columns, and adjusting the
timescale, refer to projects (because the same activity name may appear in different
“Customizing Layouts” on projects). Refer to the following image for sample layouts.
page 427.
■ Click the Layout Options bar and choose Columns, Customize. Move
the Curve, Planned Units, and Remaining (Early) Units columns to
the Selected Options list, then modify the remaining columns as
desired. Click Apply, OK. By displaying the Curve column, you can
determine which assignments already have an assigned pre-defined or
custom curve, or a defined manual curve. When you manually enter
or edit a value in a future period bucket for an assignment, the module
automatically enters a value of Manual in the assignment’s associated
Curve column.
For assignments that do not have a defined total Planned Units or
Remaining (Early) Units value, it is useful to display the Planned
Units and Remaining (Early) Units columns. When you display these
columns, you can enter or edit an assignment's total planned or
remaining units to spread the units evenly over the duration of the
assignment, then manually modify the future period distribution as
necessary.

■ Adjust the timescale in the Resource Usage Spreadsheet to reflect the

planning periods in which you typically plan future resource
distribution. For example, if you plan your work in daily buckets,
adjust the timescale to Week/Day and enter hourly planning unit
values.
If you track past period actuals per financial period and plan to
report performance against manual future period values, you
should enter future period planning values in financial period
timescale units. You can adjust the timescale to reflect your
predefined financial periods. For example, if your organization
has defined weekly financial periods, set the timescale to
Week/Financial Period.
For detailed information on ■ If you are planning future period resource distribution for a project
displaying the desired data, that has already started, you may want to apply a filter to display only
refer to “Grouping, Sorting,
and Filtering Data” on the activities you want to plan, such as activities that don’t have an
page 417. actual duration or that have a planned start after the current date or
data date. Alternatively, if a project has already started and you want
to update the remaining units for activities that are in progress, you
could apply a filter to display only activities that have an Actual Start
date and do not have an Actual Finish date.
If you use the Resource Usage Spreadsheet in the Activities

window to plan future period resource distribution, you can
only enter values for open projects.

Spreadsheet fields displayed for

Planned Units, Actual Units, and
Remaining Early Units.
Change the
timescale
intervals to
reflect your
planning,
updating,
Layout grouped and reporting
and sorted by periods.
project and by
resource.
List layout displaying

columns for Project,
Resource Name, Curve,
Planned Start, and
Planned Finish. Use a list
layout to sort the list in
ascending or descending
order for a specific
column by clicking on a
column heading.
When you edit a future period value for an Editable future period
assignment, the Curve column automatically assignment values are
displays a value of Manual, even if a pre-defined displayed in white cells;
or custom curve was previously assigned. uneditable values are
displayed in gray cells.

For samples of manually- Manually enter future period values You can manually enter future
planned future period period assignment values per bucket for labor, non-labor, and material
assignments using different
planning periods, timescales, resource assignments, as well as for role assignments. After you display
and user preference settings, the Resource Usage Spreadsheet, create a suitable future period bucket
refer to the Project planning layout, and display editable spreadsheet fields, enter or edit the
Management module Help.
Planned Units and/or the Remaining (Early) Units for each assignment
bucket for the planned or remaining duration of the activity.
If desired, you can apply a resource curve to an assignment before you

manually enter future period values for the assignment. For example, if the
assignment you want to manually plan has a planned resource distribution
that is similar to a defined resource curve's distribution, you can apply the
resource curve to the assignment. When you apply the resource curve,
future period values are spread across the duration of the activity
according to the resource curve distribution; you can then manually
modify the future period values as necessary. Once you manually modify
future period values, the resource curve you assigned is automatically
removed from the assignment.
Once an activity is in progress and changes occur to the

project plan, you can manually edit the activity assignment’s
past and future period Planned Units and future period
Remaining (Early) Units to reflect changes to the original plan.
Before entering values in future periods, consider the following:
■ The values you should enter in future period buckets are dependent on
the duration of your planning periods (buckets), the timescale you
choose, and user preference settings.
■ The values you enter in the Planned Units and Remaining Units fields
are converted to the Unit/Time specified in the User Preferences,
Time Units tab. For example, if the Unit/Time user preference is set to
Hour and you enter 1d, the value is converted to 8h. To avoid planning
mistakes, you should set the Unit/Time user preference to the same
time unit you use to plan your work. For example, if you plan your
work in hours, set the Unit/Time to Hours.
■ You must have the 'Edit Future Periods' project privilege to manually
enter future period data.

Assigning Activity Codes and Adding Expenses

code and value. Click the Codes tab in Activity Details.

establishing activity
codes and values, see
“Establishing Activity
Codes” on page 193.
Click Assign. Select the activity code value you want to assign. To assign
multiple codes and values, hold down the Ctrl key, then click each code
value you want to assign. Click the Select button, then click the Close
button.
Add expenses to activities In the Activities window, select the

activity to which you want to add an expense. Click the Expenses tab in
Activity Details.
You can customize the

columns to include other
information for the expense
assignments. Right-click in
the Columns area of the
Expenses tab and choose
Customize Expense
Columns.
For information about setting Click Add, then type the expense’s name. Double-click the item’s expense
up expenses for your projects, category listing, click the category you want to assign, then click the
see “Working with Cost
Accounts and Project Select button. Double-click the Accrual Type cell, then select the
Expenses” on page 247. expense’s accrual type. Type the number of planned units you expect the
selected activity to use. Type the cost of each unit. The module calculates
and displays the expense’s planned cost (planned units * price/unit) in the
Planned Cost field.

For more information on To automatically calculate an expense’s actual cost based on the activity’s
automatically calculating planned completion percentage, mark the Auto Compute Actuals
actuals, see “Updating,
Scheduling, and Leveling” on checkbox.
page 283.
To enter actual expense costs already incurred by the activity, type the cost
in the Actual Cost field. Type the name of the vendor business or
organization to which the expense is payable.

Viewing Activity Feedback and Posting Resource Notes

In the Activities window, select the activity whose comments you want to
view. These comments are added in the Timesheets module by the primary
resource for the activity. Click the Feedback tab in Activity Details.
Review the notes in the Feedback from Primary Resource area.
In the Notes to Resources area, type any comments to the resources who
are working on the activity. The notes are then posted with the activity in
the Timesheets module for the resources to read.
Assign notes to activities In the Activities window, select the

activity to which you want to assign a note. Click the Notebook tab in
Activity Details.
Click Add. Select the notebook topics you want to assign. These topics are
predefined in the Notebook Topics tab of the Admin Categories dialog
box. To make the topics accessible for assignment to projects, EPS nodes,
WBS elements, and/or activities, mark the appropriate checkboxes in the
Admin Categories dialog box. To assign multiple topics, hold down the
Ctrl key, then click each notebook topic you want to assign. Click the
Assign button.

In the Description section of the Notebook tab, type a brief description for
the selected notebook topic. You can use HTML editing features, which
include formatting text, inserting pictures, copying and pasting
information from other information fields (while retaining formatting),
and adding hyperlinks.

Assigning Work Products and Documents

Work products and documents enable you to catalog and track all project-
related documents and deliverables. This includes guidelines, procedures,
standards, plans, design templates, worksheets, and all types of project
deliverables. Choose Project, Work Products and Documents, to set up the
documents.
For more information about Set up the categories for work products and documents by choosing
work products and Admin, Admin Categories, then clicking the Document Categories tab.
documents, see “Maintaining
a Project’s Document Click the Document Status tab to establish the different status codes you
Library” on page 359. want to use for the documents. Categories and status codes are then
assigned to documents in the Work Products and Documents window.
document. Click the WPs & Docs tab in Activity Details.
Click Assign and select the document you want to assign. To assign
multiple documents, hold down the Ctrl key, then click each item. Click
the Assign button, then click the Close button. Mark the checkbox for the
selected document to indicate that it is a work product.
To view detailed information about and/or open a document, select the

item, then click Details in the WPs & Docs tab.

Adding Steps
You can divide an activity into smaller task increments called steps and
then assign weights to the steps to calculate the activity’s percent
complete. Weighted steps enable you to track the progress of an activity
based on the number of steps completed.
The percentage value is shown, relative to the weights of the other steps.
For example, three steps are assigned to an activity; the first step has a
weight of 2, and the second and third steps each have a weight of 1. When
you mark the first step (weight of 2) complete, the percent complete is 50.
When you mark the first and second steps complete, the percent complete
is 75. When all three steps are marked complete, the percent complete is
100.
For more information on You can add steps unique to each activity. You can also create Activity
creating Activity Step Step Templates that capture a group of steps common to multiple
Templates and assigning them
to activities, refer to the next activities, then assign the step group to activities. This section describes
section, “Creating and how to add unique steps to activities; the next section describes how to
Assigning Activity Step create and assign Activity Step Templates.
Templates.”
Add steps In the Activities window, select the activity to which you
want to add a step. Click the Steps tab in Activity Details.
You may want to use

weighted steps to status
activities when a project
consists of large activities
that encompass distinct
tasks.
Click Add. Type the name of the new step. Type a brief description of the
step for the selected activity. You can use HTML editing features, which
include formatting text, inserting pictures, copying and pasting
information from other information fields (while retaining formatting),
and adding hyperlinks. To move the step to an earlier stage of the activity,
click the up arrow. To move the step to a later stage of the activity, click
the down arrow.

To indicate that the step is complete, mark the Completed checkbox. To

add columns for percent complete, weight, weight percent, and user-
defined fields, right-click over the columns in the Steps tab, and choose
Customize Steps Columns.
■ Step % Complete – Percent complete indicates progress on the step

and can be used to calculate percent complete for the activity.
■ Step Weight – The weight of the step indicates the step’s importance.
The higher the value, the greater the importance. The weight can be
any number between 0.0 and 999999.0 and is relative to the other
steps listed for the activity.
To change the weight of a step, double-click the Step Weight

column and type a new weight for the step.
■ Step Weight Percent – The step weight percent value is calculated

based on the step weights assigned to the activity. This column is 0
percent for nonweighted steps.
■ User-defined fields – You can change the title of user-defined fields
and use them to enter values such as finish date, start date, cost, or
number of hours worked for a step. Choose Enterprise, User Defined
Fields to assign and edit these titles.
Setting Options for Using Weighted Steps

You must select Physical as the percent complete type in the General tab in
Activity Details to use weighted steps to calculate an activity’s percent
complete. The Physical % field in the Status tab of Activity Details then
becomes a calculated field, which displays the percent complete based on
the relative weights of the completed steps versus the incomplete steps.
In addition, you must mark the Activity Percent Complete Based on
Activity Steps checkbox in the Project Details Calculations tab in the
Projects window to base percent complete on weighted activity steps.
If you do not set these options, you can still edit the Step Weight and
Completed fields in the Steps tab, but they will not be used in any
calculations. You will also be able to edit the Physical % field in the Status
tab of Activity Details.

Creating and Assigning Activity Step Templates

Your organization may have several activities that repeat within a project
or across projects. For example, every time you develop a new software
application, several specifications must be written and approved.
Developing a specification is a multi-step process that never changes.
For example, the “Write Specifications” or “System Design” activity

could have the following steps:
■ Submit initial spec
■ Review initial spec
■ Revise initial spec
■ Final review
■ Final revision
These steps may apply to many or all “Write Specifications” activities in a

project or across all projects. Rather than manually inputting these steps
into each “Write Specifications” activity, you can create an activity step
template containing these steps and assign the template to each applicable
activity at once. You can create activity step templates manually or convert
existing step(s) into a template.
For more information on Creating activity step templates manually Choose Enterprise,
weighted steps, refer to the Activity Step Templates. In the top grid of the Activity Step Templates
previous section, “Adding
Steps.” dialog, click Add. Type a name in the Step Template Name field (e.g.,
Specification steps). To add steps to the template, click Add in the bottom
grid. Type a Step Name and a Step Weight. The Step Weight is used to
calculate the progress of an activity; the greater the weight of the step, the
more progress has been made on the activity when you mark a step
complete. You can add an unlimited number steps to a template.
You can customize the bottom grid to display user-defined field columns
in which you can add step data such as dates and costs. Any user-defined
field data you enter in an activity step template is saved as part of the
template.

You can customize

these columns to
display user-defined
fields.
Converting existing step(s) into an activity step template In the

Activity Table, select the activity that contains the step(s) you want to
convert to a template. In the Steps tab of Activity Details, ctrl-click to
select the desired step(s), then right-click on the selected step(s) and
choose Create Template. Enter a name for the template when prompted.
The step(s) and their associated name, description, and weight are added
to the new template. You can also choose to add the steps’ UDFs to the
template.
Highlight the steps

to include in the
template, then right-
click and choose
Create Template.
Mark to add UDFs

assigned to the step(s) to
the step template.

The module automatically updates step UDF data in activity

step templates when a step UDF is added, deleted, or
modified in the User Defined Fields dialog box.
Assigning activity step templates to activities You can assign an

activity step template to activities separately or to several activities at
once. To assign a template to one activity, select the activity in the Activity
Table. Click the Layout Options bar and choose Show on Bottom, Activity
Details. In the Steps tab, click Add From Template. In the Assign Activity
Step Templates dialog, select the template you want to add and click the
Select icon (+ symbol). The Steps tab is automatically populated with the
steps listed in the template.
Click to add steps from Click to add a template to

an activity step more than one activity (the
template, then select activities must be selected
the template. in the Activity Table).
You can also assign an activity step template to multiple activities at once.
In the Activity Table, Ctrl-click each activity to which you want to assign a
template. From the Command Bar, click Steps to launch the Assign
Activity Step Templates dialog. Choose the template you want to add to
the selected activities, then click Assign.

Viewing Activity Summaries

In the Activities window, select the activity whose summary information
you want to view. Click the Summary tab in Activity Details.
To view summary information about the activity’s units, choose Display

Units. To view summary information about the activity’s costs, choose
Display Cost. To view all of the activity’s start and finish dates, choose
Display Dates.

Viewing Contract Manager Documents

Contract Manager documents are documents from the Contract Manager
module (formerly known as Expedition) that are associated with project
activities. In the Activities window, select an activity that has a Contract
Manager document associated with it. Click the Contract Manager Docs
tab in Activity Details.
To view a document, select the document, then click View. For Contract
Manager version 8.5 (Expedition), the document displays in Contract
Manager Print Preview. For Contract Manager version 9.0 and higher, the
document displays in your default Web browser.
You can view Contract Manager documents only if your project

is linked to a project in the Contract Manager module. Refer to
“Linking the Project Management and Contract Manager
Modules” on page 509 for more information. You must access
the Contract Manager module to associate a document with a
project activity.

Using Global Change

The Global Change feature enables you to make changes to all activities,
or a selected group of activities, at one time. You can use Global Change
to edit existing values, assign new values, or delete a group of activities
from your project.
You can create global change specifications at varying levels, for

activities, activity resource assignments, or project expenses. For example,
create a statement to assign resource assignments to a group of activities.
In addition, you can the save global change definitions.
When you run Global Change, data exclusively locked by another user
does not change. To obtain exclusive access, before opening the project,
choose Exclusive in the Access Mode section of the Open Project dialog
box. Choose File, Open.
You must have access to the activities to which you want to

make global changes. If your security profile does not enable
you to access these activities, you will not be able to save your
changes.
Change data globally Use the Global Change dialog box to create,
edit, delete, or run global change specifications. Choose Project,
Activities, then choose Tools, Global Change. Select a global change and
click Apply Change. You can view the data changes in the Global Change
Report window. To accept the changes displayed in the Global Change
Report window, click Commit Changes; to cancel the global change and
return the data to its original state, click Cancel Changes.

Click and select a user name to make the

specification available to that user.
Choose to make the

selected global Click New to globally
change specification change activities,
available globally or activity resource
only to specified assignments, or
users. project expenses.
Click Import to select

a PCF file to import
into another project.
Click Export to save a

PCF file to another
location.
Add or modify a global change statement Choose Tools, Global

Change. Select the subject area for the global change statement. To select
parameters for expressions that can affect all activity information, choose
Activities. To select parameters for expressions that can affect an activity's
resource information, choose Activity Resource Assignments. Choose
Project Expenses to select parameters for expressions that can affect an
activity's expense information.
Define If, Then, and Else statements to specify the data you want to
change. If statements control which project data changes. Then and Else
statements specify the changes to be made. You can define an unlimited
number of If, Then, or Else statements. All global change specifications
require at least one Then statement. If statements are optional. The module
applies a Then statement with no If statement to all activities in the current
filter. Click the If, Then, or Else section to select it, then click Add to add a
statement.
Changing some parameters of an If, Then, or Else statement

may affect the operators and criteria available in the
statement.

Click to
define
additional
If, Then,
and Else
You can create
statements.
user-defined
parameters.
Copy and paste a specification Choose Tools, Global Change.

Select the specification you want to copy, then click Copy. Click Paste.
The new specification is placed at the bottom of the list of specifications.
Cut, copy, or paste a statement Choose Tools, Global Change.

Select the global change specification you want to edit, then click Modify.
Select the statement you want to cut or copy, then click either Cut or Copy.
Click the section into which you want to paste the statement, and click
Paste. The new statement is placed at the bottom of the list of statements.
You cannot paste statements from the If section of the Global

Change dialog box into the Then or Else sections; however,
you can cut or copy and paste between the Then and Else
sections.
Store new values in user-defined fields To define user fields,

choose Enterprise, User Defined Fields. In the Modify Global Change
dialog box, use the custom user fields in a global change statement to store
custom values in a project database. For example, you can create a Then
statement assigning a value of COMPLETE to the text-type user field
defined for the Activities subject area called Production for Development
activities. You can display Production as a column in the Activity Table to
view the new values.

Changing the subject area of

a specification will clear all
existing If, Then, and Else
statements.
Combine text fields You can use Global Change to modify text data
items such as activity IDs and names, and activity codes, by linking two
text fields using the ampersand (&) operator. This is called concatenation.
The following statement adds the location activity code value to the
Activity ID field, if there is a value assigned to the activity:
Then: Activity ID = Activity ID & Location
Use a dash (-) or underscore (_) to represent spaces when

concatenating data.
For more information on the Use arithmetic with Global Change You can use arithmetic
valid arithmetic operators and equations to change numeric data such as quantities, costs, and durations.
calculations available in
Global Change, along with Use addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division to calculate new
examples of date arithmetic, values. Click the Operator column to list the various operator symbols.
see the Help. Join text strings with an ampersand symbol (&).
Arithmetic operators can link two data items, a data item and a number, or
two numbers that you enter. Use arithmetic operators in Then and Else
statements to calculate new values for a data item. The module does not
use arithmetic operations in If statements, only comparisons.

Working with Cost Accounts and Project Expenses 247
Working with Cost Accounts and

Project Expenses
Cost accounts enable you to track activity
In this chapter costs and earned value throughout the project
life cycle. Set the default cost account at the
Cost Account and Expense
Overview project level so that it is automatically
Setting Up a Cost Account assigned to the project’s activities. Cost
Structure accounts are established in a hierarchy
Adding Expenses and Entering available to all projects in the enterprise
Cost Information
project structure (EPS).
Defining Expense Details
Analyzing Costs Expenses are nonresource costs associated
with a project and assigned to a project’s activ-
ities. They are typically one-time expenditures
for nonreusable items. Examples of expenses
include facilities, travel, consulting, and
training.
Read this chapter to learn how to set up cost

accounts and add expenses.

Cost Account and Expense Overview

You can create cost accounts that you can assign to activities in any
project. Cost accounts are hierarchical and they enable you to track
activity costs and earned value according to your organization’s specific
cost account codes.
You can assign a default

parent cost account for
each project in the
Projects window, then
assign the child cost
accounts when
associating expenses
with activities.
You can also add expenses, assign expense categories to them, and specify
whether an expense accrues at the start or end of an activity or uniformly
over its duration. Each expense has a planned actual, remaining, and at
completion value for both cost and units.
Expenses are not the same as resources. Resources can be

time-based and generally extend across multiple activities and/
or multiple projects. Examples of resources are personnel and
equipment. Unlike resources, expenses are project-specific and
they are not time-based. The module does not include
expenses when leveling resources.

Setting Up a Cost Account Structure

Set up a cost account structure and assign codes to activities and/or
resources. Use the cost account structure to track the amount of work
accomplished against the amount of money spent.
Create a cost account hierarchy Choose Enterprise, Cost Accounts.

Click the Cost Account ID column label to display the cost accounts
hierarchy. An outline symbol in the Cost Account ID column label
indicates a hierarchy display.
Select the cost account immediately above and at the same level as the cost
account you want to add, then click Add. Type the cost account’s ID and
name. The cost account ID and name should identify a project component,
such as engineering, hardware, or research. Create cost accounts beneath
each main component to delineate the component’s parts, such as coding
and installation for hardware.
In the Cost Account Description area provide an optional, brief summary

of the cost account. You can use HTML editing features, which include
When you indent,

or create a lower-
level cost account,
the module
automatically Use these
prefixes the new arrows to
account with the indent/
higher level’s ID. outdent a
value in the
cost account
hierarchy and
to move a
selected
value up or
down in the
list.

Set the project default cost account Specify a default cost account
that will be used for resources assigned to activities and project expenses
in the selected project. Choose Enterprise, Projects, to open the Projects
window. Display Project Details by clicking the Display Options bar and
choosing Show on Bottom, Project Details. Click the Defaults tab, select a
project in the upper layout, then click the Browse button in the Cost
Account field. Select the default cost account, then click the Select button.
The module only uses your default cost account for new
resource assignments to activities and new project expenses.
Changing this setting does not affect existing resource
assignments to activities or existing project expenses.
Edit a cost account Choose Enterprise, Cost Accounts. Make sure the
cost accounts hierarchy is displayed; an outline symbol in the Cost
Account ID column label indicates a hierarchy display. Select the cost
account you want to edit. Type a new cost account ID and name. To
change the cost account’s position in the cost accounts hierarchy, click the
appropriate arrow buttons.
If you change a cost account’s ID or name, the change applies

to all activity assignments.

Delete a cost account Choose Enterprise, Cost Accounts. Select the

cost account you want to delete, then click Del./Merge. If the cost account
is assigned to activities or projects, the Cost Account in Use dialog box is
displayed.
To delete the cost account and specify a replacement cost account, choose
Select Replacement Account, click OK, then select a replacement account.
To delete the cost account without specifying a replacement cost account,
choose Delete Account(s), then click OK.
Copy and paste cost accounts Choose Enterprise, Cost Accounts.

Make sure the cost accounts hierarchy is displayed; an outline symbol in
the Cost Account ID column label indicates a hierarchy display. Select the
cost account you want to copy, then click Copy. Select the cost account to
which you want to paste the copied account, then click Paste.

The copied cost account

displays below the selected
cost account in the
hierarchy, and includes any
lower-level cost accounts in
the copied cost account.
You cannot copy a cost account’s activity and project

assignments.
Cut and paste cost accounts Choose Enterprise, Cost Accounts.

Make sure the cost accounts hierarchy is displayed; an outline symbol in
the Cost Account ID column label indicates a hierarchy display. Select the
cost account you want to cut and paste, then click Cut. Select the cost
account to which you want to move the cut account, then click Paste.
When you cut and paste a cost account, the module maintains
the account’s activity and project assignments.

Adding Expenses and Entering Cost Information

Use the Project Expenses window to create, view, and edit expenses and
related cost information for the open project. You can assign a cost
account and corresponding work breakdown structure (WBS) code so you
can identify the project component associated with the expense, and the
area of work with which it is associated. The Project Expenses window is
displayed when you choose Project, Expenses. To include Project Expense
Details at the bottom of the Project Expenses window, click the Display
Options bar and choose Expense Details. (The box next to Expense Details
should be marked.)
For steps on adding expenses Add expenses Choose Project, Expenses. Click Add. Select the
to activities from the activity that incurs the expense, then click the Select button. Group the
Activities window, see
“Working with Activities” on activities in the Select Activity dialog box so you can easily find the
page 201. activity.
Click the General, Activity, Costs, and Description tabs, and enter the
expense’s information. For an explanation of the fields on these tabs, refer
to “Defining Expense Details” on page 256.

Enter cost information for expenses Choose Project, Expenses.

Select the expense whose cost information you want to enter, then click
the Costs tab. Type the number of units you expect the expense’s assigned
activity to use, then supply the price for each unit. The module calculates
and displays the planned cost of the selected expense (planned units *
price/unit) in the Planned Cost field.
For more information on To automatically calculate an expense’s actual cost based on the activity’s
automatically calculating completion percentage, mark the Auto Compute Actuals checkbox. The
actuals, see “Updating,
Scheduling, and Leveling” on module automatically updates the actual/remaining units when project
page 283. actuals are applied. This setting assumes that all work for the activity
proceeds according to plan.
Enter an expense accrual type Choose Project, Expenses. Select the

expense whose accrual type you want to enter, then click the Activity tab.
Select one of the following accrual types:

■ Start of Activity, to accrue the entire expense on the date the activity
begins
■ End of Activity, to accrue the entire expense on the date the activity
ends
■ Uniform Over Activity, to evenly distribute the expense over the
course of the activity’s duration

To set up expense Assign an expense category Choose Project, Expenses. Select the
categories, choose Admin, expense to which you want to assign an expense category. Expense
Admin Categories, then categories enable you to classify the type of cost and can be used to group,
click the Expense sort, filter, and report the expense and cost information for your projects.
Categories tab. Click the General tab, then click the Browse button in the Expense
Category field. Select the category you want to assign, then click the
Select button.
Change an expense assignment Choose Project, Expenses. Select

the expense you want to reassign, then click the Activity tab. Click the
Browse button in the Activity Name field. Select the activity to which you
want to reassign the expense, then click the Select button.

Defining Expense Details

Use Expense Details to view and edit detailed information about the
selected expense item. Expense Details appear in the Project Expenses
window when you choose Expense Details from the Display Options bar.
General information Use the General tab to define general information

for the selected expense item, such as the item name and category. You can
also specify the item’s vendor, cost account, and document number.
The cost account assigned The name of the business or

to the activity that incurs organization to which the
the selected expense selected expense is payable
The project administrator

defines expense categories
in the Admin Categories
dialog box.
The purchase order or invoice number

for the selected expense
Activity information Use the Activity tab to change the selected

expense item’s activity assignment and specify the expense item’s accrual
type. You can also view the item’s activity assignment according to WBS
element, activity status, activity start and finish dates, and primary
resource.
The ID and name of the

activity that incurs the
selected expense
The code for the WBS

element that contains the
selected expense’s
assigned activity
The rate at which the selected expense

accrues

Costs Use the Costs tab to specify cost amounts for the selected expense
item, including price/unit, planned cost, actual cost, and remaining cost.
You can also indicate if you want to calculate an expense item’s actual cost
according to activity completion percentage.
Type a value to quantify the expense.

For example, type “lbs” for pounds.
Mark to indicate whether the actual and

remaining units for the expense are
computed automatically using the
planned cost and the activity’s schedule
percent complete.
Description Use the Description tab to enter a description of the

selected expense item. You can type a new description. You can use
HTML editing features, which include formatting text, inserting pictures,
copying and pasting information from other document files (while
retaining formatting), and adding hyperlinks.

Analyzing Costs
Comparing actual costs to budgets is a simplistic approach to cost control.
Determining performance using earned value is more effective. Measuring
earned value involves three key indicators: planned value, earned value,
and actual cost. If you track these values over time, you can see the past
spending and schedule trends for the project, together with a forecast of
future costs.
The variance between the planned budget

and earned value amounts indicates an
unfavorable schedule variance.
Customize columns in the

Projects window to report
earned value for all
projects in the enterprise.
Use cost spreadsheets, profiles, and cost control reports to monitor

spending. For example, the following summary report lists the expenses
associated with each project and provides the total planned, actual, and
remaining costs for each expense.

EX-01 Expense Summary By Project
Expense Item Activity ID Budgeted Cost Actual Cost Remaining Cost
Computer Equipment A20.190 $10,000.00 $0.00 $10,000.00
Meeting Lunch A10.10 $100.00 $200.00 $0.00
Trip expenses A10.20 $10,000.00 $15,000.00 $0.00
Meeting Lunches A10.40 $300.00 $500.00 $0.00
Auto Milage A10.30 $200.00 $150.00 $0.00
Printing A10.50 $500.00 $1,000.00 $0.00
Binding A10.50 $100.00 $0.00 $0.00
Shipping (FedEx) A10.60 $500.00 $0.00 $500.00
Subtotal $21,700.00 $16,850.00 $10,500.00
Project Name Russell Computers
Expense Item Activity ID Budgeted Cost Actual Cost Remaining Cost
Computer Equipment A20.190 $10,000.00 $0.00 $10,000.00
Meeting Lunch A10.10 $100.00 $200.00 $100.00
Trip expenses A10.20 $10,000.00 $15,000.00 $0.00
Page 7 of 12
The following Activity Usage Spreadsheet pairs activity duration columns

on the left with the corresponding cumulative cost information on the
right. You can see the cumulative remaining expense cost for each activity
per month, along with the totals for the WBS elements.

Produce activity profiles to see a graphical representation of cost flow for

all or selected activities in the Activities window. The histogram bars in
the following example indicate quarterly expenses for multiple selected
activities. Using a time-based graphic helps you gauge when and where
costs are expended, and enables you to see if spending is staying within
budget.

Performing Top-down Estimation 261

Top-Down Estimation enables you to apply
In this chapter labor, nonlabor, and/or material resource units
to activities in a top-down manner using
assigned estimation weights.
Applying Saved Top-Down
Estimates To a Project
Read this chapter to learn how to perform and
apply top-down estimation to WBS elements
and activities.


To perform top-down estimation, you must first assign estimation weights
to work breakdown structure (WBS) elements and activities. You can
assign estimation weights directly in the Project Management module or
import them from the Methodology Management module using Project
Architect.
For information on assigning You can limit the scope of your estimate according to work breakdown
weights to WBS elements and structure (WBS) element and resource. After you develop a top-down
activities, see “Reviewing
Work Breakdown Structures” estimate, save the estimate for later reference or use, or apply the estimate
on page 133. to the project. If you apply an estimate, the module updates planned labor/
nonlabor units for all activities and activity resource assignments that fall
within the estimation scope you specify. Top-down estimations do not
affect project expenses.
When performing a top-down estimation, you should first determine the

total number of labor or nonlabor resource units you want to apply. You
can determine this number using either prior experience on similar
projects, or you can use the module’s Function Point option, if you are
estimating an information technology project.
Unlike labor and nonlabor resources, a top down estimate can

not be applied to all material resources at once, because their
units of measure differ. You must select the material resources
individually.
For organizations using Primavera ProjectLink, top-down

estimation is disabled for Microsoft Project (MSP)-managed
projects. For more information on ProjectLink, click the Help
button on any ProjectLink screen to access the help in
Microsoft Project (available only if ProjectLink is installed).
Perform top-down estimations using prior experience Choose

Tools, Top Down Estimation. Choose to estimate labor or nonlabor
resource units. Click the Browse button in the WBS field to select the
WBS element whose activities you want to estimate, then click the Select
button. To estimate activities assigned to a specific resource within the
specified WBS element, such as a material type resource, click the Browse
button in the Resource field, select the resource, then click the Select
button.

The Total Activities field

reflects the number of
activities included under
the specified WBS
element.
To estimate the entire
project, select the root
WBS element.
Select an individual
resource whose assigned
activities you want to
estimate for the selected
WBS element.
Click to view detailed
information about and/or
apply a previously saved
top-down estimate.
Choose Prior Experience. Using the value displayed in the Current Units
field as a guide, type the estimate in the Estimated Units field. To apply an
adjustment percentage to the estimate, mark the Apply Adjustment
checkbox, then type the adjustment percentage you want to use. For
example, if the estimated units are 400 and you apply an adjustment of
50%, the module will add 200 (50% of 400) to the estimated units. The
Adjusted Units field will display 600 units.
To save the estimate without applying it, click Save As. Type a name and
any assumptions and notes about the estimate, then click Save.
Develop top-down estimations using function points Choose

Tools, Top Down Estimation. Choose to estimate labor or nonlabor
resource units, or select a material resource in the Resource field. Click the
Browse button in the WBS field to select the WBS element whose
activities you want to estimate, then click the Select button. Choose
Function Point, then click Function Points.

Type the Unadjusted Function Point Count (UFP) value you want to use,
or click Calculate to calculate the UFP.
If you choose to calculate the UFP, in the applicable boxes type the
number of low, average, and high complexity files and transactions to be
developed under the WBS element and resource, if any, you are
estimating.
Click Close. The Function Point Estimation dialog box reappears. Your
UFP value is listed in the Unadjusted Function Point Count (UFP) box.

Type the Total Degree of Influence (TDI) value you want to use, or click
Characteristics to calculate the TDI. If you choose to specify
characteristics, select a system characteristic, then choose the numeric
value that indicates the characteristic’s degree of influence on the WBS
element you are estimating. A 0 indicates no influence and 5 indicates the
strongest influence. When you select a value, the Value Description box
displays text describing the value for the selected characteristic. Select a
value for all system characteristics, then click Close.
The Function Point Estimation dialog box reappears. The TDI value is
listed in the Total Degree of Influence (TDI) box.
Type the average productivity value, then click Close.
To apply an adjustment percentage to the estimate, mark the Apply

Adjustment checkbox, then type the percentage you want to use. For
example, if the estimated units are 400 and you apply an adjustment of
50%, the module will add 200 (50% of 400) to the estimated units. The
Adjusted Units field will display 600 units.
To save the estimate without applying it, click Save As. Type a name and
any assumptions and notes about the estimate, then click Save.
Apply top-down estimations Click Apply to perform the top-down

estimation. Click Yes when prompted to confirm that you want to apply a
top-down estimate to the project. Click OK.

Applying Saved Top-Down Estimates To a Project

After you specify the number of units you want to apply, the module
distributes the total units to the selected activities, using the estimated
weights assigned to the project’s WBS elements and activities. The
module uses these weights to calculate the proportion of resource units
that each WBS element and activity should receive in relation to other
WBS elements. The module also maintains a history of saved top-down
estimations.
Apply saved top-down estimations Choose Tools, Top Down

Estimation. Click History. Select the estimate you want to apply. Click
Apply.
View a project’s top-down estimations Choose Tools, Top Down

Estimation. Click History.

The Applied column

indicates which estimates
were applied to the open
project from the Estimation
History dialog box.
To view an estimate’s
details, select the estimate,
then click these tabs.
To delete an estimate,
select it, then click Delete.

Part 4
Updating and Managing the
Schedule
In this part Managing Baselines
Updating, Scheduling, and Leveling
Summarizing Projects
Project Issues and Thresholds
Managing Risks
Maintaining a Project’s Document
Library
Tracking Projects
Comparing Projects with Schedule
Comparison
Checking Projects In and Out
S uccessful project management doesn’t end after you
develop a project plan. You need to track daily events and
update the schedule with accurate data. Managing
Baselines describes how to create a copy of a project that
can be compared to the current schedule to gauge
progress, and Updating, Scheduling, and Leveling
explains how to update the schedule and level resources.
Summarizing Projects provides steps for summarizing
project data as needed or at regularly scheduled intervals.
Read Project Issues and Thresholds and Managing Risks
to learn how these features help you monitor project
schedules to identify potential problems early in the
process. Maintaining a Project’s Document Library
describes how to track project-related documents and
work products, while Tracking Projects shows you how to
create layouts that enable you to view summary data for
individual projects, as well as the entire enterprise project
structure (EPS). Read the Checking Projects In and Out
chapter to learn how to keep track of projects that are used
outside of the enterprise database.
Managing Baselines 271
Managing Baselines
A baseline is a complete copy of a project plan
In this chapter that you can compare to the current schedule to
evaluate progress.
Creating and Maintaining
Baselines
This chapter describes how to create baselines
Assigning Baselines to Projects
and assign them to projects. You will also
Comparing Current and Baseline
Schedules learn how to modify a baseline, update a
Updating Baselines baseline with new data, and compare a
project’s current schedule to its baseline.

272 Part 4: Updating and Managing the Schedule
Creating and Maintaining Baselines

Before you update a schedule for the first time, you should create a
baseline plan. The simplest baseline plan is a complete copy or “snapshot”
of the original schedule. This snapshot provides a target against which you
can track a project’s cost, schedule, and performance.
Each baseline can be assigned a type that categorizes its purpose, for
example, initial planning baseline, what-if project plan baseline, or mid-
project status baseline. Baseline types are defined by the administrator in
the Admin Categories dialog box.
You can compare up to three baselines at one time. For example, you
might want to create a baseline of the original project schedule, and then
create two additional baselines at different stages of the project. You can
compare these to the current schedule to see how the project is progressing
according to the project plan. You can also create a project baseline to use
for summarization.
You must have at least one Designate any existing project, or a copy of the current project, as a
project open to access baseline. The maximum number of baselines allowed is defined by the
project baselines in the administrator in the Admin Preferences dialog box.
Maintain Baselines or
Assign Baselines dialog Baseline projects do not exist as separate projects that you can access. To
boxes.
copy or modify a baseline project manually, you must first unlink it from
its current project. The “restored” baseline project then acts as any other
project in the enterprise project structure (EPS). You can also update a
baseline project with new or modified project data from the current
project. The module only updates the data types you select when you
update a baseline.
Create project baselines Open the projects for which you want to
create a baseline or view assigned baseline projects. Choose Project,
Maintain Baselines. The Maintain Baselines dialog box groups the
currently open projects into individual bands, with any existing baseline
projects beneath its current project.
After creating a baseline, you can set a baseline as the project,

primary, secondary, or tertiary baseline in the Assign Baselines
dialog box.

Click to delete the currently

selected baseline project.
You can
rename each
baseline to
make it unique.
Assign a type to Click to update the

baselines to help selected baseline project
categorize them with new/modified data
across multiple from the current project.
projects.
To create a baseline project, select the desired project and click Add. If
multiple projects are open, you can create a baseline for the selected
projects. (To select a project Ctrl-click on its band.) Choose to save a copy
of the current project as a new baseline or convert another project to a new
baseline.
If you choose to save the current project as a baseline, the module creates
a baseline project with the same name and data date as the current project.
To distinguish the baseline project, the module appends the name with –
B1 and increments each new baseline added. For example, if Acme
Project is saved with 3 baselines the new baselines should be saved as:
ID Name
ACME – B1 Acme Project – B1

Before you convert a If you choose to convert another project as a baseline of the current
project as a baseline, you project, you are prompted to select the project to designate as the baseline
should copy it; it will no from the project hierarchy. You cannot select a project that is currently
longer be available in the open, nor can you select a project that already has its own assigned
project hierarchy. baseline. The module creates a baseline project with the same name and
data date as the selected project. (To distinguish the baseline project, the
module appends the name with – B1.) This new baseline project is then
removed from the project hierarchy and is no longer available as an
individual project.
You can only convert one project at a time as a baseline. If

multiple projects are open, you must select one project before
you can create the baseline project.
After you create a baseline, you can change its name and assign a baseline
type to it.
Delete a baseline You can delete a baseline from the project database.
Select the project that contains the baseline you want to delete. Choose
Project, Maintain Baselines. Select the baseline, then click Delete.
You cannot delete an active baseline. An active baseline is any

baseline designated as the primary, secondary, or tertiary
baseline in the Assign Baselines dialog box.
Modify a baseline manually As a project progresses and changes

occur, you may want to modify a baseline project. You can restore a
baseline project, making it available again as a separate project in the
project hierarchy. Open the project that contains the baseline you want to
restore. Choose Project, Maintain Baselines. Select the baseline you want
to restore, then click Restore. Click Yes. The restored project is placed in
the same node as the project to which it was linked as a baseline.
To learn more about updating Restoring a project to modify a baseline manually is different
baselines with new or than updating a baseline. When you update a baseline using
modified data from the the Update Baseline tool, the module updates every instance of
current project, refer to
“Updating Baselines” on every data type you select. If you want some, but not all,
page 280. changes to the current project for a specific data type (e.g.,
resource assignments) reflected in the baseline, you should
restore the baseline and edit the data. If you want all changes
to a data type reflected in the baseline, you should update the
baseline.

The restored baseline project can be accessed in

the project hierarchy along with its current project.
Current project
After you make changes to a restored baseline project, you can return it as
a baseline to retain the changes for comparison against the current project.
For example, you may want to revise the baseline to indicate scope
changes once the current project is underway.

Assigning Baselines to Projects

Use the Assign Baselines dialog box to designate the current project or an
existing baseline as the project, primary, secondary, or tertiary baseline.
The project baseline is always used to summarize a project. The project
baseline or primary baseline can be designated as the project to use when
calculating earned value (based on a setting in the Settings tab of Project
Details). The primary, secondary, and tertiary baselines are user-defined
baselines used to compare projects.
Assign the baseline to use for summarization or earned value

To choose which baseline to use for summarizing a project, open the
project for which you want to select a project baseline. Choose Project,
Assign Baselines. In the Project field, select the project to which you want
to assign a project baseline. In the Project Baseline field, select the desired
baseline or the current project. If no baseline is designated as active, the
current project is used as the baseline project.
You can assign only one project baseline to a project. You

must have the appropriate security privileges to select the
project baseline.
Assign the baselines to use for the current project Use the
Assign Baselines dialog box to choose which baseline is the primary
baseline for a project. Open the projects for which you want to select a
baseline. Choose Project, Assign Baselines. In the Project field, select the
project to which you want to assign a primary baseline.
Each baseline field in the Assign Baselines dialog lists the current project
and all existing baselines for the selected project. To use an existing
baseline as the primary baseline, select an existing baseline in the Primary
field. If you do not select a value for the primary baseline, the current
project is used as the primary baseline.
Assign baselines for comparison To assign an existing baseline as

the secondary or tertiary baseline, choose Project, Assign Baselines. In the
Project field, select the project to which you want to assign baselines. In
the Secondary and Tertiary fields, select an existing baseline or the current
project. You can assign the same project as secondary and tertiary
baselines.
You can assign only one primary, secondary, and tertiary

baseline to a project. Secondary and tertiary baselines are not
required.

Select a project from the list

Select the baseline to use
of open projects.
for summarization or
earned value.
Baseline assignments are user-specific, meaning that each

user can choose a different version for his/her active baseline
to the current project.

Comparing Current and Baseline Schedules

For more information about After a project is updated, you can quickly evaluate progress and
updating the schedule, see performance onscreen. Use a layout that shows current and baseline bars
“Updating, Scheduling, and
Leveling” on page 283. to identify tasks that start or finish later than planned. In the list of
activities, include columns for the planned value, actual costs to date, and
earned value to identify tasks that are behind schedule or over budget. For
detailed reporting, create schedule and activity matrix reports and resource
and cost graphics. Run the Earned Value report to analyze cost and
schedule variance using the project or primary baseline. Displaying
baseline and current bars in the Gantt Chart indicates how the schedule is
progressing according to the original plan.
BL appears before any A target comparison makes it easy to see variances between the current
data item that is available and baseline dates. Add columns in the Activity Table for almost any data
from a baseline project. item from the baseline project. Display activity bars that represent baseline
dates. You can also display target and variance data on the activity bars.
When the current project is open, you can view, but not change,
baseline data. To modify the baseline, you must first restore it
as a separate project. You can also update baseline project
data using the Update Baseline utility.
This layout includes current and baseline

columns for start and finish dates.

Setting preferences for baseline values Choose to calculate the

earned value from the Planned or At Completion values of the project or
primary baseline. For example, based on the setting chosen, you can add
either the planned or the at completion duration to the BL Start date to
calculate the BL Finish date. Go to Admin, Admin Preferences. On the
Earned Value tab, in the Earned Value Calculation section, choose Planned
values or At Completion values to calculate earned value.

Updating Baselines
As a project progresses, certain types of project data are likely to change.
When a project is in progress and data changes, the original baseline you
created for the project will not accurately measure performance against the
current project. Likewise, creating a new baseline may not yield accurate
results for measuring performance because some data will change during
the life of the project that should be measured against the original project
data.
For example, changes to any of the following data types can affect results
when comparing a project to its baseline:
• added/dropped activities
• modified activity data including dates, costs, resources, steps,
documents, notebooks, relationships, codes, expenses, and user-
defined fields
• modified project-level data including details, documents, risks,
issues, thresholds, calendars, and codes
Using Primavera’s Update Baseline utility, you can update the original
baseline plan with new activity, resource/role assignment, and project data.
When updating a baseline, you can choose to update all activities or you
can apply a filter to update activities that meet the filter’s criteria. You can
also specify the types of data to update.
You can only update one baseline at a time. You must have the
Update Project Baselines project privilege to update a baseline.
Update a project baseline To update a baseline, open the project that

contains the data you want to add to the baseline. Choose Project,
Maintain Baselines. Select the baseline you want to update. Click Update.
Select the project-level data you want to update. Choose to update all
activities or select a filter to only update activities that meet the filter’s
criteria. Choose to add new activities from the current project, delete
activities no longer in the current project, and/or update existing activities.
If you choose to update existing activities, click Update Options to select
the types of activity and resource/role assignment data you want to update.
To save the results of the baseline update to a file (including errors and
warnings), enter a pathname or select a file. After selecting options, click
Update. When the update is complete, click View Log to view the results
of the update.

Click to specify
the types of
data to update
You must
for existing
select at
activities.
least one of
these
options to
update
activity data.
Choose this
option to run
the baseline
update faster. If
you choose this
option, errors
are not logged
during the
baseline
update (see the
following note).
Click Help on both of the If errors occur when updating a baseline in optimized mode,
dialog boxes displayed you will not be able to determine the data item that is causing
above to view important the update to fail. To determine the data item causing the
information to consider failure, turn off the Run Optimized option and rerun the baseline
when selecting update update. After the update is complete, refer to the log file to
baseline options. determine which data item is causing the update to fail.
Baseline update performance is further optimized when you log

in to Primavera as an Admin Superuser.

Ensuring Baseline Data Is Updated

When you update a baseline, the module stores the date on which the
baseline was last updated. You can view this date in the Last Update Date
field of the Maintain Baselines dialog box. The module does not consider
the last update date when you choose the Ignore Last Update Date option
in the Update Baseline dialog box.
Primavera recommends that you select the Ignore Last Update Date option
if you plan to update different data types at different times (i.e., you will
not simply be updating all baseline data each time). If you do not select
this option, some data types may not be updated from the correct date
when you run the baseline update.
For example:
■ On June 1st, you run a baseline update that includes activity steps.
■ On June 8th, you run a baseline update that does NOT include activity
steps.
■ On June 15th, you run a baseline update that includes activity steps.
You do not select the Ignore Last Update Date option.
Given this scenario, when you run the baseline update on June 15th,
activity steps are only updated from June 8th because the baseline is
updated from the last update date. If you select the Ignore Last Update
Date option, all changes to activity steps are updated regardless of the date
the baseline was last updated.

Updating, Scheduling, and Leveling 283
Updating, Scheduling, and Leveling

A good project schedule can serve as a key
In this chapter management tool for making decisions and
predicting whether the project will finish on
The Update Process
time and within budget. Update your project
Choosing a Method of Updating
regularly so you can record progress and
Highlighting Activities for
Updating identify potential problems.
Estimating Progress Automati- You can update project progress by applying
cally
actual data to activities directly in a project or
Updating Using Timesheets
by using timesheet updates from the
Updating Activities Manually
Timesheets module.
Interrupting Activity Progress
Applying Actuals After you update the project, schedule it to
Storing Period Performance (Past calculate the earliest start and finish dates as
Period Actuals) well as the latest start and finish dates for each
Scheduling Projects activity and for the entire project. Level
Leveling Resources resources in your project schedule to ensure
Recalculating Resource and Role that resource demand does not exceed resource
Assignment Costs
availability. When you level resources, each
Managing Resource Assignments
activity is delayed until sufficient resources are
available.
Read this chapter to learn how to update and

schedule projects, and level resources.
The Update Process

Once a project is underway, it is important to keep the schedule up to date.
Actual durations will probably vary from your original estimates, and the
sequence of activities may change once the work begins. In addition, you
may need to add new activities and delete unnecessary ones. Regularly
updating schedules and comparing them with baseline schedules ensures
that you are using resources effectively, monitoring project costs against
budget, and keeping abreast of actual durations and costs so you can
initiate your contingency plan if necessary.
The project controls coordinator, along with the project managers,

establishes company procedures and communicates them to all
participants. Usually, several projects at various levels of progress occur
simultaneously. Project portfolio management can be complicated further
when project managers, key resources, or other employees involved in the
process are geographically dispersed. You must consider these factors as
you establish updating guidelines.
To help develop procedures, ask questions such as these:

n What data need to be assembled for the update and what methods will
be used to collect the data?
n How often should projects be updated?
n Are resources local or offsite?
n On which project teams are resources participating?
n Who on each team will be gathering the information used for the
project update?
n Who needs to see the results of the update and when do they need to
see them?
n What types of information need to be generated after each update to
communicate progress before the next update?
The answers to these questions help determine how you will use the
module to update projects.
Identify the types of data to collect The data to collect may depend
on whether you are updating activities or individual resource assignments.
You can update activities by simply recording actual dates and a remaining
duration. For resource assignments, enter the actual hours to date and the
hours remaining. The module can also estimate progress automatically.

Determine how data will be collected Will you automatically

collect timesheet entry data for each employee from the Timesheets
module? Does your organization need to collect status from project team
members who are not assigned resources or Timesheets users? Will you
import data from other systems supported by your company, such as an
accounting system? Or will updates be handwritten on printouts of the
schedule distributed to project participants, collected weekly by the
project manager or team leader, and entered in the module?
If you answered Yes to one or more of these questions, your update

process will probably involve more than one procedure—all handled
equally well by the module.
Determine how often data should be updated Depending on how

quickly your projects change, you may want to update monthly, weekly, or
even daily. Although no rules exist for update frequency, consider these
general guidelines: if your projects never seem to be accurate, you are not
updating often enough, or the scope of your activities is too broad—you
should divide activities into smaller ones. If you spend too much time
updating, you’re updating too often, or the scope of your activities is too
narrow.
Analyze and communicate data Recording progress in the module

is only the beginning of the update process; after you produce an updated
schedule, you need to analyze the results.
Examine updated project schedules using the many display and print
options available. You can first view onscreen layouts to see immediate
results, then look at project data in more detail by generating reports.
Pinpoint potential problems by comparing the current schedule to the
target plan in the Bar Chart or by displaying a Resource Usage Profile for
a graphical representation of resource use. If problems exist, you may
want to perform “what-if” analyses before modifying the network. Use
existing report templates, create new template specifications by modifying
existing ones, or add your own template to produce the data you need to
see.
Effective communication to all project participants is also essential to the

success of every project. Use easily understood reports and layouts to
show the project team and management what is happening. Focus on
critical activities, resource and cost overloads, and slippages, and identify
actual and required future progress.
The next several topics in this chapter discuss specific methods for
recording progress.

Choosing a Method of Updating

You can update project schedules in several different ways. Update
progress for all activities and resources as a whole, update activities and
resources individually, update progress from timesheets, or use a
combination of these methods.
More than likely, your projects do not progress as planned—many

activities start out-of-sequence, activities take more or less time to
complete than originally planned, or actual resource use exceeds planned
use. In these cases, update activities and resources individually. This will
help you forecast the effects of unforeseen progress or lack of progress so
that you can take appropriate corrective action wherever necessary. You
can update activities and/or resources manually in the Project
Management module, collect timesheet data from the Timesheets module,
or use Primavera’s Web application to collect activity progress from
project team members who are designated as activity Owners.
Sometimes, you may only need to estimate progress. You can choose to
“auto compute actuals,” then simply specify the data date and apply actual
data. Before the first update, the data date is the project start date; once the
project begins, the data date is the date up to which you are reporting
progress. The module uses the data date to determine which activities have
progressed and how much, and to calculate the remaining durations of
activities that have started. The module also notes which activities are
complete and sets their remaining durations to zero.
Most projects progress somewhere between these two situations: some

activities are occurring as planned and some are not. If this is the case, you
may want to combine the two updating methods. Allow the module to
calculate a project schedule as if the project is progressing exactly as
planned and then individually update those activities and resources that
have deviated from the plan.
Regardless of the method you choose, the update process should proceed
as outlined below:
For information on 1 Establish a standard update procedure that includes which method
implementing the Timesheets you will use to record progress.
module, see the
Administrator’s Guide. Depending on the method you choose, set calculation variables for
percent complete type and duration type.
2 Create a baseline plan, as discussed in “Managing Baselines” on
page 271.

3 Record progress on activities automatically or manually in the Project

Management module, and/or from Timesheets module data, and/or
use Primavera’s Web application to collect progress from designated
activity Owners.
Recording progress includes entering actual start and/or finish dates,
updating actual resource use/cost to date, and estimating remaining
work to complete.
If collecting timesheet data from the Timesheets module, review and
approve timesheets in the Project Management module.
For more information about If collecting progress from activity owners, use Reflection project
combining activity owner and features to implement a review and approval process that enables you
Reflection project features to
collect activity status, see the to examine updates to activity status and specify which, if any, you
Project Management online want to merge into the active source project.
Help and the Administrator’s
Guide. 4 Apply project actuals.
5 Calculate the schedule and level resources.
6 Compare the current schedule to the baseline plan and identify
variances.
7 Analyze data through layouts and reports.
8 Make adjustments and communicate the schedule updates.

Highlighting Activities for Updating

The Progress Spotlight feature highlights the activities that should have
been worked on during a specified timeperiod. You can also drag the data
date line to a specific date to highlight the activities that fall between the
last data date and the new data date. Once you spotlight activities, you can
automatically status them, manually update them.
Unlike selected activities, Use the Progress Spotlight feature Choose View, Progress
when Progress Spotlight is Spotlight, or click the Progress Spotlight icon to highlight a timeperiod
active, activities remain equal to the smallest increment of the displayed timescale from the
spotlighted even when you previous data date. To increase/decrease the highlighted area between the
click in another area of the previous data date and the new date by one or more timescale increments,
workspace.
drag the data date line to the right or the left.
Update activities as described later in this chapter, or reschedule the
project immediately according to the new data date by pressing F9.
Drag the data date line Click the data-date line; when it changes to an
arrow, drag the line to the right until you reach the new data date. The
Project Management module spotlights the activities between the last data
date and the new data date. Update activities as described later in this
chapter, or reschedule the project immediately according to the new data
date by pressing F9.
For more information about Depending on the density of the timescale above the activity bars, you
the Update Progress dialog may not be able to position the data date line on the exact date and time
box, see “Estimating Progress
Automatically” on page 292. you want to use. In this case, enter the data date in the Update Progress
dialog box and have the Project Management module estimate progress as
of that date before you update individual activities.

The Project Management module spotlights

activities that should have started,
progressed, or finished between the
previous data date and the new data date in
the Gantt Chart.

Updating Progress for Spotlighted Activities

If activities are progressing on schedule, you may want to estimate
progress for all activities as of the new data date you specify. The Project
Management module can quickly estimate activity dates, percent complete
amounts, and remaining durations when you use the Update Progress
dialog box to update a project.
Estimating activity progress is a quick and convenient way to update your

project. The Project Management module estimates progress only for
those activities that were supposed to take place. Since progress can occur
out of sequence, you may need to update additional activities—especially
if you selected activities by dragging the data date line or by using the
Progress Spotlight feature. You should also review all incomplete
activities to make sure their remaining durations, actual dates, and percent
complete amounts are realistic. Once you spotlight activities, you can
quickly update the project as “on time.”
You can update projects automatically, update each activity manually, or

use both methods.
Estimate progress for all spotlighted activities Spotlight the

activities for which you want to estimate progress by dragging the data
date line or by using the Progress Spotlight feature. Choose Tools, Update
Progress. Select a new data date if the one shown is not accurate.
You can not drag the new data date line to a date that is before
the old data date line.
Choose to update all activities

scheduled to work during the
current update period or only
selected activities.

Click Apply. For each activity in the update, Project Management module
estimates percent complete amounts as of the data date, sets dates to actual
dates if they fall before the new data date, and estimates remaining
durations for activities that are not finished as of the data date. The Project
Management module also updates resource assignments based on each
activity’s revised percent complete and remaining duration while adhering
to Autocost Rules. In addition, the Project Management module takes into
account only the first price per unit in the Resource Dictionary, if more
than one price per unit for varying through dates exists, when updating
resource assignments.
If you estimate progress for selected activities that do not fall

within the update period, those activities will show no progress.
When spotlighting activities, you can only estimate progress—
percent complete, remaining duration, and so on—for activities
that are within the update period. If you manually update a
spotlighted activity then run Update Progress, the module
bypasses the activity and your changes are retained.

Estimating Progress Automatically

If you want to estimate progress as if activities are proceeding on
schedule, you can automatically calculate actual data based on activity,
resource, and/or expense data.
Estimating activity progress is a quick and convenient way to update your

project. The module estimates progress only for those activities that were
supposed to take place. Since progress can occur out of sequence, you may
need to update additional activities.
Set Auto Compute Actuals by activity If you set the Auto Compute
Actuals option by activity, the module determines actual dates, percent
complete amounts, remaining durations, and actual and remaining units
for all assigned resources. Choose, Project, Activities, and open a layout
that contains the activities you want to automatically update. Add a
column for the Auto Compute Actuals option and mark the checkbox next
to each activity.
You should not automatically compute actuals for those

activities from which you are collecting timesheet data from the
Timesheets module; otherwise, your timesheet data are
overwritten when you apply actuals.
Mark the Auto Compute Actuals The Auto Compute Actuals option is
checkbox for each activity you listed in the General section of Available
want to update automatically. Options in the Columns dialog box.

Set Auto Compute Actuals by resource If you set the Auto

Compute Actuals option by individual resource, the module automatically
updates actual units and remaining units using the planned units and the
activity’s percent complete. Choose Enterprise, Resources, and select the
resource that you want to automatically update when actuals are applied.
Click the Details tab and mark the Auto Compute Actuals checkbox.
To set Auto Compute

Actuals for expenses,
choose Project, Expenses,
then click the Costs tab
and mark the Auto
Compute Actuals
checkbox. Actual and
remaining costs and units
are updated.
Mark to automatically calculate

actuals for the selected resource.
You can not automatically compute actuals for those resources

from which you are collecting timesheet data from the
Timesheets module. If you choose to disable the timesheet
usage, your timesheet data are overwritten when you apply
actuals.

Setting Auto Compute Actuals

Setting the Auto Compute Actuals option to ON for an activity
automatically updates actual and remaining units/costs for all resources/
expenses assigned to the activity, regardless of whether the individual
resources/expenses have the Auto Compute Actuals option set to ON. If
you don’t want to update all assignments, turn OFF the activity’s Auto
Compute Actuals option and turn it ON only for those resources/expenses
you want updated automatically. For example, you may be collecting
actual data from some, but not all, resources through the Timesheets
module. For those resources from which you are collecting actual data,
turn OFF the activity- and resource-level Auto Compute Actuals option,
and turn it ON for those resources not reporting data through the
Timesheets module.
For more information on Update progress automatically Once you set the appropriate Auto
applying actuals, see Compute Actuals options, you can update progress automatically. Choose
“Interrupting Activity
Progress” on page 303. Tools, Apply Actuals.

Updating Using Timesheets

If employees are entering timesheet data using the Timesheets module,
you can update activities in the Project Management module based on
their timesheet entries. Use the Time Approval window to process
timesheets submitted by Timesheets users.
For information on Approve timesheets Choose Tools, Time Approval. Select the
configuring resources to use timesheet period you want to review. Depending on the timesheet approval
timesheets, see the
Administrator’s Guide. options set in the Timesheets tab in Admin Preferences, the Privilege field
contains Read Only, Project Manager, or Resource Manager. If timesheets
must be approved by both the project and resource managers, both
manager options will be available.
To filter timesheets by If you have approval privileges, select Project Manager or Resource
status, click the Display Manager in the Privilege field. Select the resource whose timesheet you
Options bar in the upper want to approve, then click Approve to update the project with activity
layout, then choose Filter progress or Reject to return a timesheet to a timesheets user.
By and choose a timesheet
status, such as Approved
or Not Submitted.
The security level corresponds to the privilege

type currently displayed in the Privilege field.
Select a
timesheet
period.
Lists each
resource with a
timesheet for
the selected
period
Displays the
timesheet
information for
the selected
resource and
timeperiod

You can choose the columns of information displayed for timesheets. In

the lower layout, click the Display Options bar. Choose Columns, then
choose one of the predefined sets of columns, or choose Customize to
select specific columns. You can also group and sort timesheet information
by activity, project, WBS, or role, and you can filter timesheets to display
all activities, only regular activities, or only overhead activities.
If a resource’s timesheet is unavailable, you can enter progress

for assigned activities.

Updating Activities Manually

You can also manually update In addition to updating activities automatically or using timesheets, you
future period unit values for can manually update data for each activity. Record actual dates, actual
assignments to activities. For
more information, refer to resource use, and costs incurred up to the data date or “time now.” There
“Managing Resource are different activity types, percent complete types, and duration types to
Assignments” on page 323. accommodate your scheduling requirements. You should set these
variables at the start of the project when you establish your update
procedures.
For more information on Set percent complete type An activity’s percent complete can be
defining activity and duration calculated according to activity duration, activity units, or a physical
types, see “Working with
Activities” on page 201. percent complete that you enter for each activity. Choose Project,
Activities, and display the Activity Details General tab or add a column
for Percent Complete Type in the Activity Table.
You can add a column to

review or modify the
Select the percent complete

type for the activity.
Select the percent complete type based on how you report progress for the
activity.
n Select Physical Percent Complete when activity progress can most
easily be reported based on personal judgment. Enter the activity
percent complete.
n Select Duration when activity progress can be easily reported in terms
of actual calendar days of work remaining.

Duration % Cmp = [(Planned Duration – Rem Duration) / Planned

Duration] x 100
n Select Units when progress is best reported based on the work effort
that has been accomplished and how much effort remains. Enter the
actual and remaining units.
Units % Cmp = [Actual Units / At Completion Units] x 100
Update actual dates Once an activity is underway, update its start and
finish dates and other status information. Choose Project, Activities and
display the Activity Details Status tab. If the activity has actually started,
mark the Started checkbox, then specify the actual start date in the Started
field. If the activity is complete, mark the Finished checkbox, then specify
the actual finish date in the Finished field.
To update any other Update activities with Duration percent complete type In the
activity data, such as Activities window, select the activity to update and display the Activity
remaining duration or Details Status tab. In the Remaining field, type the remaining number of
actual units, you must first workperiods needed to complete the selected activity. When you schedule
enter an actual start date or apply actuals, the actual duration is calculated as the total working time
for the activity.
from the actual start date to the current data date (for in-progress
activities) or to the actual finish date (for completed activities), using the
activity’s calendar.
If resources are assigned to the activity, each resource’s remaining units

are calculated as the activity’s remaining duration multiplied by its
remaining units per time.
Type a new remaining duration for the activity.
Update activities with Physical percent complete type In the

Activities window, select the activity to update and display the Activity
Details Status tab. Enter the physical percent complete and the remaining
duration for the activity. If resources are assigned, you must also update
each resource’s actual regular units.

Type the percent complete for the activity when

the percent complete type is Physical.
The module calculates the actual Type a new remaining duration for the activity.
duration for the activity when you apply
actuals or schedule the project.
Update activities with Units percent complete type If you are

updating activities with the Units percent complete type, most likely your
focus is on resource planning and scheduling. (You may also have
specified the activity type as Resource Dependent and the Duration type as
Fixed Units/Time.) You should update the labor units (and/or nonlabor
units) for the activity, rather than the duration. If multiple resources are
assigned to an activity, you should update each resource individually in the
Resources tab. In the Activities window, select the activity to update and
display the Activity Details Resources tab.
Actual Regular Units for a When you update activities manually, you should turn off Auto
resource indicate the Compute Actuals settings; otherwise, your changes are
actual amounts without overwritten when you apply actuals or calculate the schedule.
considering overtime units.
Actual Units include Actual
Regular Units plus Actual
Overtime Units.

Update the actual regular units and

the remaining units for each
resource.
When you update units in the The Labor Units amounts in the Status
Resources tab, the Started tab total the amounts for all resources
checkbox in the Status tab is assigned in the Resources tab.
automatically marked.
The units % complete is calculated from

the actual and at completion amounts.

How Activity Duration, Units, and Resource

Units/Time Are Synchronized
The module automatically synchronizes the duration, labor/nonlabor units,
and resource units/time for activities so that the following equation is
always true for each activity: Duration = Units / (Resource Units/Time).
Since three variables are involved (duration, units, and units/time), when
you change the value of one variable, the module must alter the value of a
second to balance the equation.
The Duration Type setting for an activity allows you to control how the
module synchronizes these variables when any one of the equation’s
variables are changed.
The following table lists the value that is automatically changed to

synchronize these variables whenever the value of one of the duration type
variables is changed.
When you When you When you When you add When you add
Activity change units, change the change units/ the first additional
duration type this value duration, this time, this value resource, this resources, this
changes... value changes... changes... value changes... value changes...
Fixed Units/ Duration Units Duration Units Duration

Time
Fixed Duration Units/Time Units Units Units Units
& Units/Time
Fixed Units Duration Units/Time Duration Units Duration
Fixed Duration Units/Time Units/Time Units Units Units/Time of
& Units each resource

Removing Progress from Activities

You can remove progress from an activity by removing the Actual Start
and/or Actual Finish from the activity. When the actual start or actual
finish is removed from an activity, the activity’s planned units and its
durations are recalculated. How the module calculates these changes is
based on the project setting in the Project Details, Calculations Tab.
Depending on the option selected, the module will either redistribute the
remaining work on the activity by setting the planned duration equal to the
remaining duration, and setting the planned units equal to the remaining
units; or, the module can distribute the planned work by setting the
remaining duration equal to the planned duration, and setting the
remaining units equal to the planned units.
For more information on the If the Link Planned and At Completion for Not Started Activities
Project Details, Calculations checkbox is cleared in the Resource Assignments section in the Projects
tab, refer to the Help.
window, Calculations tab, only activity and assignment dates will be
adjusted when progress is removed from an activity.
Choose to re-distribute the remaining

work or the planned work for activities,
when progress is removed.

Interrupting Activity Progress

At some point in the project, you may need to stop work on an activity for
a period of time. Indicate this interruption by specifying suspend and
resume dates in the Status tab of Activity Details.
Suspend an activity’s progress Display the Activity Details, Status

tab. In the Activity Table, select the activity you want to suspend, then
enter a Suspend date. When the activity resumes, enter a Resume date. The
activity must have an actual start date before you can enter a suspend date.
Record the Suspend date as the end of the last

day on which work occurred for the activity. When
work begins again, record the Resume date.
The module calculates an actual duration for all activities based on the
amount of time actually worked. The amount of time an activity’s progress
is suspended is considered nonworktime based on activity and resource
calendar definitions. You can use bar necking to graphically display the
suspended activity’s nonworktime. In the Bars dialog, Bar Settings tab,
select the Calendar nonwork time option under Bar Necking Settings. You
can also show suspend and resume dates as columns.
You can only enter suspend and resume dates on Task

Dependent and Resource Dependent activities. When you
enter a suspend or resume date, the activity is suspended or
resumed at the beginning of the specified day.

If you manually plan future period allocation for assignments to

activities, the Planned Units values you enter for an assignment
are not affected when you enter a suspend and resume date for
an activity; the values remain in the same future period buckets
in which you originally entered them. However, an assignment’s
manually-planned future period Remaining (Early) Units are
pushed out to the resume date once you schedule the project.

Applying Actuals
Once progress is recorded by approving timesheets, entering actual data,
and/or setting Auto Compute Actuals options, you must apply actuals.
Applying actuals schedules activities with progress and/or that have the
Auto Compute Actuals option set. When you apply actuals, you move the
data date or “time now.” The module schedules activities only within the
specified timescale (between the current data date and new data date) and
calculates progress for those activities that are set to automatically
calculate actuals.
Apply actuals Open the project or EPS node that contains the projects
to schedule. Choose Tools, Apply Actuals. If you opened an EPS node that
contains multiple projects, you can choose to use the same data date for all
projects and then specify the date, or you can choose to use a different data
date for each project and then select the dates.
Double-click to select a new data date for Click to update

the corresponding project. the schedule.
Choose to use a
different data date
for each project.
If you choose to always

recalculate, all activities
are treated as Fixed Units
and Fixed Units/Time.

Apply actuals as a service You can use Job Services to automatically

apply actuals to selected projects/EPS nodes at regularly scheduled
intervals. Choose Tools, Job Services, then click Add. Select Apply
Actuals in the Service Type field. Specify a number in the Job # field to
indicate the sequence in which the service should be performed, if more
than one service is listed. Type a brief description of the service in the Job
Name field. In the Status field, select Enabled to activate the apply actuals
service. You can suspend a service at any time by selecting Disabled in the
Status field. In the Run Job area on the Job Details tab, schedule when the
service should be run: every day at a specific time, or weekly, every two
weeks, or monthly on a day and time you specify.
Click the Job Options tab to

select the projects/EPS
nodes to which the job
service will apply actuals.
Mark the checkbox for the

project you want to use as
the Default Project. The
value of the activity
remaining duration setting
for each project is taken from
that of the Default Project.
Select the date up to which

you want to apply the open
project's/EPS node’s actuals.
You must have the appropriate access rights to set up job

services. The Job Service does not interact with the module
client when running jobs. All jobs are run on the server(s) on
which the Job Service is installed.

Storing Period Performance (Past Period Actuals)

You can track actual to date units and costs each time the schedule is
updated using store period performance. For example, if you increase the
actual this period by 50, the Project Management module increases the
actual to date by the same amount. At the end of each financial period,
reset the actual this period values of all activities and assignments to zero
by choosing Tools, Store Period Performance. Resetting the actual this
period values does not affect actual to date values; rather, it prepares you
to begin tracking new use for the current period.
Storing period performance records actuals for the selected financial

period along with earned value and planned value, so you can track
previous periods and compare current and future trends. If past period data
changes after you store period performance, you can edit the data in
financial period columns of the Activity Table and Resource Assignment
window.
Your projects may be scheduled to update every two weeks, monthly, or

even quarterly. To track actual costs and progress recorded, update your
schedule at the times established in the Financial Periods dictionary, then
store period performance at the end of the update period and before the
start of the next schedule update.
To run Store Period Performance, you must be assigned the

Store Period Performance and Add/Edit Project Activities
Except Relationships project privileges.
For organizations using Primavera ProjectLink, you cannot run

Store Period Performance on Microsoft Project (MSP)-
managed projects in the Project Management module. For
more information on Primavera ProjectLink, click the Help
button on any ProjectLink screen to access the help in
Microsoft Project (available only if Primavera ProjectLink is
installed).
Link actual and actual this period units and cost To store period
performance on a project, the actual and actual this period units and cost
must be linked. Choose Enterprise, Projects. Click the Layout Options bar
and choose Show On Bottom, Project Details. In the Project Details,
Calculations tab, mark the Link Actual and Actual This Period Units and
Cost option.

For details on defining Post actual amounts for the period Choose Tools, Store Period
financial periods in the Performance. The Store Period Performance dialog box lists all open
Financial Periods dictionary,
refer to Appendix C of the projects. For each project you want to store period performance for,
Primavera Administrator’s double-click in the Financial Period column to select a financial period.
Guide. The Select Financial Period dialog box lists all financial periods
predefined in the Financial Periods dictionary. If you do not want to store
period performance for a project, remove the mark from the corresponding
checkbox in the Selected column.
If any open project is read-only or checked out, the Store Period

Performance menu option is disabled.
Click to run Store Period

Performance for the
selected periods.
Double-click in the
Financial Period
column to select a
financial period.
Unmark the checkbox if you do not want to

store period performance for that project.
Click Store Now. The Project Management module stores the actual this
period values in the selected financial period for each project (regardless
of the data date or actual start dates), then sets actual this period values to
zero in anticipation of the next schedule update period.

You can store period performance for the same financial period
in a project more than once. When you store period
performance after it has already been stored for a period, the
module appends any new values to the period and does not
overwrite existing values (except for earned value and planned
value data which is calculated as usual; the new earned value
and planned value data overwrites the existing period data).
Also, you do not have to store period performance sequentially
(i.e., you can skip periods).
View or edit past period actual data You can view and edit past
period actual data for each financial period. To control the range of
financial periods that are available for display as columns choose Edit,
User Preferences. In the Application tab, Columns section, enter a range
of financial periods.
If your resources use the Timesheets module to enter time, you

should not edit past period actuals in the Project Management
module.
For more information on In the Activity Table, you can display columns for actual this period labor
displaying columns, refer to and nonlabor units; labor, nonlabor, material, expense, earned value, and
“Modifying Columns” on
page 428. planned value cost; and, earned value and planned value labor units. In the
Resource Assignments window and the Activity Details, Resources tab,
you can display columns for actual units and cost. The available financial
period columns are listed in the Financial Period Value section. Once you
display a financial period column, you can edit the data in any field of that
column.

Available financial period

columns in the Activity Table
When you create a financial

period, the default name is
YYYY-MM-DD (e.g., 2004-04-
01). The Columns dialog box
lists financial period columns
alphanumerically rather than in
the order listed in the Financial
Periods dictionary. To ensure
the proper order, you should
use the default name or add a Available financial period columns in the
Resource Assignments window and the
letter or number to the
Resources tab of Activity Details
beginning of the name (e.g., 1
Fiscal Month, 2 Fiscal Month,
etc.)
You cannot edit past period actual data for activities that do not
have an actual start date. You can edit past period actual data
for activities that have resource assignments in the Resource
Assignments window or in the Resources tab of Activity Details.
You can also view past period actual spreads in the Activity Usage Profile/
Spreadsheet, Resource Usage Profile/Spreadsheet, Tracking window (in
the Project Gantt/Profile and Resource Analysis layouts), time-distributed
reports, and the Primavera Web application.

Scheduling Projects
The module employs the Critical Path Method (CPM) scheduling
technique to calculate project schedules. CPM uses activity durations and
relationships between activities to calculate project dates. This process is
performed in two phases or “passes” over the activities in a project.
The first pass or “forward pass” calculates the early start and early finish
dates for each activity, based on the start or finish dates of predecessor
activities as well as the duration of the activity itself.
The second pass or “backward pass” calculates the late start and late finish
dates for each activity, based on the start or finish dates of successor
activities as well as the duration of the activity itself. The free float and
total float for each activity are recalculated.
You can schedule one project or all projects in a particular EPS

node.
To display and/or use the Schedule a project Open an individual project or the node that
default scheduling settings, contains the projects you want to schedule. Choose Tools, Schedule. The
click Default in the Schedule dialog box lists the number of projects to be scheduled, along
Schedule Options dialog with the earliest data date of all open projects. You can change the data
box. dates for individual projects when you apply actuals (choose Tools, Apply
Actuals.)
For more information on A forecast start date is shown if you manually changed the start date of a
additional scheduling options, project by dragging the project bar to a new timeframe in Primavera’s Web
refer to the Help.
Portfolio Management application or in Tracking layouts. You can choose
to use this new date instead of the project’s planned date and current data
date when you schedule the project. Mark the Set Data Date and Planned
Start to Project Forecast Start During Scheduling option. If multiple
projects are open, each with a project forecast start date, the forecasted
start date is used from each project during scheduling.

schedule Microsoft Project (MSP)-managed projects in the
Project Management module. For more information on
Primavera ProjectLink, refer to the Primavera ProjectLink Help
in Microsoft Project (available only if Primavera ProjectLink is
installed).You can access the help by clicking the Help button
on any ProjectLink screen.

If more than one project is open,

this changes to Earliest Data Date.
Mark to record your scheduling results

in a log file, then click the Browse
button to specify a filename and
location.
Do not mark this option if you

want to preserve activity dates
dependent on external
relationships to projects that
are not in the same database
as the project being updated.
Mark to level resources while

scheduling the open projects.
Mark to recalculate
resource and role
assignment costs after you
schedule the project(s).
Click the Advanced tab to

specify additional options
for determining critical
activities based on multiple
float paths.

Automatic scheduling and leveling You can also choose to

calculate the schedule each time activity data change, rescheduling
activities that have changed significantly and rescheduling any activities
affected by the change to the first activity. Mark the Schedule
Automatically When a Change Affects Dates checkbox in the General tab
of the Schedule Options dialog box to recalculate the schedule each time a
significant change is made to an activity, relationship, or resource. If you
turn off automatic scheduling, changes to activities will not be reflected in
the schedule until you calculate the schedule again. You can also choose to
level resources during automatic scheduling. To enable leveling of
resources, mark the Level Resources During Scheduling checkbox in the
General tab of the Schedule Options dialog box.
After the forward pass, if a Must Finish by Date is specified in

the Project Details Dates tab, the backward pass is calculated
using the must finish by date rather than the schedule end date.
Schedule project data as a service Choose Tools, Job Services,

then click Add. Select Schedule in the Service Type field. Specify a
number in the Job # field to indicate the sequence in which the service
should be performed, if more than one service is listed. Type a brief
description of the service in the Job Name field. In the Status field, select
Enabled to activate the scheduling service. You can suspend a service at
any time by selecting Disabled in the Status field. In the Run Job area on
the Job Details tab, schedule when the service should be run: every day at
a specific time, or weekly, every two weeks, or monthly on a day and time
you specify.

Click the Job Options tab to

select the projects/EPS
nodes the job service will
schedule.
In this example, projects are

scheduled each week on
Friday.
Mark to log information about
the service to a file you
specify.


Types of Activity Dates

Date Field Definition
Start The current start date of the activity. Set to the remaining start date until the
activity is started, then set to the actual start date. An ‘A’ after the Start value
indicates that it is the Actual Start; an ‘*’ indicates that a Start constraint is
applied to the activity.
Finish The current finish date of the activity. Set to the activity planned finish date while
the activity is not started, the remaining finish date while the activity is in
progress, and the actual finish date once the activity is completed. An ‘A’ after the
Finish value indicates that it is the Actual Finish; an ‘*’ indicates that a Finish
constraint is applied to the activity.
Actual Start The date on which the activity actually started.
Actual Finish The date on which the activity actually finished.
Early Start The earliest possible date the remaining work for the activity can begin. This date
is calculated by the project scheduler based on activity relationships, schedule
constraints, and resource availability.
Early Finish The earliest possible date the activity can finish. This date is calculated by the
project scheduler based on activity relationships, schedule constraints, and
resource availability.
Late Start The latest possible date the remaining work for the activity must begin without
delaying the project finish date. This date is calculated by the project scheduler
based on activity relationships, schedule constraints, and resource availability.
Late Finish The latest possible date the activity must finish without delaying the project finish
date. This date is calculated by the project scheduler based on activity relation-
ships, schedule constraints, and resource availability.
Planned Start The date the activity is scheduled to begin. This date is set equal to the early start
date by the project scheduler but can be updated manually by the project manager.
This date is not changed by the project scheduler once you apply an Actual Start
date.
Planned Finish The date the activity is scheduled to finish. This date is set equal to the early
finish date by the project scheduler but can be updated manually by the user. This
date is not changed by the project scheduler once you apply an Actual Finish date.
Remaining Start The date the remaining work for the activity is scheduled to begin. This date is
calculated by the project scheduler but can be updated manually by the user.
Before the activity is started, the Remaining Start is the same as the Planned Start.
This is the start date that Timesheets users follow.
Remaining Finish The date the remaining work for the activity is scheduled to finish. This date is
calculated by the project scheduler but can be updated manually by the user.
Before the activity is started, the Remaining Finish is the same as the Planned
Finish. This is the finish date that Timesheets users follow.

Date Field Definition

Expected Finish The date the activity is expected to finish. Typically, this date is entered in the
Timesheets module by the primary resource. When scheduling your projects, you
may choose to use or ignore the Expected Finish dates.
Constraint Date The date for which the activity’s constraint applies. Depending on the constraint
type, this date could be a start or finish date. For example, for a Finish On
constraint, the constraint date is the date on which the activity must finish. If the
activity does not have a constraint, this field will be empty.
External Early For an activity with an external relationship, the date the external relationship was
Start scheduled to finish. This date may be used to calculate the start date of the current
activity during scheduling. This field is populated on import when an external
relationship is lost.
External Late For an activity with an external relationship, the late start date of the lost external
Finish relationship. This date may be used to calculate the finish date of the current
activity during scheduling. This field is populated on import when a successor
relationship is lost.
Suspend Date The date on which an activity’s progress was suspended.
Resume Date The date on which an activity’s progress was resumed.

Leveling Resources
Level resources in your projects to ensure that resource demand does not
exceed resource availability. Resource leveling is an automated process
that changes the start of certain activities. During leveling, the resource
requirements of all scheduled activities are compared to the maximum
quantity available at the time of leveling. An activity is delayed if too few
resources are available at any time during the activity’s duration.
Expenses are not included You can select the resources to be leveled, and you can add leveling
when leveling resources. priorities that specify which project or activity is leveled first when a
conflict occurs.
The maximum amount of work that a resource is capable of

performing for a given timeperiod is defined by the resource’s
Max Units/Time in the Units & Prices tab in the Resources
window.
For organizations using Primavera ProjectLink, you cannot level

resources for Microsoft Project (MSP)-managed projects in the
Project Management module. For more information on
Primavera ProjectLink, refer to the Primavera ProjectLink Help
in Microsoft Project (available only if Primavera ProjectLink is
installed). You can access the help by clicking the Help button
on any ProjectLink screen.
Level resources Open the projects that contain the resources you want
to level. Choose Tools, Level Resources. You can set several resource
leveling options to meet your requirements. Click Level after you make
your selections.

Mark to automatically level resources each time

Mark to recalculate all you schedule a project.
resource and role
assignment costs after you
level resources.
Mark to level all resources,

or clear and click Select
Resources to specify the
resources to be leveled.
Mark to delay activities with

resource conflicts only up to
their late finish dates, then
type the minimum amount
of total float and specify the
maximum percentage by
which the resource
availability can be
increased.
For example, if resources are assigned across multiple projects, you can
determine whether to consider the resource assignments in other projects
when leveling. A leveling priority number is assigned to each project when
you add the project (in the Projects Details General tab.) In the Level
Resources dialog box, mark the checkbox to consider assignments in other
projects and specify the priority value you want to consider.
For more information on If you mark the Preserve Scheduled Early and Late Dates checkbox, the
leveling options, refer to the project’s current early dates are retained before leveling. To review the
Help.
leveled early dates, choose to show the Remaining Start/Finish dates or the
Start and Finish dates. In addition, when you preserve these dates, the
module only forward-levels the schedule, which means that the early dates
of activities from the start to the finish of the project are scheduled.

When preserving early and late dates, shows Shows leveled dates
early dates before leveling
Shows leveled dates
If you clear the Preserve Scheduled Early and Late Dates checkbox, the
module also performs backward leveling. Backward leveling schedules
activities to occur as late as possible without delaying the project finish.
The module reverses the leveling process, beginning at the project’s late
finish and working towards the beginning of the project. If insufficient
resources are available to schedule an activity on its late dates, the activity
is advanced to an earlier date. When the schedule is leveled forward and
backward (by clearing the checkbox to preserve scheduled early and late
dates), the project’s early and late start/finish dates are updated.
Prioritize activities during leveling To handle scheduling conflicts

that may occur during leveling, you can add priorities that specify which
project or activity is leveled first. In the Leveling Priorities section of the
Level Resources dialog box, click Add to add a blank leveling priority to
the list of leveling priorities. Select the type of priority, then select the
order in which the item specified in the priority will be leveled. Add
priorities in the order in which you want the module to consider them.
To remove a priority, select it, then click Remove. To change the

information specified for a priority, double-click the Field Name column,
then select a new field name and/or double-click the Sort Order column,
then select Ascending or Descending.

Leveling priority definitions The following table defines several of

the priority and order options you can specify for leveling resources.
Priority Ascending (Lower) Descending (Higher)
Activity Leveling Levels higher priority Levels lower priority

Priority activities first activities first
Project Leveling Levels higher priority Levels lower priority
Priority projects first projects first
Planned Start Levels activities with earlier Levels activities with later
planned start dates first planned start dates first
Planned Finish Levels activities with earlier Levels activities with later
planned finish dates first planned finish dates first
Planned Duration Levels activities with shorter Levels activities with longer
planned durations first planned durations first
Remaining Duration Levels activities with shorter Levels activities with longer
remaining durations first remaining durations first
Total Float * Levels activities with less Levels activities with more
total float or more critical total float or less critical
activities first activities first
Early Start Levels activities with earlier, Levels activities with later,
early start dates first early start dates first
Early Finish Levels activities with earlier, Levels activities with later,
early finish dates first early finish dates first
Late Start Levels activities with earlier, Levels activities with later,
late start dates first late start dates first
Late Finish Levels activities with earlier, Levels activities with later,
late finish dates first late finish dates first
* Indicates that the priority is available only if you mark the Level Resources
Only Within Activity Total Float checkbox in the Level Resources dialog box.

Recalculating Resource and Role Assignment Costs

When changes are made to resource or role cost information, you are
prompted to recalculate costs, so that the correct values display for activity
costs in all open projects. The Recalculate Assignment Costs command
ensures that project costs reflect any updated price per time values on
activities.
For example, you should recalculate costs if you change a resource’s price/
time and the resource is assigned to activities, or if a resource/role has
multiple prices and the activity dates change, because the activity cost
calculation is based upon the activity start date.
In some cases, you will be prompted to recalculate costs. You can also run
this command from the Tools menu, if you have access rights to View
Resource and Role Costs.
Recalculate Assignment Costs is disabled if you do not have

the View Resource and Role Costs global privilege.
Recalculate assignment costs To update assignment costs for

activities in an open project, choose Tools, Recalculate Assignment Costs.
Click Recalculate.
Choosing this command recalculates activity costs in all open

projects.
Mark this to
synchronize overtime
factors.
The recalculate utility ignores any assignment with a Rate

Type set to Custom. The customized, manually entered price
is not overwritten when you synchronize prices.

In the Resources window, Details tab, you must mark the setting to
Calculate Costs from Units to recalculate assignment costs. In the
Resources window, choose View, Details, then click the Details tab.
Calculate cost when using multiple resource rates The total

cost for a resource assignment considers any changes in the price/unit over
the course of the activity. Enter a price/unit for each rate type (defined in
Admin Preferences, Rate Types tab) in the Units & Prices tab in the
Resources window. Select the rate type you want this assignment to use in
the Resources tab in Activity Details. The cost of the resource assignment
is based on the rate type assigned to the resource assignment.
For more information on For example, a three-day activity has a resource that works 8 hours a day.
using multiple resource rates The price/unit for the resource for the first two days is $10/hour, and the
and rate types, see the Help.
price/unit for the third day is $30/hour. The cost of the first 16 hours of the
resource assignment is $160 (16 hours x $10.00/hour). The cost for the last
8 hours of the resource assignment is $240 (8 hours x $30.00/hour). The
total cost for the resource is $400.00 ($160.00 + $240.00).
If you have resources with shifts that use timesheets, costs

are calculated using the price of the first shift for the resource.

Managing Resource Assignments

Use the Resource Assignments window to add and view all resource
assignments, grouped by resource, for all currently open projects. In the
Resource Usage spreadsheet, you can display resource cost and quantity
information and manually update future period assignment data.
Display the Resource Usage Spreadsheet Choose View, Resource

Usage Spreadsheet, or click the Display Options bar, then choose
Resource Usage Spreadsheet.
When grouped by
Resource, click to
assign an activity to the
resource.
Use the details tabs to

view or assign resource
assignment properties
such as cost account,
price/unit, rate type, and
planning information.
Group and sort resource assignments Choose Project, Resource

Assignments, then choose View, Group and Sort By, or click the Display
Options bar and choose Group and Sort By. Choose one of the predefined
group and sort options, or choose Customize.
You can manually plan future Manually update assignment data In the Resource Usage
period resource allocation for Spreadsheet (in both the Activities and Resource Assignments windows),
an assignment before or after
progress has started on the you can manually update values for an assignment’s Planned Units and
assignment. For detailed Remaining (Early) Units. For example, if work on an activity is not
instructions on manually proceeding according to plan, and the future work planned to be
planning/updating future
period assignment buckets, performed on an activity cannot be accurately captured by applying a
refer to “Manually Planning resource curve to the assignment, you can manually update the
Future Period Assignments” assignment’s Planned Units and/or Remaining (Early) Units to reflect the
on page 224, then refer to the
Help for detailed guidelines new plan.
to consider.

Summarizing Projects 325
Summarizing Projects
You can summarize and save resource
In this chapter quantity, cost, and/or custom user field
information from an enterprise project
Setting Summarization Options
structure (EPS) node or a project’s work
Summarizing Project Data
breakdown structure (WBS). You can then
view summary data such as original budget
and other cost values at various levels of the
EPS in the Project Management module, as
well as in the Primavera Web application.
This chapter explains how to summarize data

“on-the-fly” or at a regularly scheduled
interval you specify.

Setting Summarization Options

Before you can summarize information, you need to specify which
projects should be summarized and the work breakdown structure (WBS)
level to which data should be summarized. For example, you may want to
analyze only specific projects in the enterprise project structure (EPS) or
concentrate on information that resides at a particular WBS level or below.
Administrators can further Set summarization options Choose Enterprise, Projects. Select the
define summarization options project you want to summarize. Click the Settings tab in Project Details. In
by editing registry settings.
Refer to the Administrator’s the Summarize to WBS Level field, specify the maximum WBS level to
Guide for more information. which the project can be summarized.
This number
indicates the level to
which others will be
able to display within
the Primavera Web
application.
The Last Summarized On field displays the date when data were last
summarized for the project.
Mark the Contains Summarized Data Only checkbox if you plan

to link to project data in other applications.
The module summarizes two sets of project data: past period actuals and
actual to date. You can select the set of data you want to view by choosing
Edit, User Preferences. In the Resource Analysis tab, choose to display
actual and earned value units and cost as linear (for actual to date values)
or past period performance (for past period actual values).

Summarizing Project Data

You can summarize data at any time, using the Tools, Summarize
command, or you can use the Job Services option to schedule a time when
data are regularly summarized. For example, set the module to summarize
every Monday at 8:00 a.m. In each case, project data are summarized
according to the settings you specify and the new summary values are
saved to the project database, overwriting any previously calculated
summary data.
You can view and report on summarized data in the Project Management
module and the Primavera Web application.
You can also summarize a Summarize project data manually Choose Enterprise, Projects.
single project or a specific Choose Tools, Summarize, then select to summarize the open projects in
group of projects. Select the current view, all projects in the EPS (includes both open and closed
the projects you want to projects but excludes summary only projects), or summary-only projects
summarize in the EPS, (those projects for which the Contains Summarized Data Only checkbox is
then right-click and choose
marked in the Project Details Settings tab).
Summarize Project.
Click Yes.
If you choose to summarize all projects, data are also
summarized for each EPS node after the project summaries
are saved to the database.
Summarize project data as a non-distributed job service

Choose Tools, Job Services, then click Add. Select Summarize in the
Service Type field. Specify a number in the Job # field to indicate the
sequence in which the service should be performed, if more than one
service is listed. Type a brief description of the service in the Job Name
field. In the Status field, select Enabled to activate the summary service.
You can suspend a service at any time by selecting Disabled in the Status
field. In the Run Job area on the Job Details tab, schedule when the service
should be run: every day at a specific time, or weekly, every two weeks, or
monthly on a day and time you specify.

In this example, projects are

scheduled and then
summarized at the end of
each two-week period.
Mark to summarize
projects immediately
after they are scheduled.
Mark to log information

about the service to a file
you specify.

For more information on the Summarize project data as a distributed job service Primavera
Primavera Distributed Job distributed job services (PDJS) enable large summarization jobs to be
Service, refer to the
Administrator’s Guide. separated into smaller jobs by running the services concurrently on
multiple servers. For example, you can summarize an EPS with four EPS
nodes (projects) in two, three, or four separate summarization jobs.

Refer to the following two figures. The first figure shows that Job #1 is
summarizing 2 EPS nodes (Custom and Specs). The second figure shows
that Job #2 is summarizing two different EPS nodes (Assembly and
Facilities). These EPS nodes are all part of the same EPS.
Job 1 is summarizing the

data in two EPS nodes of
a single project, Custom
and Specs.

Job 2 is also
summarizing the data
in two EPS nodes of a
single project,
Assembly and
Facilities.
The PDJS will run Job #1 and Job #2 concurrently on different PDJS
servers. When Job #2 is complete, the PDJS will summarize the
enterprise-level data as a separate job.
Before running the PDJS, consult your administrator to confirm

that the PDJS has been installed and configured on your
network.
When running concurrent jobs, do not mix Summary jobs with

non-Summary jobs. If you mix different job types with Summary
jobs, the PDJS will run the jobs in sequence (not concurrently).
As a result, the enterprise-level data will not be summarized.

To set up a PDJS summarization job, choose Tools, Job Services, then

click Add. Select Summarize in the Service Type field. Specify a number
in the Job # field to indicate the sequence in which the service should be
performed. Type a brief description of the service in the Job Name field. In
the Status field, select Enabled to activate the summary service. You can
suspend a service at any time by selecting Disabled in the Status field. For
Job 1, in the Run Job area on the Job Details tab, schedule when the
service should be run: every day at a specific time, or weekly, every two
weeks, or monthly on a day and time you specify. For each subsequent job,
in the Run Job area on the Job Details tab, select the option to run the job
Immediately after previous job# (as shown in the following figure). For
each job, in the Job Options tab, assign the EPS nodes you want to include
in the job (as shown in the previous figures).
Ideally, the number of concurrent jobs running at any one time

should not exceed the number of machines configured to run
the PDJS (Controller and PDJS servers). There is no restriction
on the maximum number of concurrent jobs allowed to run,
however there may be performance issues if the number of
concurrent jobs exceeds the number of machines.

How Data Is Summarized

You can summarize data for all projects in the EPS. Summary information
is calculated and displayed for costs and quantities, custom user fields,
dates, durations, float, progress, baselines, variances, and special cases for
activity, resource, and cost data. The following paragraphs explain how
the module summarizes specific data.
Costs and quantities Cost and quantity data items, such as planned
cost and planned quantity, are totaled by adding the values for each
activity in the summary.
User-defined fields User-defined fields are summarized according to

type. For example, items representing start dates show the earliest start
date, and items for finish dates show the latest finish dates. A numeric
user-defined field is totaled for the summarized activities. A text-based
user-defined field displays a blank unless values for all activities are the
same.
Dates If you display early dates, the earliest early (or actual) start date
and the latest early (or actual) finish date are shown. The same rules apply
for late dates and baseline early and late dates.
Durations Planned and remaining duration values are summarized. For

activities with no progress, the planned and remaining durations are the
number of workperiods between the earliest early start and the latest early
finish dates.
If the summary activity has an actual start date, planned duration is

calculated from the actual start date to the latest early finish date; the
remaining duration is calculated from the “internal” early start date to the
latest early finish date.
(The module keeps track of the early start date for each activity, even
when you assign an actual start date; this is referred to as the “internal”
early start date of the remaining duration.)
If the summary activity is 100 percent complete, planned duration is

calculated as the difference between the actual start date and the actual
finish date; the remaining duration is zero.

Float You can base total float of the summarized data on the start dates,
finish dates, or most critical dates. To set this option, choose Tools,
Schedule, Options. On the General tab, select how you want to calculate
total float in the Compute Total Float As field. On the Advanced tab,
choose how you want to calculate multiple float paths.
Progress The simplest measure of percent complete uses duration to

compare the amount of time remaining to complete the activities to their
planned duration. In this case, the following ratio is used for each group:
[(Summary Current Planned Duration – Summary Remaining Duration) /
Summary Current Planned Duration] x 100
Baseline data, comparison data, and variances You classify
each baseline, comparison, or variance data item as either a date or a
duration data item. See the “Dates” and “Durations” sections on the
previous page.

Managing Risks 335
Managing Risks
The integrated risk management feature
In this chapter enables you to identify, categorize, and
prioritize potential risks associated with
Adding Risks
specific work breakdown structure (WBS)
Calculating Exposure Values
elements and resources. You can also create
Calculating a Risk’s Impact
risk control plans and assign a probability of
Creating and Deleting Risk Types
occurrence and an organizational breakdown
Customizing Risk Layouts
structure (OBS) element to each risk. A risk’s
assigned OBS element is the person or project
manager responsible for managing the risk.
This chapter describes how to add risks and

risk types, calculate a risk’s impact, and
customize how you view risks.

Adding Risks
Identify a risk by entering its name, status, risk type, priority level, and
date it was identified. You can also specify which WBS element and
resources the risk will affect and the OBS element responsible for
controlling the risk.
Add a risk Choose Project, Risks. Click the Display Options bar, then
click Risk Details (the checkmark next to the command should be
marked). Click Add, then click the General tab. Type the risk’s name, then
select the WBS element and the resource that the risk will affect. If you do
not specify a resource, the module considers all resources in the selected
WBS.
Select the manager responsible for controlling the risk. Responsible

managers are defined in the organizational breakdown structure (OBS).
Select the type of risk you are creating, and specify the priority level to
assign to the risk.
To specify a risk identification date other

than the current date, click the Browse
button and select a new date.

Managing Risks 337
Add a risk description and control plan Click the Description tab,
then type a description of the risk. To enter a description of the risk’s
control plan, click the Control tab, then type the description in the Risk
Control Plan field. You can use HTML editing features in both tabs; these
features include formatting text, inserting pictures, copying and pasting
information from other document files (while retaining formatting), and
adding hyperlinks.

Calculating Exposure Values

The module uses a risk’s probability of occurrence, date of potential
impact, and resource unit and expense estimates to calculate a risk’s net
exposure values. These exposure values are then used to determine the
risk’s impact on the project’s cost, float, and finish date. The current
project data are not changed.
Calculate a risk’s exposure values Choose Project, Risks. Click the

Display Options bar, then click Risk Details (the checkmark next to the
command should be marked). Select the risk whose exposure values you
want to calculate, then click the Impact tab. In the Impact area, specify the
“as-of” impact date. The module considers only those activities for the
selected WBS/resource that are scheduled to start on or after the impact
date. Type the estimated number of labor and nonlabor, or material, time
units and the estimated total cost of expenses the risk will incur, if the risk
occurs. Type or select a percent estimate of the probability that the risk
will occur. The module calculates and displays the risk’s exposure values
as Exposure = Impact x Probability.
This number is calculated using the

WBS, resource, and date.
The Current fields contain the remaining number of labor

and nonlabor, or material, time units and the current
remaining expenses, for the WBS and resource
assigned to the currently selected risk.

Managing Risks 339
Calculating a Risk’s Impact

The module uses the top-down estimation method to apply a risk’s
exposure values and calculate impact on a project’s schedule, cost, and
duration. The module applies these values to activities that finish on or
after the risk’s impact date. This does not include completed, locked, or
milestone activities.
When applying exposure values, the module uses any WBS elements and
activities the WBS contains, along with resource assignments and
information (such as price and availability), then schedules the project
according to your current scheduling preferences.
You must first determine a risk’s exposure values on the Impact

tab before calculating a risk’s impact.
Calculate a risk’s impact Schedule the project whose risk impact you
want to calculate, then choose Project, Risks. Select the risk whose impact
you want to calculate. Click Calc Impact in the command bar. The module
applies any resource units, then schedules the project using the current
scheduling options.
Use this dialog box to view the The number of activities the risk will
selected risk’s effect on the affect. This is not the total number of
project’s schedule cost and activities contained in the WBS element.
duration.

Creating and Deleting Risk Types

You can create risk types, or categories of possible risks, that you can
assign to risks in any project. You can use risk types to classify and
standardize risks for all projects.
Add a new risk type Choose Admin, Admin Categories. Click the
Risk Types tab, then click Add. Type the name of the new risk type.
To move a risk type up or down in the list,

select it, then click Shift Up or Shift Down.
Delete a risk type Choose Admin, Admin Categories. Click the Risk
Types tab, then select a risk. Click Delete. Click Yes to delete it.

Managing Risks 341
Customizing Risk Layouts

Use the Columns dialog box to specify which columns you want to display
in the current risk spreadsheet layout.
Customize risk layout columns In the Project Risks window, click

the Display Options bar and choose Columns, Customize.
Double-arrow buttons add/remove all available Click to change the column

columns in the current layout; single-arrow buttons title of a selected item.
add/remove selected items in the current layout.
Modify the columns shown in the risk layout by clicking the right/left
arrow buttons to move data items between the Available Options and
Selected Options columns.
Items listed in the Selected Options column will appear in the current
layout when you click OK. Click Apply to see your changes without
closing the dialog box.
Filter, group, and sort risk layouts You can select the risks you
want to view and specify how you want to display them, and you can
restrict which risks you view. In the Project Risks window, click the
Display Options bar. Choose Filter By or Group and Sort By and the
option that best describes how you want to view risks.

This risk layout is grouped

by WBS element and
filtered by open risks for
quick analysis.

Project Issues and Thresholds 343
Project Issues and Thresholds

Issues are known problems within a project
In this chapter plan that require attention or corrective action.
You can manually create issues and you can
Adding Issues
generate issues automatically by defining
Assigning Tracking Layouts to
Issues project thresholds. You can associate these
Using the Issue Navigator issues with work breakdown structure (WBS)
Adding Thresholds elements, activities, or resources.
Threshold Parameter Definitions
Create a threshold by selecting a parameter,
Monitoring Thresholds
such as start date variance; setting a lower
Assigning Tracking Layouts to
Thresholds threshold value for the threshold, such as –2
days; and applying the threshold to a specific
WBS element, or area, of your project plan.
After you define a threshold, the module
monitors and generates the threshold’s issues
for you.
This chapter describes how to add issues and

thresholds and use them to help you manage
your projects.

Adding Issues
Issues identify problems within a schedule that must be addressed before
the project can be completed. Issues can be added manually to projects, or
you can use thresholds to generate them automatically. (See “Adding
Thresholds” on page 350.) Once you create an issue, you can assign a
priority level, tracking layout, and responsible manager to it. You can also
e-mail the issue’s details, along with your comments, to any member of
the project’s staff. Use the Issue Navigator feature to quickly view all the
information associated with an issue.
Add an issue Choose Project, Issues. If Issue Details are not displayed,
click the Display Options bar, then choose Issue Details (the box next to
the command should be marked). Click Add, then click the General tab.
Type the issue’s name. Select the manager responsible for addressing the
issue. Responsible managers are defined in the organizational breakdown
structure (OBS). Click the Browse button in the Tracking Layout field to
select the layout that best displays the issue. The system date is
automatically entered in the Date Identified field. Click the Browse button
if you need to select a different date. Your user name is automatically
entered in the Identified By field. You can type another user name of the
individual who identified the issue. If the issue was generated by running
the threshold monitor, Monitor is displayed.

You can group and sort

issues by various detail
items, such as project, EPS,
or WBS. Click the Display
Options bar, then choose
Group and Sort By.
Use the Date Identified and Resolution Date The issue status is
fields to track how long an issue is open and how automatically set to
long it took to resolve closed issues. Open; the priority is set
to Normal. Change
these fields as required.
You can only modify fields Define an issue’s details and add notes Choose Project, Issues.
in the Details tab for issues Click the Details tab, then type the issue’s actual (numeric) value in the
you have added; these Actual Value field. To associate the issue with a WBS element other than
fields are Read-Only if the the root WBS element, click the Browse button in the Applies to WBS
issues are generated by a field and select the element. You can also associate the issue with a
monitoring threshold.
resource or activity.
To enter additional information about the issue, click the Notes tab, then
type your notes. You can use HTML editing features, which include
If the threshold monitor generated the selected issue, the

parameter name is listed in the Threshold Parameter field in the
Details tab.

To change the list of Send e-mail about an issue In the Project Issues window or the Issue
recipients, click the Display Navigator dialog box (choose Tools, Issue Navigator), select the issue
Options bar on the Assign about which you want to send e-mail, then click Notify. To specify the
Recipients dialog box, and individuals to whom you want to send e-mail, click Add. Choose Select
choose Resources or Recipient from a Dialog to select a recipient from a list of resources or
Users.
users, click OK, then select a recipient from the Assign Recipients dialog
box. Click the Assign button. To remove a recipient from the recipient list,
select the recipient, then click Remove.
Click to add recipients to the

e-mail, then choose how you
want to select recipients.
To type a recipient’s e-mail address directly, choose Manually

Add a New Recipient, click OK, then type the recipient’s
information.
Type a subject for the e-mail, then type any additional comments about the
issue in the Contents area. Click Send All.

View and add to an issue’s history Choose Project, Issues. Select

an issue, then click Issue History.
Type any additional

comments about the
issue, then click Add.

Assigning Tracking Layouts to Issues

Assign a tracking layout to an issue to graphically display the information
surrounding the issue, then use the Issue Navigator (choose Tools, Issue
Navigator) to open this layout in the Tracking window.
Assign a tracking layout to an issue Choose Project, Issues. If

Issue Details are not displayed, click the Display Options bar, then choose
Issue Details (the box next to the command should be marked). Select the
issue to which you want to assign a tracking layout. Click the General tab,
then click the Browse button in the Tracking Layout field. Select the
tracking layout you want to assign, then click the Select button.
This tracking layout shows

total costs over time.

Using the Issue Navigator

The Issue Navigator helps to provide you with the information you need
regarding a particular issue so you can quickly resolve it. Select an issue
that you added or was generated automatically and choose to jump to its
associated tracking layout; activity, WBS, or resource assignment; or more
details. You can also send an e-mail to notify other users about the issue.
Use the Issue Navigator Choose Tools, Issue Navigator. Select the
issue whose details you want to view, click the appropriate button to
display the information you want to view about the issue. For example,
click Tracking to immediately display the Tracking window already open
to the issue’s associated tracking layout. The associated tracking layout,
activity, WBS, and/or resource for an issue are specified in the Project
Issues window (if manually entered), or in the Project Thresholds window
(if generated automatically).
If a button is unavailable, it
means the issue is not
associated with that topic.
You can automatically display the Issue Navigator each time

you open the module. Choose Edit, User Preferences, then
click the Application tab. Mark the Show the Issue Navigator
Dialog at Startup checkbox.

Adding Thresholds
Project thresholds consist of parameters assigned to WBS elements; they
are used to monitor projects and generate issues. For example, you may set
a threshold with the Cost % of Planned parameter and an upper threshold
value of 100 percent. When the actual cost of the specified WBS element
reaches 100 percent of the planned cost, the module generates an issue.
You can assign thresholds to WBS elements at the activity or WBS level.
If you monitor a project at the WBS activity level, the module reviews and
reports issues for each activity that violates the threshold. If you monitor a
project at the WBS level, the module reviews and reports the WBS
summary level data rather than at the activity level. For example, if an
activity within a particular WBS level has a start date variance of –1, but
the start date variance at the WBS level is 0, an issue is not generated even
though you may be monitoring for a lower threshold of –1.
For more information about Add a threshold Choose Project, Thresholds. Click Add, then click the
each parameter, see General tab. Select a threshold parameter. If you enter a lower and upper
“Threshold Parameter
Definitions” on page 353. threshold limit, an issue is generated for any WBS element/activity that
falls outside the specified range. For example, enter –2 days as the lower
limit and 10 days as the upper limit for a total float threshold. You are
notified when any WBS element/activity has a total float less than or equal
to –2 days and greater than or equal to 10 days. The module automatically
enters the type of value that corresponds to the selected threshold.
Select the WBS element you want the threshold to monitor, then select
whether to monitor it at the WBS or activity level. If you select activity,
the threshold will review activities in the specified WBS and in lower-level
elements of that WBS.
The manager responsible for addressing the issues generated by the

threshold is automatically assigned when you select a WBS element.
Responsible managers are defined in the OBS. Click the Browse button in
the Tracking Layout field to select the layout that best displays the
threshold problem area.

The threshold status is automatically set to Enabled. If you do

not want to use it to monitor the project, select Disabled. You
can also change the threshold’s issue priority.
Specify the timespan to monitor Choose Project, Thresholds. Select

the threshold whose details you want to define, then click the Details tab.
Click the Browse button in the From Date and To Date fields and select the
dates for which the threshold should monitor WBS elements or activities.
The module checks only those WBS elements or activities whose start
dates are after the From Date and whose finish dates are before the To
Date.
To monitor all defined Monitor the threshold Once you define a threshold parameter, you
thresholds, choose Tools, need to monitor it to generate any applicable issues. In the Project
Monitor Thresholds. Thresholds window, select the threshold you want to monitor, then click
Monitor. A list of any issues generated are displayed in the Details tab.

View threshold issues You can quickly view the issues generated by a
particular threshold. Select the threshold whose issues you want to review,
then click the Details tab. Select the issue whose details you want to view,
then click Go To.
Click to jump to the Issues View a list of issues for the

window for the selected issue. selected threshold.
Group, sort, and filter thresholds From the Project Thresholds

window, click the Display Options bar, then choose Filter By or Group and
Sort By and the option that describes how you want to view thresholds.

Threshold Parameter Definitions

A threshold consists of a parameter, or type, and a lower and/or upper
threshold value. The module generates an issue automatically when a
threshold parameter is below or equal to the lower threshold or equal to or
above the upper threshold value.
The following paragraphs define the available threshold parameters.
Accounting Variance (AV) An Accounting Variance (AV) threshold

value is expressed as a monetary value. An issue is generated if the
Accounting Variance (the difference between the activity’s planned cost
according to the schedule and the actual cost of performing the activity)
falls beyond the threshold values.
Accounting Variance is computed as AV = Planned Value Cost – Actual

Cost.
A negative value indicates that actual costs have exceeded the scheduled
costs. A positive value indicates that actuals costs have not reached the
scheduled costs.
If the lower threshold value is zero, an issue is generated as soon as actual

costs are greater than scheduled costs.
Cost % of Planned Cost % of Planned threshold values are expressed as

a percentage. An issue is generated if the ratio of the activity’s actual cost
to its planned cost (actual cost / planned cost * 100) falls beyond the
threshold values.
Actual cost is the same as Actual Cost, and planned cost is the same as
Budget at Completion (BAC).
The Cost % of Planned will reach 100 percent when the actual cost
reaches the planned cost. The Cost % of Planned may be greater than 100
percent.
CPI – Cost Performance Index A Cost Performance Index (CPI)

threshold value is expressed as a ratio. An issue is generated if the CPI
falls beyond the threshold values.
The Cost Performance Index is computed as CPI = Earned Value Cost /

Actual Cost. A value less than one indicates that actual costs have
exceeded the value of work performed.

If the lower threshold value is one, an issue is generated whenever the

actual costs exceed the value of the work performed.
Cost Variance (CV) A Cost Variance (CV) threshold value is expressed

as a monetary value. An issue is generated if the CV (the difference
between the activity’s earned value and the actual cost of performing the
activity) falls beyond the threshold values.
Cost Variance is computed as CV = Earned Value Cost – Actual Cost. A

negative value indicates that actual costs have exceeded the value of work
performed, which may be considered a cost overrun.
If the lower threshold value is zero, an issue is generated as soon as actual

cost of the work is greater than the value of the work. A larger negative
value for the threshold indicates that a certain amount of cost overrun may
be tolerated before an issue is generated.
Cost Variance Index (CVI) A Cost Variance Index (CVI) threshold

value is expressed as a ratio. An issue is generated if the CVI (the ratio of
the cost variance to the earned value of work performed) falls beyond the
threshold values.
The Cost Variance Index is computed as CVI = Cost Variance (CV) /

Earned Value Cost.
A value less than zero indicates that actual costs have exceeded the value
of work performed.
If the lower threshold value is zero, an issue is generated whenever the

actual costs exceed the value of the work performed.
Duration % of Planned A Duration % of planned threshold value is

expressed as a percentage. An issue is generated if the ratio of the
activity’s actual duration to its planned duration (actual duration / planned
duration * 100) falls beyond the threshold values.
The ratio of actual duration to planned duration may be greater than 100.
Finish Date Variance A Finish Date Variance threshold value is a

specified number of days. An issue is generated if the difference between
the activity’s planned and current finish date (calculated as Planned Finish
Date – Finish Date) falls beyond the threshold values.
If an activity’s status is Not Started or Active, then the Finish date will be
the Planned Finish date, and the finish date variance is always zero. If an
activity’s status is Completed, then Finish date is the actual finish date.
A negative value for Finish Date Variance indicates that the current finish
date is later than the planned finish date.
Free Float A Free Float threshold value is a specified number of days.

An issue is generated if an activity’s free float (the amount of time the
activity can be delayed without delaying the Early Start of any successor
activity) falls beyond the threshold values.
Free Float threshold monitoring can only be applied at the activity level,
not at the WBS level.
Schedule Performance Index (SPI) A Schedule Performance Index

(SPI) threshold value is expressed as a ratio. An issue is generated if the
Schedule Performance Index (the ratio of the earned value of work
performed to the planned cost of work that was scheduled) falls beyond
the threshold values.
The Schedule Performance Index is computed as SPI = Earned Value Cost

/ Planned Value Cost. A value less than one indicates that less work was
actually performed than was scheduled.
If the threshold value is one, an issue is generated whenever the value of

the work performed falls below the expected cost of performing that work,
according to the schedule.
Start Date Variance A Start Date Variance threshold value is a

specified number of days. An issue is generated if the difference between
the activity’s planned and current start dates (calculated as Planned Start
Date – Start Date) falls beyond the threshold values.
If an activity’s status is Not Started, then the Start date will be the Planned
Start date, and the start date variance is always zero. If an activity’s status
is Started or Completed, then Start date is the actual start date.
Schedule Variance (SV) A Schedule Variance (SV) threshold value is

expressed as a monetary value. An issue is generated if the Schedule
Variance (the difference between the activity’s earned value and the
planned value) falls beyond the threshold values.
Schedule Variance is computed as SV = Earned Value Cost – Planned

Value Cost. A negative value indicates that less work was actually
performed than was scheduled. The activity may be considered behind
schedule.

If the threshold value is zero, an issue is generated as soon as the earned

value of the work performed falls below the amount of work that was
supposed to be performed, according to the schedule. A larger negative
value for a Schedule Variance threshold indicates that an activity may be
behind schedule by that amount before an issue is generated.
Schedule Variance Index (SVI) A Schedule Variance Index (SVI)

threshold value is expressed as a ratio. An issue is generated if the
Schedule Variance Index (the ratio of the schedule variance to the planned
value) falls beyond the threshold values.
The Schedule Variance Index is computed as SVI = Schedule Variance

(SV) / Planned Value Cost. A value less than zero indicates that the value
of the work performed is less than what was scheduled.
If the threshold value is zero, an issue is generated whenever the value of

the work performed falls below the expected cost of performing that work,
according to the schedule.
Total Float A Total Float threshold value is a specified number of days.

An issue is generated if an activity’s total float (the amount of time the
activity can be delayed without delaying the project finish date) falls
beyond the threshold values.
Variance at Completion (VAC) A Variance at Completion (VAC)

threshold value is expressed as a monetary value. An issue is generated if
the Variance At Completion (the planned total cost – latest total cost
estimate) falls beyond the threshold values.
Variance At Completion may also be expressed as VAC = Budget at

Completion (BAC) – Estimate At Completion (EAC).
A negative value indicates an estimated total cost overrun. If the threshold

value is zero, an issue is generated as soon as the latest estimate for total
cost exceeds the planned total cost. A larger negative value for a Variance
At Completion threshold indicates that a certain amount of estimated total
cost overrun may be tolerated before an issue is generated.

Monitoring Thresholds
You can run all the thresholds assigned to a project at one time, or you can
run only individual thresholds as needed.
Monitor all thresholds at once When the project is open, choose

Tools, Monitor Thresholds. To use the timeperiod specified for each
threshold, choose Use Original Threshold Monitor Windows. To specify a
new timeperiod that will apply to all thresholds, choose Use New
Threshold Monitor Window, then click the Browse buttons in the From
Date and To Date fields to select a new set of dates. Click Monitor.
Monitor a specific threshold Choose Project, Thresholds. Select the

threshold you want to monitor. Click Monitor.
You cannot monitor a threshold whose status is Disabled. To

change a threshold’s status, double-click the status you want to
change in the Project Thresholds window.

Assigning Tracking Layouts to Thresholds

Assign a tracking layout to a threshold to graphically display the
information surrounding the threshold and the issues it generates, then use
the Issue Navigator (choose Tools, Issue Navigator) to open this layout in
the Tracking window.
Assign a tracking layout to a threshold Choose Project,

Thresholds. Select the threshold to which you want to assign a tracking
layout. Click the General tab, then click the Browse button in the Tracking
Layout field. Select the tracking layout you want to assign, then click the
Select button.
Select the tracking layout to

associate with the threshold
when an issue is generated.
Any issues that are
generated display using this
tracking layout.

Maintaining a Project’s Document Library 359
Maintaining a Project’s Document

Library
Use the Work Products and Documents feature
In this chapter to catalog and track all project-related
documents and deliverables. This includes
Viewing a Document Library and
Adding/Deleting Work Products guidelines, procedures, standards, plans,
and Documents design templates, worksheets, and all types of
Specifying Document Location project deliverables.
References
Assigning Work Products and This chapter describes how to maintain your
Documents
project’s library of work products and
documents.

Viewing a Document Library and Adding/Deleting Work

Products and Documents
A document can be a reference document for an activity, by providing
standards and guidelines for performing an activity's work, or it can be
formally identified as a project standard. A document can also be a work
product or activity output, such as testing plans and blueprints. You can
also identify project deliverables, or documents that will be delivered to
the end user or customer at the end of the project.
Use the Work Products and Documents feature to maintain general

information about project documents, such as revision date, location, and
author. Store the document files on a network file server, configuration
management system, or Web site, depending on your project
requirements.
You can assign work products and documents from WBS Details (and
assign them to specific WBS elements to track work) or from Work
Products and Documents Details. You can also indicate whether the
documents are public or private.
View a project’s document library Choose Project, Work Products

and Documents. Click the Display Options bar and choose WP & Doc
Details. (The checkbox next to the command should be marked.)
Add a work product or document Open the project to which you

want to add a work product or document. Choose Project, Work Products
and Documents. Click the Title column label to display the documents
hierarchy. (An outline symbol in the Title column label indicates a
hierarchy display.) Select the document immediately above and at the
same level as the document you want to add, then click Add. Click the
General tab in Work Products and Document Details. Type a name for the
document, then add general information about the document.

Enter the selected

document’s reference
or catalog number.
Track the document’s version

by entering the corresponding
number and last update date.
Set up document categories by choosing Admin, Mark to indicate the Set up a document
Admin Categories; use categories to organize document is a project status by choosing
different types of documents. deliverable. Admin, Admin
Categories.
Enter a document description Click the Description tab and type a

description for the document. You can use the HTML editing features,
which include formatting text, inserting pictures, copying and pasting
information from other document files (while retaining formatting), and
adding hyperlinks.
Delete document records Choose Project, Work Products and

Documents. Select the document or group of documents you want to
delete, then click Delete. Click Yes when prompted.
Deleting a document deletes only the document’s link, not the

document’s actual, physical file.

Specifying Document Location References

You can specify two types of document location references, private
location and public location. Private location references can be viewed
only by Project Management module users. Public location references can
be viewed by all project participants, including Timesheets users. For this
reason, public location references typically refer to files stored in a widely
accessible network location, an intranet, or the Internet.
Enter document location references In the Work Products and

Documents window, select the document record for which you want to
enter a location reference. Click the Display Options bar and choose WP
& Doc Details. (The checkbox next to the command should be marked.)
Click the Files tab.
If you want to define the

document as private, type
the file location in this field, or
click the Browse button to
select the location.
If you want to define the
document as public, type
the file location in this field,
or click the Browse button
to select the location.
Open a work product or document Choose Project, Work Products

and Documents. Select the document you want to open. Click the Files
tab. To view a document’s private file, click Launch next to the Private
Location field. Only Project Management module users can view this file.
To view a document’s public file, click Launch next to the Public
Location field. All project participants can view this file.

Assigning Work Products and Documents

You can assign work products and documents to both activities and WBS
elements. For example, during a project’s early planning stages, you may
assign a document to a WBS element. Later, you can assign the same
document to one or more activities as your project’s activity details
develop.
For instructions on assigning Assign documents from the Work Products and Documents
documents from the window Select the document you want to assign. To assign multiple
Activities and Work
Breakdown Structure documents, hold down the Ctrl key, then click each document. Click the
windows, see “Working with Display Options bar and choose WP & Doc Details. (The box next to WP
Activities” on page 201 and & Doc Details should be marked.) Click the Assignments tab.
“Reviewing Work Breakdown
Structures” on page 133.
Click Assign. From the pop-up dialog box, select the activity or WBS
element to which you want to assign the selected document. Click the
Assign button. To remove a document assignment from an activity or
WBS element, select the item in the Assignments tab, then click Remove.
To change the sort order

of any column, click the
column labels.
Mark this checkbox to indicate that the

assigned document is a work product.

Tracking Projects 365
Tracking Projects
The Tracking feature enables you to access,
In this chapter display, and manipulate summarized or live
project data in a variety of formats to perform
Creating Tracking Layouts
schedule, cost, and resource analyses.
Working with Tracking Layouts
Customizing Tracking Layouts This chapter describes how to create and
Grouping, Sorting, and Filtering maintain tracking layouts. You will also learn
Data in Tracking Layouts
how to customize the format and level of
information that each tracking layout displays.

Creating Tracking Layouts

The Tracking window is divided into two or more panes, depending on the
type of layout displayed. The upper left pane, or Project Explorer window,
shows the enterprise project structure (EPS) and contains information
about the available projects. The upper right pane, or Top Layout window,
always displays the current layout and layout options. Depending on the
type of layout you open, the left and right panes may be split horizontally
to display additional panes on the lower half of the window. These include
the Resource Explorer window on the lower left and the Bottom Layout
window on the lower right.
Top Layout window
Project Explorer window
Hide this column by choosing

View, Hide Left Columns, or
by dragging the split bar.
For more information about Tracking layouts display summarized data when you select closed projects
user preferences, see “Setting in the Project Explorer window and when you choose to open only global
User Preferences” on
page 49. For more data when you first start the module. (Summarized data are available when
information about projects have been summarized in the module.) If you select open projects
summarizing data, see in the Project Explorer window, tracking layouts display live data. You can
page 325. change this setting to display summarized data by choosing one of the
closed projects options in the Resource Analysis tab of the User
Preferences dialog box (Edit, User Preferences).

View project details Right-click a project in the Project Explorer

window and choose Project Details to review additional information about
the project. For example, the Summary tab displays the date the
summarizer was last run for the selected project. This will give you an idea
of how current your summary data is. The summary tab also displays
information about the WBS level to which the project was summarized.
For example, a project may use four WBS levels, but may have been
summarized to WBS level 2. As a result, Tracking window data shows
rolled up values to the second WBS level for that project, when viewed in
Summary mode. You can also review general information, such as the
project’s status and responsible manager, project codes, and project dates.
Tracking layout types You can create four types of tracking layouts:
■ Project Tables display project data in a table format. (Top Layout
window only)
■ Project Bar Charts display project data in a horizontal Bar Chart
format. (Top Layout window only)
■ Project Gantt/Profiles display project information in columns and
Gantt Chart format (in the Top Layout window) and time-distributed
project data in either spreadsheet or profile format (in the Bottom
Layout window).
■ Resource Analysis layouts display resource/project usage
information in columns and Gantt Chart format (in the Top Layout
window) and time-distributed total resource allocation data in either
spreadsheet or profile format (in the Bottom Layout window).

All tracking layouts enable you to survey projects—first at a

comprehensive level, then at more detailed levels according to EPS,
project, work breakdown structure (WBS), organizational breakdown
structure (OBS), phase, or specific WBS data elements. You can also use
features such as filtering and grouping to customize the format and level of
information you want to include in a tracking layout.
Tracking layouts can be accessible to all users (global) or to a specific user

only. You can assign tracking layouts to thresholds and issues to help
monitor a project’s problem areas.
For step-by-step instructions Create a tracking layout Choose Enterprise, Tracking. In the Project
on creating each type of Explorer window, choose the project or EPS node for which you want to
tracking layout, see Tracking
Projects in the Help. create a layout. Click the Display Options bar in the Top Layout window
(on the right side), then choose Layout, New. In the New Layout dialog
box, type the new layout’s name. In the Available To field, choose to make
the layout available to you (Current User) or to everyone (All Users).
Choose the type

of layout you
want to create...
...then customize it.

Working with Tracking Layouts

Open a tracking layout by choosing Enterprise, Tracking. In the Project
Explorer window, choose the project or EPS node for which you want to
open a layout. Click the Browse button in the Layout Name field in the
Top Layout window. Select the layout you want to open and click OK. You
can also click the Display Options bar in the Top Layout window, then
choose Layout, Open.
When you create and save Save a layout In the Top Layout window, click the Display Options bar,
a layout, only the then choose Layout, Save or Save As. If you choose Save As, type a new
presentation options are name for the layout and indicate whether the layout should be available to
saved, not the data. This All Users, the Current User, or Another User. If you select Another User,
enables you to use the click the Browse button in the User field, then select the user.
layout with different
projects.
Share a layout You can share a layout with other users in several
different ways:
■ When you first create the layout, you can specify that it be available to
All Users.
■ You can save an existing layout using a different name and then
specify that it be available to All Users or Another User. If you
specify Another User, you can then select a specific user.
■ You can export the layout to a file and then e-mail the file or its
location to other users.
For information on publishing ■ You can publish the layout to a Web site.
tracking layouts to a Web
site, see “Publishing a Project
on the World Wide Web” on Delete a layout In the Top Layout window, click the Display Options
page 501. bar, then choose Layout, Open. Select the layout you want to delete, then
click Delete. Click Yes.
Export a layout In the Top Layout window, click the Display Options
bar, then choose Layout, Open. Select the layout you want to export, then
click Export. Specify the drive and folder to which you want to export the
layout, type a name for the layout, then click Save. The layout is saved in
.PLF format.
Import a layout In the Top Layout window, click the Display Options
bar, then choose Layout, Open. Click Import. Locate the layout (*.PLF)
you want to import and select it, then click Open.

Customizing Tracking Layouts

Depending on the type of tracking layout displayed, you can customize
various aspects of the Tracking window. For example, you can display
only the top or bottom window in a layout, and you can select the columns
of information displayed in layouts that contain tables and spreadsheets.
For step-by-step instructions Customize a Project Table You can customize the columns that
on customizing each type of display in a Project Table. Click the Display Options bar in the Top
tracking layout, see Tracking
Projects in the Help. Layout window and choose Columns. See “Customizing Layouts” on
page 427 for more information on customizing columns.
Customize a Project Bar Chart You can customize the bar options
that appear in a Project Bar Chart. Click the Display Options bar in the
Top Layout window and choose Top Layout Options, Bars.
Show up to three bars.

Choose the data you want
the bar to represent and
its color.
To change the timeperiod Customize a Project Gantt/Profile You can customize the columns
for the layout, move the that appear in the Project Gantt Chart (Top Layout window), and the data/
mouse over a year in the timescale that appears in the profile (Bottom Layout window). To
timescale until the mouse customize columns, click the Display Options bar in the Top Layout
pointer changes to a hand. window and choose Columns. To customize profile options, click the
Drag to the right to move
Display Options bar in the Bottom Layout window and choose Bottom
backward in time and to
Layout Options, Profile Settings or Timescale. See “Customizing
the right to move forward in
time. Layouts” on page 427 for more information.

Customize a Resource Analysis layout You can customize the

columns and bars that appear in the Top Layout window, and the data/
timescale that appears in the profile (Bottom Layout window). To
customize the Top Layout window, click the Display Options bar in the
Top Layout window. Choose Top Layout Options, then the item you want
to customize. To customize profile options, click the Display Options bar
in the Bottom Layout window and choose Bottom Layout Options, Profile
Settings or Timescale. See “Customizing Layouts” on page 427 for more
information.

Grouping, Sorting, and Filtering Data in Tracking

Layouts
Grouping data allows you to organize information into bands, based on a
common attribute such as a hierarchy, code value, or resource. You can
choose to group data using the standard data groupings provided in the
module, or you can create a customized grouping. Sorting enables you to
determine the sequence of data in the layout.
This Project Bar Chart is grouped by

Project. You can group and sort by
other default groupings, or customize
your own.
For more information on Group and sort data in tracking layouts In the Top Layout
customized grouping, sorting, window, click the Display Options bar, then choose Top Layout Options,
and filtering data, see
“Grouping, Sorting, and Group and Sort By. Select the data grouping you want to apply to your
Filtering Data” on page 417. layout, or customize the grouping. If you choose Customize, double-click
the Group By field and select the field by which you want to group data.
Click Sort to select a sort order for the grouping, then click Apply to
preview your selections or OK to save them.

Filter data in tracking layouts Use filters to display only the data
you’d like to see. A filter contains a formula that restricts your view to
only the data you require. Click the Display Options bar in the Project
Explorer window and choose Filters. Click Add. In the new row, click the
Parameter field and select a value. Double-click the Is cell and select a
filter criteria. Type a value and click OK.
Click to add another row and Click to preview

enter additional filter criteria. changes.
Click to delete a selected

row in the filter.
The filter term “Any of the following” is the same as OR. “All of
the following” is the same as AND.

Comparing Projects with Schedule Comparison 375
Comparing Projects with Schedule

Comparison
Schedule Comparison provides the capability
In this chapter to compare two projects, or a project and an
associated baseline, to determine what data has
Schedule Comparison Overview
been added, deleted, or modified from the
Comparing Projects/Baselines
schedules. Based on the data fields you select
Comparison Data
for comparison, this feature creates a project
plan comparison report in one of three file
formats.

Schedule Comparison Overview

You can use Schedule Comparison to generate a comparison report
between revised and original projects you have access to, or between
revised projects you have access to and their associated baselines. You can
select up to five project or project/baseline comparisons to include in a
report. For each comparison report, you can specify the project and
activity data fields you want to compare, choose the format of the report
output file, and specify whether you want to group activity data by activity,
rather than by data type.

Comparing Projects/Baselines
Schedule Comparison is available from the Tools menu of the Project
Management module. If Schedule Comparison is configured to use the
same database instance as the Project Management module, log in is
automatic. If Schedule Comparison is configured to use a different
database instance, or configured to use multiple database instances, you
will be prompted to log in.
Start Schedule Comparison Choose Tools, Schedule Comparison. If

login is required, type your login name and password. If applicable,
choose the database you want to connect to, then click OK.
If more than one database instance is configured, a drop-down

list displays beneath the password field, so you can select the
database you want to use.
After a successful login, the Schedule Comparison main window displays

and you can select the projects/baselines and specific data fields you want
to compare

Select projects/baselines to compare To compare a project to its

baseline or to another project, in the Schedule Comparison main window,
select the revised project, then select the project or baseline you want to
compare it to. Choose a format, name, and destination for the comparison
report output file and specify Advanced options to select the data fields
you want to compare.
Click to select the Click to select the original

revised project. project or baseline.
Select output
format and report
location.
Select project and

activity data fields
to compare.
To remove a project or baseline from the list of items to

compare, click inside the corresponding row, then press Delete.

Select a revised project To select a revised project, click in a row,

then click the Browse button that displays.
The Select Project dialog box displays all of the projects you have access
to, grouped by EPS. A + symbol indicates that more nodes or projects are
rolled up beneath the selected node. Click + or double-click the node to
display additional levels in the hierarchy. Select the desired project, then
click OK.
Click the Find button to search for a project by name. The found
projects are displayed in a flat list, not according to the EPS. To
return to the original EPS tree, click the Clear button.

The Find function always searches through all of the projects

and not only those currently displayed.
Select an original project or baseline To select an original project

or baseline, click in a row, then click the Browse button that displays.
Choose the option to display projects or baselines. The Projects option
displays all of the projects you have access to, grouped by EPS. The
Baselines option displays all baselines associated with the revised project
you selected. After locating the desired project or baseline, select it and
click OK.
Select whether to
display projects or
baselines.
When the Baselines option is selected, project baselines are

displayed in a flat list, not according to the EPS.
Click the Find button to search for a project or baseline by

name. See “Select a revised project” on page 379 for details.

Set advanced options Click the Advanced... button to select the

project and activity data fields you want to include in the report.
Project data
Activity data
All project and activity options are selected by default. To exclude an

option, unmark the corresponding checkbox.To include an option in the
comparison report, mark the checkbox next to the item name.
To group the comparison report activity data by activity, instead of by data

field type, mark the Group report by activity checkbox. When this option
is enabled, the items you select in the Activity data section are grouped by
activity in the report. Project items display at the top of the report and not
grouped by activity.
Click OK to save your selected options.
Set the output format In the Send Report To section, choose one of
the available formats:
■ HTML (default)
■ CSV
■ ASCII text
When the output format is ASCII text, select a field delimiter and text
qualifier from the drop-down list.
■ Available field delimiters

• comma (,)

• pipe (|)
• dot (.)
■ Available text qualifiers:

• none
• double quotes (")
• single quote (')
• dollar sign ($)
Set the output file location To set the filename and location to save
the comparison report, use one of the following options:
■ In the Output File field, type the full path and filename.
Ensure that you enter the proper file extension, based on the
output format you selected. If the wrong file extension is
specified, the report will not display properly when opened for
viewing.
If you specify only a filename and do not specify a location, the

report is saved to the module installation directory.
■ Click the Browse button next to the Output File field. Browse to the
desired output destination, type a filename (no file extension is
needed), and click Save.
View reports automatically To view reports automatically after they

are generated, mark the checkbox next to View the file when done. When
this option is selected, reports are automatically opened in the default
module that is associated with the report’s output format (e.g., HTML
reports are opened by the system’s default browser).
Generate the comparison report When you have finished setting all
of the report and output options, click Compare to generate the report.
If any of the revised projects listed for comparison do not have

an associated original project/baseline selected, an error
message is displayed. Ensure that an original project/baseline
is selected for each revised project that is listed.

If the output file already exists, a warning is displayed. To overwrite the

existing file, click Yes. To cancel the comparison and select a different
filename, click No.
While Schedule Comparison is working, a dialog is displayed that shows

the progress of the comparison. To stop the comparison before it is
completed, click Cancel.
When the comparison is complete, a confirmation dialog listing the

location of the report is displayed. Click OK to continue.

Comparison Data
The following table lists the business objects, and the fields within those
business objects, that are compared by Schedule Comparison.
Some fields are for reporting or uniqueness verification only

and are not compared. These are identified by an asterisk.
Option Business Object Fields

General Project Data Project DataDate
FinishDate
MustFinishByDate
OBSName
PlannedStartDate
StartDate
Status
General WBS Data WBS AnticipatedFinishDate
AnticipatedStartDate
OBSName
Status
Added/Deleted WBS WBS Code
Name
Project Budget Data Project CurrentBudget
CurrentVariance
DistributedCurrentBudget
TotalBenefitPlan
TotalBenefitPlanTally
TotalSpendingPlan
TotalSpendingPlanTally
UnallocatedBudget
UndistributedCurrentVariance


Scheduling Options ScheduleOptions ComputeTotalFloatType
CriticalActivityFloatThreshold
CriticalActivityPathType
IgnoreOtherProjectRelationships
LevelResourcesDuringScheduling
MakeOpenEndedActivitiesCritical
OutOfSequenceScheduleType
RecalculateAssignmentCosts
RelationshipLagCalendar
StartToStartLagCalculationType
UseExpectedFinishDates
Added/Deleted Activities Activity ID
Name
General Activity Data Activity CalendarName
FreeFloat
IsCritical
TotalFloat
WBSCode
WBSName


Costs Activity ActualExpenseCost
ActualLaborCost
ActualMaterialCost
ActualNonLaborCost
AtCompletionExpenseCost
AtCompletionLaborCost
AtCompletionMaterialCost
AtCompletionNonLaborCost
PlannedExpenseCost
PlannedLaborCost
PlannedMaterial Cost
PlannedNonLaborCost
RemainingExpenseCost
RemainingLaborCost
RemainingMaterialCost
RemainingNonLaborCost


Units Activity ActualLaborUnits
ActualNonLaborUnits
AtCompletionLaborUnits
AtCompletionNonLaborUnits
PlannedLaborUnits
PlannedNonLaborUnits
RemainingLaborUnits
RemainingNonLaborUnits
Durations Activity ActualDuration
AtCompletionDuration
PlannedDuration
RemainingDuration
Dates Activity ActualFinishDate
ActualStartDate
EarlyFinishDate
EarlyStartDate
LateFinishDate
LateStartDate
PlannedFinishDate
PlannedStartDate
Percent Complete Activity DurationPercentComplete
PhysicalPercentComplete
UnitsPercentComplete
Constraints PrimaryConstraintDate
PrimaryConstraintType
SecondaryConstraintDate
SecondaryConstraintType
Added/Deleted Assignments ResourceAssignment ActivityID
ActivityName
ResourceID
ResourceName


General Resource Assignment ResourceAssignment ActivityID*
ActivityName*
ActualCost
ActualUnits
AtCompletionCost
AtCompletionUnits
CostAccountName
IsPrimaryResource
PlannedCost
PlannedDuration
PlannedUnits
PricePerUnit
RemainingCost
RemainingDuration
RemainingUnits
RemainingUnitsPerTime
ResourceID
ResourceName
RoleID
RoleName
Added/Deleted Expenses ActivityExpense ActivityID
ActivityName
ExpenseItem
General Expenses ActivityExpense ActivityID*
ActivityName*
ActualCost
AtCompletionCost
CostAccountName
ExpenseItem*
ExpensePercentComplete
PlannedCost
PricePerUnit
RemainingCost


Relationships Relationships Lag
PredecessorActivityID
PredecessorActivityName*
SuccessorActivityID
SuccessorActivityName*
Type*
Activity Codes CodeValue
Description
Notebook Topics ActivityNote NotebookTopicName
Steps ActivityStep ActivityID*
ActivityName*
Name*
PercentComplete
Weight
WeightPercent

Creating and Using Reflections 391
Creating and Using Reflections
A reflection is a copy of an active project that

In this chapter contains a link to the original project. This
allows you to make changes to the reflection
Reflection Overview
and then merge selected changes back into to
the original project, keeping active project data
Reflection Guidelines
such as timesheet information intact.

Reflection Overview
A reflection is a copy of a project that has the following characteristics:
1 Has the same name as the original source project with reflection
appended to it.
2 Internally, contains a link to the source project that allows the
application to merge changes to the reflection into the source project.
3 Has a what-if status.
After creating a reflection, you can make changes to it. If desired, you can
then merge selected changes back into the source project keeping active
data in the source project intact. Creating a reflection facilitates the
following work flows and processes:
■ Creating a sandbox area to test different project scenarios.

■ Reviewing changes made by team members to activities they own in a
reflection. Using the reflection as an intermediary project lets you
review and accept changes before merging the reflection back into the
source project.
■ Reviewing changes to a project by exporting a reflection as an .XER
file. You can send the .XER file to outside users who can import the
file into their database. After making changes to the project, the
outside users can export the file and send the resulting .XER file back
to you. By importing the .XER file back into your reflection, you can
decide which changes to keep when you merge the reflection back
into the source project.


Creating and using reflections involves the following process: Create a
reflection. Make changes to the reflection. Preview the changes to the
project. If desired, print a report of the changes to the project. Then merge
selected changes into the source project.
Create a reflection
In the Projects view, right

click on the project for
which you want to create
a reflection.
In the context menu,

click Create Reflection.
If the project does not

contain any baselines,
the system responds by
creating a reflection.
If the project does not contain any baselines, the system

responds by creating a reflection. Otherwise, the system
responds by displaying the Copy Baselines dialog box.
For any baselines you want to copy, mark checkbox(s) in
the Copy column of the Copy Baselines dialog box and
click OK. The system responds by creating a reflection.
Make changes in the Reflection

Once a reflection has been created, you can make changes to the reflection
as needed to explore alternative project scenarios.

Preview changes to be merged
In the Projects view, right

click on the reflection that
you want to merge with the
source project.
In the context menu, click
Merge Reflection into
Source Project. If there
are any changes to
merge, the system
responds by displaying
the Preview Changes to
Project dialog box.
Choose changes to merge

Next, choose changes from the reflection to merge into the source project.
There are two ways the

changes can be viewed,
or grouped, in the Preview
Changes to Project dialog
box: by subject area or by
activity.
When you view the
changes by activity,
check boxes appear in
the Merge column for
activity rows. This allows
you to select which
activities to merge into
the source project.

Merge the Changes
Determine any actions the

application should take
prior to merging
Determine any actions

the application should
take after merging
If for whatever reason, you decide not to merge the

changes in the Reflection into the Source project, click
Cancel and no changes will be made to the source
project.
Otherwise, click Merge Changes to merge the

changes into the source project.

Reflection Guidelines
Several factors determine whether you can create or merge reflections of
particular projects:
Guidelines for creating reflections You use the Create Reflection

right click option to create a reflection of a project. This option is disabled
when you do not have access to create projects within the EPS node.
Additionally, the right click option is hidden when any of the following is
true:
■ A group band node is selected

■ More than one project is selected
■ A summary-only project is selected
■ An MSP-managed project is selected
Guidelines for merging reflections You use the Merge Reflection

into Source Project right-click option to merge changes. This option is
disabled when any of the following is true:
■ The source project has been checked out

■ The source project and/or the reflection has been opened exclusively
by another user
■ You do not have super user privileges to both the source project and
the reflection
Additionally, the right-click option is disabled when any of the following
is true:
■ A group band node is selected

■ More than one project is selected
■ A non-reflection project is selected (i.e. the project does not contain a
source project field value)
■ The selected project contains a source project field value, but it does
not have a what-if status
■ The selected project has a what-if status but it does not contain a
source project field value

Checking Projects In and Out 397
Checking Projects In and Out

The Project Check In/Check Out feature
In this chapter enables you to keep track of projects that are
used outside of the enterprise database. For
Managing Remote Projects
example, a project manager may check out a
Checking Out Projects
project and take it along to a project site,
Checking In Projects
updating or modifying the project while at that
site. When the project manager returns to the
office, the project is checked back in, updating
the enterprise database.
This chapter describes the XER file format in

which you can check projects in and out of the
module; it also explains how to check in and
check out projects using the XER format.

Managing Remote Projects

You can check projects out to work on them at remote locations. When a
project is checked out, it cannot be modified in the module until it is
checked back in.
You can check projects out in the Primavera proprietary format (XER).
This format enables you to use activity, cost, resource, and other types of
project information with other installations of the Project Management
module, regardless of the database being used (Oracle, Microsoft SQL
Server, or SQL Server Express).
For more information about Track check out status You can easily determine whether a project
converting projects, see the has been checked out. Choose Enterprise, Projects, click the Display
Options bar, then choose Show on Bottom, Project Details.
The checkmark on the

project symbol indicates that
this project is checked out.
Click the General tab to

check or change the
status of the project.
The name of the user that checked out The date and time the user checked out
the project. This field is blank when the the project. This field is blank when the
Check Out Status is Checked In. Check Out Status is Checked In.

Checking Out Projects

The Check Out wizard guides you through the steps for checking out
projects. Before you start the wizard, open the projects that you want to
check out.
Check out projects Choose File, Check Out.
You can check out

multiple projects to
the XER format.
Select the projects that you want to check out. For projects that you do not
want to check out, clear the Check Out checkbox.
If the project you want to check out is not on the list, click
Cancel, open the project, and restart the wizard.
For organizations using Primavera ProjectLink, Microsoft

Project (MSP)-managed projects are not available for check out
in the Project Management module. MSP-managed projects
must be checked out in Microsoft Project using ProjectLink. For
more information on Primavera ProjectLink, refer to the
Primavera ProjectLink Help in Microsoft Project (available only
if Primavera ProjectLink is installed). You can access the help
by clicking the Help button on any ProjectLink screen.
Specify the name of the file and the location where the file will be saved,
then click Finish.

Click the
Browse
button to
select the
file
location.
If you check out multiple projects to a single .XER file, the

interproject relationships between activities in all the projects
included in the file are preserved.

Checking In Projects
Projects previously checked out of the Project Management database can
be checked back in to any Project Management module installation.
Check in projects Choose File, Check In. Click the Browse button to
select the file that you want to check in, then click Next.
The relationships between Specify check in project options An XER file can contain data from
all of the projects in the several projects. The first column in the Check In Project Options dialog
XER file are preserved. box lists all the projects included in the XER file. If a project with the
same name already exists in the current module installation, the Match
checkbox next to it is marked. To prevent data in the module database
from being overwritten when you check in the XER file, double-click the
Import Action field next to each project, then select one of the following
options:
■ Update Existing Project The existing project is updated with any
new/modified data in the XER file; adds new data if the record does
not exist. Select the project to update in the Import To field. You can
further define how data should be updated when matches occur. Refer
to “Choose update project options” on the next page for more
information.
■ Replace Existing Project The existing project is deleted and then
replaced with the project checked in from the XER file. Select the
project to be replaced in the Import To field.

■ Ignore this Project The project is not checked in.
Choose update project options Click Next to select a layout

configuration to use when checking in project data. The options specified
in the layout configuration determine how the module handles data in the
file that match data in the database. You can create and save several
different configurations; however, only one configuration can be used to
check in the file. Select Yes in the Use field next to the configuration you
want to use.
Click to
customize
the layout
configuration
.
Click to create a new
Modify a layout configuration The options specified in a layout

configuration determine how data are updated when projects are checked
in. To modify these options, select the layout configuration in the Update
Project Options dialog box, then click Modify.

Mark to delete risks,

relationships to external
projects, thresholds,
activities, activity
relationships, and activity
resource assignments that
are in the project being
updated, but that are not
included in the file. To keep
the data, clear the
checkbox.
The Modify Import Configuration dialog box lists the data types for which
you can set options. Mark the Delete checkbox next to a data type to
remove data that exist in the project you are updating but that are not
included in the file you are checking in. For example, if several thresholds
are defined in the project that you are updating, but they are not included
in the file you are checking in, mark the checkbox in the Delete column to
remove the thresholds from the project being updated.
The Delete field applies only to risks, relationships to external

projects, thresholds, activities, activity relationships, and activity
resource assignments. Global data types are not affected by
this setting.
Select one of the following in the Action field to indicate how the data
type is updated:

■ Keep Existing Retains data in the existing project and does not
overwrite them with the updated data; adds new data if the record
does not exist.
■ Update Existing Overwrites data in the existing project with updated
data; adds new data if the record does not exist.
■ Insert New Retains data in the existing project and adds any new data
items. For example, if a new role was added to the data, but you don’t
want to change the existing roles, choose Insert New to add the new
role to the existing project.
■ Do Not Import Retains data in the existing project and does not
import the updated data.
Click OK to save changes to the modified layout configuration. Click

Next. Click Finish to complete check in.

Part 5
Customizing Projects
In this part Working with Layouts
Grouping, Sorting, and Filtering Data
Customizing Layouts
Customizing Reports
Printing Layouts and Reports
Publishing a Project on the World Wide
Web
Linking the Project Management and
Contract Manager Modules
R ead this part to learn how to customize your desktop and
create layouts that help you see the data you need to manage
your projects. Working with Layouts describes the types of
layouts you can create and explains how to add, open, and
save layouts. It also describes how to import and export
layouts to share with other users. Read Grouping, Sorting,
and Filtering Data to learn how to display only the data you
need to see in a layout. Customizing Layouts shows you how
to change the look and content of layouts by modifying
columns, formatting Gantt Charts, adjusting the timescale,
and editing fonts and colors. Customizing Reports discusses
how to create reports and assign them to report groups and
batches. Printing Layouts and Reports describes the printing
options, and Publishing a Project on the World Wide Web
explains how to create a project Web site. Linking the Project
Management and Contract Manager Modules describes how
to link Project Management module projects to and from the
Contract Manager module.
Working with Layouts 407
Working with Layouts

You can create layouts that display the data
you need to see, in the format you need to see
In this chapter
them. Customize the top and bottom areas of
Layout Types the layout to include tables, graphs, charts,
Creating, Opening, and Saving Activity or Project Details, and more. Once
Layouts
you are satisfied with your layout, you can
Exporting and Importing Layouts
save it so you or other team members can use
Copying and Pasting Resource
Spreadsheet Data to Microsoft it again.
Excel
This chapter describes the different layout
types and explains how to create, open, save,
export, and import layouts.

408 Part 5: Customizing Projects
Layout Types
You can open WBS, projects, and resource assignment layouts, and the
following types of activity layouts: Activity Tables, Activity and Resource
Usage Spreadsheets and Profiles, Gantt Charts, Activity Networks,
Activity Details, and Trace Logic. Split the Activities window into top and
bottom panes to display different types of layouts at the same time. For
example, show an Activity Table in the top pane and a Resource Usage
Profile in the bottom pane.
Click the Layout Options bar

to display a menu of options
that you can use to
customize the top and
bottom panes of the
Activities window.
Click Show on Top and Show

on Bottom to select the layout
type displayed in each area
of the Activities window.
For additional information Refer to the following examples:

about layout types and
examples of sample layouts,
see “Quick Tour” on page 13.

Click the Show/Hide Bottom Layout button to

display the top layout in an expanded view.
Activity Table
Displays activity
information in
spreadsheet format. Use
this type of layout to
quickly update a project.
You can use filters and

data grouping to see
only those activities that
occur in your current
status cycle.
Activity Usage
Spreadsheet
Displays units, costs, or
earned value data by
activity over time. Use
this type of layout to
review per period and
rolled up activity
resource/cost data.

Click the Relationship Lines

button to view relationships in the
Gantt Chart.
Gantt Chart
Provides a graphical
display of activity
progress over the
course of the project.
Use this layout to
review or analyze the
schedule.
Activity Network
display of activities,
including logical
relationships. Activity
Network can be
displayed in the top
layout only. The left
side of this example
displays the WBS
hierarchy, while the
right side shows the
activity flow in
graphical format. Use
this layout to change
the sequence of
activities as your
project evolves.
To quickly zoom in on an Activity
Network box, hold down the Alt key,
then click and drag your mouse in the
Activity Network section.

Activity Details
Displays and enables
you to modify detailed
information for an
activity you select in
either the Activity Table
or Activity Network.
This type of layout can
be displayed in the
bottom layout only. Use
this layout type to add
and update activities.
To show or hide any of the

Detail tabs, right-click on a tab
title and choose Customize
Activity Details.
Activity Usage Profile

Displays a time
distribution of activity
units and costs in a Bar
Chart format. This
profile can be displayed
in the bottom layout
only. Use this layout type
to review the labor use
for activities in a specific
timeperiod.
You can display usage for all

activities, or choose Selected
Activities to display usage for
only the highlighted
activities.

Resource Usage
Spreadsheet
Displays resource data
in spreadsheet format.
This spreadsheet can be
displayed in the bottom
layout only. Use this
layout type to view
resource allocation over
time, according to a
timescale you specify.
You can display activities by selected resource or assignment.
Resource Usage
Profile
Displays a time
distribution of resource
units and costs in
relation to activities in a
Bar Chart format. This
profile can be displayed
in the bottom layout
only. Use this layout
type to analyze resource
levels with the schedule.
To display a pop-up box
containing totals for a
specific month, double-click
that month’s bar in the graph.
You can also display the

profile as a histogram
using different colors and
patterns for multiple
resources. Click the
Display Options Bar and
choose Stacked
Histogram.

Trace Logic
display of dependency
relationships for an
activity you select in
either the Activity Table
or Activity Network.
Trace Logic can be
displayed in the bottom
layout only. Use this
layout type to easily move
forward and backward
through the plan to view
the critical path.
To quickly zoom in on a box, hold down the

Alt key, then click and drag your mouse in
the Trace Logic layout.

Creating, Opening, and Saving Layouts

Once you create a layout, you can save it and use it again at other stages of
the project or with different projects. Make layouts available to all users
(global) or to a specific user only.
Choose Layout, Open, to

apply an existing layout to
the current project or
projects.
For detailed instructions on Add a new layout Customize the top and bottom layouts to create a
customizing the top and new layout, then save the layout using a name you specify. Click the
bottom layouts, see
“Customizing Layouts” on Layout Options bar, then choose Layout, Save As. Type the layout name,
page 427. then select who will be able to use this layout: All Users, the Current User,
Another User, or Project. If you select Another User, click the Browse
button in the User field, then select the user’s name. (If you save a layout
and specify a user other than yourself, you will no longer be able to access
the layout.) If you select Project, click the Browse button and specify a
project in the Select Project dialog box.
Once you have selected who will be able to use the layout, click Save.
Open a layout Click the Layout Options bar, then choose Layout,
Open. Select the layout you want to open, then click Open. To preview the
layout without closing the Open Layout dialog box, click Apply.
Save changes to a layout Click the Layout Options bar, then choose
Layout, Save. To save a copy of the layout using a different name, choose
Layout, Save As. Type a name for the layout copy, then click Save.

Exporting and Importing Layouts

If you want to share a layout with other users, export it to a central location
from which they can then import the layout to use with their own projects.
Export a layout Click the Layout Options bar, then choose Layout,
Open. Click the name of the layout you want to export, then click Export.
Specify a name and location for the export file, then click Save.
Import a layout Click the Layout Options bar, then choose Layout,
Open. Click Import, then select the location of the layout file you want to
import. (Primavera layout files have a .PLF extension.) Click Open. If you
want to make the layout available to all users, click Yes when prompted.
To overwrite the current layout with your changes, click the

Layout Options bar and choose Layout, Save.

Copying and Pasting Resource Spreadsheet Data to

Microsoft Excel
You can now copy resource spreadsheet data from the Project
Management module and paste it in Microsoft Excel. Choose Project,
Resource Assignments. Select a row, then choose Edit, Copy. You can also
select multiple rows. All associated data, as well as row and column
headers and values, is copied to the clipboard.
You may need to expand column widths to display all the

project information.
In Excel, right-click in the spreadsheet, then choose Paste. Any edits made
in Excel cannot be returned to your Project Management module project.
Use this feature for reporting only.
Excel may reformat data pasted into a spreadsheet. To

prevent this, reformat the cells as text before pasting the data,
or paste the data into a different spreadsheet application.

Grouping, Sorting, and Filtering Data 417
Grouping, Sorting, and Filtering Data

Grouping organizes activities or projects into
In this chapter categories that share a common attribute. For
example, focus on activities by resource,
Grouping Data
responsibility, or dates. Sorting arranges
Sorting Data
activities, resources, or projects in any order
Filtering Data
you select, such as by start date.
Filters enable you to narrow your selection to

a specific data group. Use the standard filters
provided or add new filters.
Read this chapter to learn how to group, sort,

and filter data in your projects.

Grouping Data
Group to organize information in categories that share a common
attribute, such as enterprise project structure (EPS), work breakdown
structure (WBS), code value, or resource. Use predefined grouping
options; for example, when displaying the Expenses window, group by
vendor, WBS, or category.
Use these predefined

grouping and sorting
options for the WBS,
expenses, work products
and documents,
thresholds, and risks
windows.
You can also customize group criteria when you are working with
projects, activities, and resources. Group by simple, one-level lists of
information, such as dates, durations, costs, and other numeric data. You
can also group by multiple data items in the same layout. For example,
group by project, then total float. Each group band can have a unique color
and font.
Group criteria can also be arranged in hierarchies of data at multiple levels

(up to 20). These items include projects, WBS, project codes, and activity
codes. Choose whether to indent each level in the hierarchy, and specify
up to which level to show. If you limit the number of levels, you can group
by additional data items.

This layout is
grouped by multiple
levels of the WBS.
You can also specify

customized grouping and
sorting criteria when a
Resource Usage
Spreadsheet is shown as
a bottom layout in the
Activities window.
Customize grouping In the Activities window, click the Layout

Options bar, then choose Group and Sort. You can also click the Display
Options bar from the Projects or Resources window and then choose
Group and Sort By, Customize.
In the Group By field, select the data item by which you want to group
data. Mark the Show Group Totals checkbox if you want to display total
rolled up values for each item you select in the Group By field. For
example, if you choose to group by WBS, each WBS band displays the
sum of the values for the activities included in that WBS item.

Mark the Show Group Totals to display totals in

When grouping by a hierarchical item, such as
the grouping bands. Clear the checkbox to hide
WBS, mark the Indent checkbox to indent each
any totals in the grouping bands
level, and specify how many levels to show.
Mark Show Grand Totals
to display a grand total
band at the top of the
window. Mark Show
Summaries Only if you
only want to display bands
for the data items you
select in the Group By field
(for example, if you want to
display WBS bands and
hide the WBS’s activities).
Mark to decrease the

space taken by indenting
levels on the hierarchy and
allow for the display of
additional data.
To select the data item by

which you want to group
data, click the Group By
field and select a value
from the drop-down list.
These settings apply When grouping by numbers, dates, or

to the Group By field durations, choose an interval for each
selected above. group. For example, group activities by
actual costs in increments of $3000.
Mark or clear the checkboxes to choose the text to display on the grouping
bands. To display the field name on the grouping band, mark the Show
Title checkbox. To display the ID or Code value on the grouping band,
mark the Show ID/Code checkbox. To display the Name or Description on
the grouping band, mark the Show Name/Description checkbox. To sort
the grouping bands alphabetically rather than their order in their respective
hierarchy, mark the Sort Grouping Bandings Alphabetically checkbox. To
hide group title bands that do not contain activities within the group, mark
the Hide If Empty checkbox.
You must select either Show ID/Code or Show Name/

Description.

Set as a user preference To display a label on grouping bands for

windows/dialog boxes where you cannot access a Group and Sort dialog
box, choose Edit, User Preferences. Click the Application tab. In the
Group and Sorting section, mark Show ID/Code, Show Name/Description,
or both.
Mark to immediately
rearrange updated activity
data to reflect the group
and sort criteria.

Sorting Data
Sorting determines the sequence in which projects, activities, or resources
are listed in the current window. You can sort alphabetically, numerically,
or chronologically based on the data item you choose. For example, sort
by total float to see critical activities first, or sort by percent complete in
descending order to see completed or in progress activities at the top of the
layout.
Specify sort order In the Activities window, click the Layout Options
bar, then choose Group and Sort. Click Sort. You can also click the
Display Options bar from the Projects or Resources window and choose
Group and Sort By, Customize, Sort.
To select a data item to use

as the sort method, double-
click the Field Name cell and
select the field. Click Add to
specify additional
To select a sort order, sort criteria.
double-click the Sort Order
cell and choose Ascending or
Descending.
Reorganizing Data
You can mark the Reorganize Automatically checkbox on the
Applications tab of User Preferences to immediately reorganize the
current view or layout each time you add an activity or change activity
data. However, if you have many changes to make and you choose not to
mark the setting in User Preferences, you can select Tools, Reorganize
Now to organize the project. When you change views, apply a filter, cut,
copy, paste, or refresh data, the module will reorganize the data, regardless
of whether the Reorganize Automatically checkbox is marked or cleared.

Filtering Data
Use filters to focus on specific data. A filter is a set of instructions that
determines which data display in the current window. You can create one
set of filters for activities and one set for projects, or use predefined filters.
Filters can be user-defined, global or layout. User-defined filters are filters
that you define. They are available only to you for all projects to which
you have access. Global filters are available to all users for all projects.
Layout Filters are only available to the currently open layout.
Select a filter To select activities for the project currently open, in the
Activities window click the Layout Options bar, then choose Filters. To
filter the projects in the Projects window, click the Display Options bar,
then choose Filter By. Mark the checkbox beside each filter you want to
apply.
Choose All or Any to combine multiple filters.

Click to view all activities
Combining filters further narrows the selected data.
(and remove all filters).
Click to see
These predefined filters how a filter
are available when you works before
are selecting activities in you commit
the Activities window. A to it.
different set of
predefined filters is
provided when you filter
by projects in the
Projects window.
To convert a
user-defined
filter into one
that all users
Choose to replace the can access,
activities that appear in select it, then
the layout or highlight a click Make
subset of the activities in Global.
the layout.
You can also customize individual filters when creating tracking layouts or
reports (using the Report Wizard).

To view a user-defined or Create a user-defined filter In the Activities window, click the
global filter’s settings Layout Options bar, then choose Filters. You can also click the Display
before applying it, select it, Options bar from the Projects window and choose Filter By, Customize.
then click Modify. To view Click New. Type a filter name. Click the Parameter cell and select a data
the criteria for a predefined item. Double-click the Is cell to select a filtering criteria. Specify a value
filter, first copy and paste it.
in the Value field. If the values require a specific entry, you can select from
The filter is copied to the
a drop-down list. For example, if filtering by activity type, you must select
user-defined list, which you
can then modify. from a list of the available types.
Click Add to define multiple selection criteria. Specify whether all criteria
must be met or at least one criteria.
If you specify that all criteria must be met, each

statement is joined with an “And.” If any criteria can
be met, an “Or” is used.
You can “nest” criteria to create multiple levels of selections. If you

specify the topmost parameter as All of the Following, each successive
level selects from only the activities/projects that meet the criteria of
previous levels. If you specify Any of the Following as the highest
parameter, each group of criteria is separated by an “Or.”

A second set of criteria is

joined by an And because
All of the Following is
specified as the highest
parameter. This filter
selects all activities with
negative float that belong
to the Specifications
project and have either a
testing or marketing
resource assigned.
To “nest” a set of criteria within another

set, select the line of criteria, then use
the arrow keys to indent it.
Remove filters Click the Layout Options bar, then choose Filter. To
remove a specific filter, clear the Select checkbox for the filter you want to
remove. To remove all filters, mark the All Activities or All Projects
checkbox. To preview your changes, click Apply.
Delete user-defined activity filters Click the Layout Options bar,

then choose Filter. Select the filter you want to delete, then click Delete.
You can delete only user-defined filters.

Combining Filters
To create a filter that selects any activity from one selection criteria and
any activity from another selection criteria, you must define two separate
filters and then combine them when you run the filters. For example, to
select any activity belonging to the Corporate IT group that is not
complete, you might create one filter that selects any activity that falls
under various WBS levels (specific to the Corporate IT group), and
another filter that selects any activity with remaining labor units greater
than zero. To run the filters, choose All Selected Filters and mark the
checkboxes for the two filters on the Filters dialog box.
Displays the name of the filter

currently applied to the layout.

Customizing Layouts
This chapter describes how to customize
In this chapter layout rows and columns, set the timescale,
modify Gantt Chart bars, specify the look of
Modifying Columns
Activity Network boxes, and modify Resource
Adjusting the Timescale
and Activity Usage Profile settings to help you
Formatting Gantt Charts
monitor project performance.
Formatting Activity Network
Layouts
Refer to “Printing Layouts and Reports” on
Modifying Resource and Activity
Usage Profile Settings page 491 for instructions on setting page and
print options, previewing and printing layouts
and reports, and publishing layouts and reports
in HTML format.
Modifying Columns
You can customize the look and content of the columns included in tables
and spreadsheets in the Activities window. Choose which columns you
want to include; change the column widths, the order in which columns
are displayed, and the row height; specify column fonts and colors; edit
column titles; and copy column formats from other layouts.
To move a column, Click a column title to toggle the sort

click and drag it to a order from ascending to descending.
new location. The down arrow indicates that the
data are sorted in descending order.
You can also customize

the columns displayed in
most windows, such as
Projects, Resources,
WBS, and Issues.
To view more columns, click and drag

the divider bar.

Customizing Layouts 429
Add or remove columns In the Activities window, click the Layout

Options bar, then choose Columns.
To include a column in the layout, select it in The sequence of columns in the

the Available Options list, then click the right layout will be the same as their
arrow. To remove a column from a layout, order in this list. Click the up and
select it in the Selected Options list, then click down arrows to move columns
the left arrow. Click the double-arrows to add higher or lower in the list.
or remove all columns at once.
Copy column format from another layout In the Columns dialog

box, click the Copy From button. Select the layout and click Open.
Edit column titles, widths, and alignments In the Available

Options or Selected Options area of the Columns dialog box, select the
column name you want to change. Click Edit Column. Type the new
name, then specify the maximum number of characters for the column
width. Choose how the title will be aligned in the column header.

Change column fonts, colors, and row height From the Activities
window, click the Layout Options bar, then choose Table Font and Row.
To change a font, click the Font button, then select a new font. To change a
color, click the Color button, then select a new color.
Click these fields to

customize the font and
color of your table.
Click to restore
the standard table
fonts and colors.
Mark to show the symbols that identify the different

levels of information included in columns.
You can also specify the height for rows:

■ The Keep Current Row Heights option enables you to retain all
custom row heights manually set in the layout during your current
user session.
■ Clear the Keep Current Row Heights checkbox to automatically size
each row based on cell content, font size, and column width or to
specify a height for all rows in the layout. If you choose to Optimize
Height by Row Content, you can set a value to limit the amount of
lines per row that are automatically adjusted during text wrapping.
Manually adjusted row heights are not saved when you save
the layout.

Adjusting the Timescale

Your timescale settings Gantt Charts, Activity and Resource Usage Spreadsheets, and Activity and
significantly affect your Resource Usage Profiles display a timescale that starts just before your
ability to manually plan
future period resource project begins and extends until your finish date. This timescale can be
distribution in the Resource shown in different time units, such as years, quarters, and days. You can
Usage Spreadsheet. For expand or condense the timescale view to control the size of the bars or
details, refer to the “Future
Period Bucket Planning FAQ” columns that appear in the layout.
topic in the Help.
To show data for different

months in the layout, click
and drag a month’s
column.
To manually expand or Change the timescale of a profile, spreadsheet, or Gantt

condense the timescale, Chart In the Activities window, open a profile, spreadsheet, or Gantt
click and drag the date in Chart. Click the Layout Options bar and choose Timescale. In the Projects
a month. You can also window, right-click in the bar area of a Gantt Chart and choose Timescale.
right-click in the Bar area
and choose Timescale to
change the timescale
settings.

To select the date from which the timescale should start for the profile,
spreadsheet, or Gantt Chart, in the Timescale Start field click the Browse
button. Select the date intervals at which data are displayed. If you choose
Day/Shift as the date interval, click the Browse button to select the
corresponding shift in the Shift Calendar field. To change the font and
color settings, click the font button to specify the font style, size, and color
for the timescale and column headings. Click the Default Font button to
change the timescale font and color to the default settings. Choose to
display Primary or Ordinal Dates. If showing Primary Dates, choose the
format in which to display date intervals: Calendar, Fiscal, or Week of
Year. If the profile or spreadsheet is displaying past period actual values,
choose a financial period Date Interval.
Choose to show two or three

time units on the timescale.
The Date Interval options differ

depending on the Type you
choose. If the profile or
spreadsheet is displaying past
period actual data (rather than
actual to date values), choose
Calendar or Fiscal as the Type. In
the Date Interval field, select a
financial period timescale to view
past period actual data per
financial period. If the profile or
spreadsheet is not displaying
past period actual values, choose
any Type and Date Interval.
Timescale settings apply to both the top and bottom layouts.

Average the timescale for Activity and Resource

Spreadsheets You can display the timescale in the Activity and
Resource Spreadsheet based on a calculated average. Mark the Base On
Hours Per Timeperiod checkbox to divide the timescale interval totals by
automatic increments, based on the date interval selected. When you
choose this option, the Divide Interval Totals By field displays the division
increment based on the division increment specified in User Preferences
for the corresponding date interval: 1h for Hour date interval, 2h for Shift
date interval, 8h for Day date interval, 40h for week date interval, and so
on.
Mark to specify the values

you want to use to divide
the timescale interval totals
in the Divide Interval Totals
By field.
Specify the unit of measure
for the timescale intervals.

Formatting Gantt Charts

A bar in a Gantt Chart can represent many things, such as a milestone,
early and late dates for an activity, or summarized data. To visually
distinguish the different bars included in a Gantt Chart, specify unique
colors, shapes, and patterns. You can display the Gantt Chart in the
Projects window when reviewing the EPS, or in the Activities window
when reviewing specific projects.
Add and delete bars Click the Layout Options bar (Activities
window) or Display Options bar (Projects window), then choose Bars.
Click Add. Type a name for the new bar, then select the timespan the bar
represents from the Timescale drop-down list. Double-click the Filter
field, then mark each filter you want to apply. Click OK.
To delete a bar, select it in the Bars dialog box, then click Delete.
Mark to
show
or hide a
bar.
Use
these
fields to
change
the
selected
bar’s
shape,
color,
To combine bars, specify the same row number for each
and
one. For example, to display the Actual Bar and Remaining
pattern.
Bar on the same line, specify Row 1 for each bar.

Change a Gantt Chart bar’s timespan Click the Layout Options bar
(Activities window) or Display Options bar (Projects window), then
choose Bars. Select the Gantt Chart bar for which you want to change the
timescale. Double-click the Timescale column, then select the new
timescale.
To represent this value: Select this bar:
Start Date to Finish Date Current Bar
Percent Complete % Complete Bar
Performance Percent Complete Performance %

Complete Bar
Planned Start Date to Planned Finish Date Plan Bar
Actual Start Date to Actual Finish Date Actual Bar
Remaining Start Date to Remaining Finish Date Remain Bar
Primary Baseline Planned Start Date to Primary Primary Baseline Bar

Baseline Planned Finish Date
Secondary Baseline Planned Start Date to Secondary Secondary Baseline
Baseline Planned Finish Date Bar
Tertiary Baseline Planned Start Date to Tertiary Tertiary Baseline Bar

Baseline Planned Finish Date
Early Start Date to Early Finish Date Early Bar
Late Start Date to Late Finish Date Late Bar
Remaining Finish Date to Late Finish Date Float Bar
Remaining Finish Date to Late Finish Date with Neg Float Bar
Remaining after the late date
User start and end dates defined in the activity User Defined Bars
columns
Apply Gantt Chart settings from another layout In the Bars

dialog box (Activities window), click Copy From. Select the layout with
the Gantt Chart settings you want to apply. To apply the selected layout’s
settings and close the dialog box, click Open.

Change a Gantt bar’s style In the Bars dialog box, select the Gantt
Chart bar you want to change. Click the Bar Style tab. To specify the
shape, color, and pattern of the bar’s Start Endpoint (first field), the height
and thickness of the bar (second field), and the Finish Endpoint (end field),
click each corresponding field and select a shape.
Change a Gantt bar’s settings In the Bars dialog box (Activities

window), select the Gantt bar you want to change. Click the Bar Settings
tab. In the Grouping Band Settings section, mark the Show Bar When
Collapsed checkbox to include the selected bar when you display
summary level information. Mark Show Bar for Grouping Bands to
display the selected bar as a summary bar only.
Select how to show activity nonwork time in the Bar Necking Settings
section. Mark the Calendar Nonwork Time checkbox to show the activity
calendar’s nonwork time as a neck in the selected bar. Mark the Activity
Nonwork Intervals checkbox to show the selected bar’s nonwork time
based on the activity’s suspend/resume dates and other gaps of time, such
as when using out of sequence progress.
Change a Gantt Chart bar’s label You can choose to display a bar
label, which acts like a title in describing the bar’s purpose. In the Bars
dialog box, select the Gantt Chart bar you want to change. Click the Bar
Labels tab. To add a label, click Add. Double-click the Label field, then
select the label value. Click in the Font field to modify the font for the
label. To remove a label, select it in the Bar Labels tab, then click Delete.
To change the position of a label, select it, then double-click the Position
column and select a new position.
Display notebook items in the Gantt Chart You can attach

notebook items to the bars in a Gantt Chart. Notebook items might include
anticipated problems, core requirements, entry criteria, exit criteria,
metrics, scope, status, and other information. You can print notebook
items with the layout, or publish them with the layout to the project Web
site. In the Bars dialog box, click the Bar Labels tab. To add a notebook
item, click Add. Select a position for the label, then select a notebook item
from the drop-down list.
You can attach notebook items to Gantt Chart bars in the Bar
Labels tab. Only one notebook item can be attached to each
bar in the Gantt Chart.

Set the default size for notebook items in the Gantt Chart In
the Bars dialog box, click Options. Click the General tab. Type or select a
new width and height for the notebook items you want to display in the
Gantt Chart.
These settings are used only the first time a notebook item is
displayed next to the bar. Once you resize the notebook item
manually, the default settings are disregarded.
You can also click the Show or hide relationship lines in the Gantt Chart In the Bars
Relationship Lines button dialog box, click Options. Click the General tab. Mark the Show
in the toolbar to show and Relationships checkbox to display relationship lines in the Gantt Chart, or
hide relationship lines. clear the checkbox to hide relationship lines.
In the Activities view, mark

to show relationships
between activities.
These settings are used

only the first time a
notebook item is displayed
next to the bar. Once you
resize the notebook item
manually, the default
settings are disregarded.
Show or hide the Gantt Chart legend In the Bars dialog box, click
Options. Click the General tab. Mark the Show Legend checkbox to
display the Gantt Chart legend, or clear the checkbox to hide the Gantt
Chart legend.
Set the text limit for bar labels in the Gantt Chart In the Bars
dialog box, click Options. Click the General tab. To limit the amount of
text characters that show on the bars, mark the Limit Text Label
Characters To checkbox and then type or select the character limit at
which you want to allow the text label to be displayed.

When showing collapsed Customize collapsed bars in the Gantt Chart You can format
bars, only Notebook Items collapsed bars to display as a single bar or as individual bars in the Gantt
that contain all text will Chart in the Activities window. In the Bars dialog box, click Options.
display. Click the Collapsed Bars tab. Choose the Collapse to Grouping Bands
option to display the activity bars as a single bar. If the Show
Relationships checkbox in the General tab is marked, you can mark the
Show Relationships for Collapsed Bars to show relationship lines from the
collapsed bar to other collapsed and individual bars.
In the Show Bar Necking For section, mark the Calendar Nonwork Time
checkbox to show nonwork time from the activity’s calendar as a neck, or
thin bar, on the collapsed bar. Mark the Activity Nonwork Intervals
checkbox to show a neck, or thin bar, for activity and/or calendar nonwork
time, including suspend/resume dates.
Choose to place each

individual bar as close to the
grouping band as possible,
under its timescale date.
Mark to allow bar labels

and bars to overlap when
minimizing space in the
Gantt Chart.
The collapsed Bar tab is available when formatting bars in the

Activities window.
Customize the data date line You can change the style, size, and
color of the data date line to more easily distinguish it on-screen and in
printouts. In the Bars dialog box, click Options. Click the Data Date tab.
To change the style of the data date line, select a style from the drop down
list. The line can be solid, or contain a series of dashes and dots. To change
the thickness of your data date line, select a value between 1 and 10 pixels
in the Size field. This option only applies to the solid line style. Click in
the Color field to select a color from the color palette.

If your line style is

something other than
the solid line and you
increase the size to a
number greater than
one, the bar style
switches to a solid line.
Change the background lines in the Gantt Chart In the Bars

dialog box, click Options. Click the Sight Lines tab. To show background
horizontal lines before every Summary bar, mark the Show Major Lines
checkbox in the Horizontal Lines section and then select a line style from
the drop-down list. To show background horizontal lines before every X
number of rows, mark the Show Minor Lines Every checkbox and then
type or select the row interval at which you want to the minor lines to be
displayed. Next, select a line style from the drop-down list.
To show background major vertical lines for every X amount of time,

mark the Show Major Lines checkbox in the Vertical Lines section, and
then type or select the number of intervals and time unit to display the
major vertical lines. Next, select a line style for the vertical lines from the
drop down list. To show background minor vertical lines before every X
amount of time, mark the Show Minor Lines Every checkbox and then
type or select the number of intervals and time unit to display the minor
vertical lines. Next, select a line style from the drop-down list.

Display the sight

lines based on
the selected time
unit.
Highlight a timeperiod in a Gantt Chart Use the Curtain

Attachment dialog box to highlight a specific timeperiod in a Gantt Chart.
In the Activities window, choose View, Attachments, Curtain, Add
Curtain. Mark the Display Curtain Attachment checkbox. Click the
Browse buttons to select the start and finish dates. Click Delete to remove
the curtain from the layout. In the layout, to manually shift the curtain,
move the mouse cursor over the curtain and click and drag it to the new
dates. To change the start and finish dates of the display, click and drag the
sides of the curtain to the new dates.
To hide all curtains displayed in the layout, choose View, Attachments,

Curtain, Hide All. To display curtains that may be hidden in the layout,
choose View, Attachments, Curtain, Show All. Double-click on the curtain
to edit the curtain date range, color and fill pattern.
Clear to hide the

curtain attachment
in the Gantt Chart.
Click to select the

color for the curtain
Click to select the
attachment.
curtain pattern.

Add text to a Gantt Chart Use the Text Attachment dialog box to
create formatted text and insert it in a Gantt Chart. The text displays in the
foreground of the Gantt Chart, whenever you click in the layout. In the
Activities window, select the activity to which you want to add text. Click
the Layout Options bar and choose Attachments, Text.
Click to select the text’s

font and style.
Modify and remove text in a Gantt Chart In the Gantt Chart,

double-click the text to select it, then modify it in the Text Attachment
dialog box. To manually shift the text attachment, move the mouse cursor
over the text, click to select the attachment, and drag it to the new location.
To remove a text attachment in the Gantt Chart, click the text attachment
you want to remove, then click Delete.

Formatting Activity Network Layouts

The Activity Network layout displays a project as a diagram of activities
and relationships, according to the work breakdown structure (WBS). You
can control nearly every aspect of the Activity Network, including the
appearance of activities, the contents of activity boxes, and the spacing
between activities.
You can use an Activity Network layout to

■ Easily view relationships among activities and the flow of work
through a project
■ Examine and edit an activity and its predecessors and successors
■ Focus on the driving relationship path
An Activity Network box visually represents a project activity. When

customizing boxes, you can specify particular fonts and colors, set spacing
and positioning, and copy styles from another layout.

Activity ID Total Float
Planned Duration
Activity Name
Remaining Duration
Early Start Early Finish
Choose an Activity Network box template With an Activity

Network layout displayed in the Activities window, click the Layout
Options bar, then choose Activity Network, Activity Network Options.
Click the Activity Box Template tab.
Click to display a list of predefined

activity box templates.
Click to customize the

selected activity box’s
font and colors.
Click to customize the selected

activity box template.
Customize an Activity Network box template You can use one of

the predefined activity box templates, or customize your own. With an
Activity Network layout displayed in the Activities window, click the
Layout Options bar, then choose Activity Network, Activity Network
Options. Click the Activity Box Template tab. From the drop-down list,
select a template that is similar to the one you want to create, then click
Box Template. You can add rows for inserting new fields and determine
how high and wide the field cells should occupy within the activity box.

Click to add a
new row to the
activity box.
Use the Width and

Height fields to
customize the size
of the new data
item’s cell.
Double-click in Field Name field and
choose the data item to add to the box.
Customize the Activity Network layout With an Activity Network

layout displayed in the Activities window, click the Layout Options bar,
then choose Activity Network, Activity Network Options. Click the
Activity Network Layout tab.
Aligns activity boxes towards

the top of the Activity Network
window, in relation to their
predecessors/successors
Centers activity boxes in

relation to their
predecessors/successors
Choose to display the

activity networks with the
longest or shortest path of
linked activities on top.
When an activity’s predecessor/successor is not immediately adjacent to

its activity in the Activity Network, the relationship line may not be visible
because of other activity boxes. To reposition activity boxes so that all
relationship lines are visible, mark the Adjust to Show All Relationships
checkbox.

To have the module automatically determine the view that best shows all
activity boxes in the layout after you have reorganized it, mark the Always
Zoom to Best Fit After Reorganize checkbox.
To have the module indicate progress by drawing an X on a completed

activity or a slash on an activity in progress, mark the Show Progress
checkbox.
To change the amount of vertical space between activity boxes in the

Activity Network, specify a spacing factor that is a percentage of the
height of activity boxes in the Activity Network table.
To change the horizontal space between activity boxes in the Activity

Network, specify a horizontal spacing factor that is a percentage of the
width of activity boxes in the Activity Network table.
Copy from another Activity Network layout With an Activity

Network layout displayed in the Activities window, click the Layout
Options bar, then choose Activity Network, Activity Network Options.
Click Copy From. Select the Activity Network layout whose attributes you
want to copy. Click Open.
In the Activity Network, when you select a data item for

grouping, the hierarchy on the left side of the window contains
the WBS so you can filter activities according to the hierarchy.
Save an Activity Network layout You can save the Activity Network
layout as an .ANP file to use later or email to another project user. To save
an Activity Network layout, click the Layout Options bar, then choose
Activity Network, Save Network Positions.
Open a saved Activity Network layout To open the saved layout,

click the Layout Options bar, then choose Activity Network, Open
Network Positions. Select the file and click Open.

Modifying Resource and Activity Usage Profile Settings

The Activity Usage Profile displays a time distribution of activity units
and costs in a Bar Chart format. You can customize all aspects of this
display, and you can also filter the information it contains.
The Resource Usage Profile displays a time distribution of resource units

and costs in relation to activities in a Bar Chart format. You can also
customize and filter the settings for this layout.
You can customize Resource and Activity Usage Profiles in several

different ways. Select the type of information you want to display, change
the timescale, and/or customize the bars and background.
You can also click this button to display the

Resource Usage Profile in the bottom layout.
Click the Display

Options bar and
choose Show All
Projects to show
data for all projects.
If you do not choose
this option, only
data for open
projects are shown.
To move the legend, click and hold the
mouse button, and drag the legend
anywhere in the Profile.
When showing all projects, resource distributions are calculated

at the resource level. When showing open projects, calculations
are made at the activity assignment level.

Format resource data settings Display the Resource Usage Profile

in the bottom pane of the Activities window. Click the Layout Options bar,
choose Show on Bottom, Resource Usage Profile. Next, click the Display
Options bar for the Resource Usage Profile, and choose Resource Usage
Profile Options. Click the Data tab, then specify the type of data to display
in the profile and the way it will be represented. You can also right-click in
the Resource Usage Profile area and choose Resource Usage Profile
Options. The data options differ slightly depending on whether you are
showing data for all projects or only open projects.
Mark to display past period

actual values (rather than
actual to date values).
hoose the type of information to

display in the profile.
Mark the checkbox for each

type of cost/unit value to
display. Determine whether
you want to show these data
by date (as a bar) or as a
curve representing
cumulative value. Select the
color for each bar/curve.
When showing all projects,

mark to show resource/role
limits, available units, and
overallocation. Mark to show
allocation limit and overtime
when showing open projects
only.
For detailed instructions on You can also show the limit and overallocation when displaying
customizing Activity and open projects only. You can only show the planning limit when
Resource Usage Profiles, displaying data in units.
refer to the Help.
The Resource Usage Profile displays past period actual data

for the Actual, Show Overallocation, and Show Available Units
options if you choose the option to Display Actual using
Financial Period data.

When showing all project data, choose how to display remaining unit or
cost distributions for early and late dates.
Format the resource data settings for the stacked histogram

Display the Resource Usage Profile in the bottom pane of the Activities
window. Click the Layout Options bar, choose Show on Bottom, Resource
Usage Profile. Next, click the Display Options bar and choose Stacked
Histogram. Then click the Display Options bar and choose Resource
Usage Profile Options. Click the Data tab, then specify the type of data to
display in the profile and the way it will be represented. You can also
right-click in the Resource Usage Profile area and choose Resource Usage
Profile Options.


Choose the type of

information to display in the
profile.
Choose to show one total

curve or individual curves
representing cumulative
value in the color selected
for each resource filter.
Add a filter to select

the resources to
include in the
profile. Select a
pattern and color for
each resource filter.
Use the arrow keys to

arrange the order you want
to display the resource
filters in the stacked
histogram.
In the profile, the

legend displays the
resource filter/group
name as specified in
the options.
For detailed instructions Double-click on the individual bar to display the value for
on customizing Stacked each resource/role group for the selected time period.
Histograms, refer to the
Help.

Format resource graph settings Click the Graph tab. Mark the
checkbox next to each time unit (major or minor) for which you want to
display a vertical line in the background. Choose the type of horizontal
line you want to display for each number along the side of the profile, then
select the line color. If the option is available, mark the Show Legend
checkbox to display a legend for the profile’s bars. To display the profile’s
bars in 3D, mark the 3D Bars checkbox. To change the profile’s
background color, click Background Color and select a new color. To
divide the timescale into increments you specify, mark the Calculate
Average checkbox. Specify the Unit of Measure for the timescale
increments.
Options when Stacked Histogram is selected for

the Resource Usage Profile.
Specify the value the module

will use to divide the
timescale interval totals. Or,
display the division
increment based on the
increment specified in the
User Preferences for the
corresponding date interval.
For more information about Set user preferences for resource analysis Click Preferences in
setting user preferences, see the Resource Usage Profile Options dialog box to specify whether to
“Setting User Preferences” on
page 49. include data from open and closed projects, or only the projects currently
open in the module, when calculating remaining units and costs. (Closed
projects are any projects in the enterprise project structure (EPS) that are
not currently open in the module.) For data displayed in the Resource
Usage Profile, Resource Usage spreadsheet, tracking layouts, and time-
distributed Primavera Web application charts, specify the following:
• choose to use remaining or forecast start and finish dates to

display resource units and cost values

• select the interval at which live resource and cost calculations are
performed
• choose to display role limits based on custom role limits defined in
the Roles dictionary or based on the limit defined for each role’s
primary resource
Format activity data settings Display the Activity Usage Profile in

the bottom pane of the Activities window. Click the Layout Options bar,
Show on Bottom, Activity Usage Profile. Click the Display Options bar
for the Activity Usage Profile, choose Activity Usage Profile Options.
Click the Data tab. Mark the checkbox next to each type of filter you want
to use to select the data included in the profile. Then, select the pattern that
will be used to display each data type. Mark the Total checkbox to display
the total cost. Select more than one filter to see a combination of values in
the Activity Usage Profile.

Choose the type of information

to display in the profile.


type of cost/unit value to
display. Determine whether
you want to show these data
by date (as a bar) or as a
curve representing the
cumulative value. Select the
color for each bar/curve.

type of cumulative curve to
display. Select the color for
each curve.
The Activity Usage Profile displays past period actual data for
the Actual bar and curve and the Planned Value, Earned Value,
and Estimate at Completion curves if you choose the option to
Display Actual and Earned Value using Financial Period data.

Format activity graph settings Click the Graph tab. Mark the
checkbox next to each time unit (major or minor) for which you want to
display a vertical line in the background. Mark the checkbox next to the
type of horizontal line you want to display for each number along the side
of the profile. Then select the line color. To display a legend for the
profile’s bars, mark the Show Legend checkbox. To display the profile’s
bars in 3D, mark the 3D Bars checkbox. To change the profile’s
background color, click Background Color and select a new color. To
display the timescale in increments you specify, mark the Calculate
Average checkbox. Specify the Unit of Measure for the timescale
increments
Specify the value the module

will use to divide the
timescale interval totals. Or,
display the division increment
based on the increment
specified in the User
Preferences for the
corresponding date interval.

Customizing Reports 455
Customizing Reports
Reporting is a key part of monitoring a project
In this chapter and communicating its progress to team
members and executive management. This
Reports Overview
chapter discusses how to open standard
Opening Reports
reports, create new reports, and modify
Creating and Modifying Reports
existing reports. It also describes how you can
Using the Report Editor
organize reports in hierarchical groups.
Adding Data Sources and Rows to
Reports
Refer to “Printing Layouts and Reports” on
Adding Text Cells to Reports
page 491 for instructions on setting page and
Sorting Report Data Sources
print options, previewing and printing layouts
Customizing a Report with the
Report Editor: an Example and reports, and publishing layouts and reports
Setting Up Batch Reports in HTML format.

Reports Overview
You can create new reports, or modify existing ones, using the Report
Wizard or Report Editor. A large library of standard reports is provided
for your use.
The Report Wizard enables you to create a wide variety of complex

reports very rapidly using a wizard-style interface. You can also use the
wizard to modify reports created using the wizard.
The Report Editor is a “what-you-see-is-what-you-get” (WYSIWYG)

report writer that allows you to group, sort, filter, and roll up project
information. You can also display time distributions for units and costs,
and include graphics and HTML links in reports. Use the Report Editor to
modify and custom tailor reports created in the Report Wizard.
The report icon shows whether it was created in the Report Wizard or the
Report Editor.
Indicates the
reports were
created using
the Report
Wizard
Indicates the
reports were
created using
the Report
Editor
After you create a report, you can preview, print, or save it to a text or
HTML file. Saving the report to a file enables you to import data to a
spreadsheet program, e-mail it, archive it, or publish it on a Web site.

Opening Reports
Use the Reports window to create, edit, run, and delete global and project
reports. You can also use the Reports window to export and import reports
to and from other module installations.
Open the Reports window Choose Tools, Reports, Reports.
Reports can be global or project specific.
Click the Display Print

Options bar to sort single or
and filter the batch
reports listed in this reports.
window and to
define screen fonts Click to
and colors. build
reports
using the
Report
Editor.
Click to
easily
create ad
hoc
reports.
Each report can belong to one report group. To add, modify, or

delete these groups, choose Tools, Reports, Report Groups.

Creating and Modifying Reports

For additional information You can create and modify reports using the Report Wizard or Report
about creating and modifying Editor. Use the Report Wizard to quickly create a report using the wizard
reports using the Report
Wizard and Report Editor, interface. Use the Report Editor to modify and custom tailor your reports
refer to the Help. according to your needs.
The Report Wizard quickly guides you through creating ad hoc reports
and enables you to group, sort, and filter the data. If a report is modified
using the Report Editor, and you decide to change it again using the
Report Wizard, the changes made in the Report Editor will be lost.
To include a new report in a particular report group, select the

report group in the Reports window before you start the wizard.
When you finish creating the report, it will be saved in the
selected report group.
Create a report with the Report Wizard Choose Tools, Report

Wizard, and follow the prompts. Using the Wizard, you can select
multiple subject areas for the report. For each selected subject area you
can customize columns and apply group, sort, and filter options. When
you are finished defining the report parameters, click Finish.
The subject ...determines the

area selected additional subject areas
here... available for the report.

Select the subject area to

configure. You can customize
columns and apply group,
sort, and filter options.
Click to change the name of a field

as it appears on the report.

For more information on Create a report with the Report Editor To create a blank report
using the Report Editor, refer with the Report Editor, you need to select an existing report first. If you do
to the next section, “Using the
Report Editor”. not want to modify your original report, make a copy of it before you edit
it with the Report Editor. Once you select a report, click Modify, and
confirm that you want to use the Report Editor. Within the Report Editor,
click the new report icon and confirm your decision. You have now a blank
report that you can customize.
Click the New Report

icon to create a blank
report.
Modify a report You can modify reports using the Report Wizard or the
Report Editor. In the Reports window, select the name of the report you
want to modify. To use the wizard, click the Wizard button. To use the
Report Editor, click Modify.

Using the Report Editor

The Report Editor is an elaborate tool that enables you to create highly
customized, custom-tailored reports. The Report Editor allows you to
create, edit, and organize report components, where a report component
may be a data source, a row, or a cell. The Report Editor consists of the
following main parts: Toolbar, Ruler, Left Margin, Report Canvas, and
the right-click menu.
In the Reports window, select a report, then click Modify to open it with
the Report Editor.
Toolbar
Ruler
Left Margin
Report Canvas

Using the Toolbar The Toolbar provides shortcuts to the main

functions of the Report Editor.
Toolbar
The New Report button deletes the displayed report’s settings

and creates a new report.
The Add Data Source button adds a data source, or category

of information, to the displayed report. This button is
available only if the selected report area is a Detail Area.
The Add Row button adds a row to the selected area of the
displayed report.
The Add Text Cell button adds a text cell to the selected row.

The Add Image Cell button adds an image cell to the selected
row.
The Add Line Cell button dds a line cell to the selected row.
Line cells contain horizontal lines only.
The Print Preview button displays a preview of the displayed

report.
The Properties button allows you to define the selected report

component's properties. You can also double-click a
component.
The Report Wizard button allows you to modify the current

report settings using the Report Wizard. Launching the
Report Wizard within the Report Editor removes any report
settings that were added using the Report Editor. Report
settings configured by the Report Wizard will not be
removed.
Using the Ruler The Ruler indicates the horizontal position of each
report component. A blue, shaded area indicates the position and width of
the selected cell. A red, vertical bar indicates your cursor’s position on the
Report Canvas.
Using the Left Margin The Left Margin helps you identify each data
source and row. To help you identify data sources, the Left Margin
displays each data source’s name and grouping, if any, in the upper-left
corner of the data source area. To help you identify rows, the Left Margin
displays each row’s type in the upper-left corner of the row. The icon
indicates rows that are part of a header area. The icon indicates rows
that are part of a footer area.
Using the Report Canvas The Report Canvas enables you to view
each component’s position in the overall report. The Report Canvas also
provides visual cues that identify each component’s properties as follows:

■ Data sources are color-coded. If a data source is embedded, or nested,

in a parent data source, then each data source displays in an original
color.
■ Text cells are coded according to the type of data they report. To
determine a text cell’s type, you can refer to the icons that appear in
the upper-right corner of the cell.
- indicates a Custom Text cell, or a cell that contains text you
specify.
- indicates a Field Data cell, or a cell that compiles and reports
information from a field you specify.
- indicates a Field Title cell, or a cell that contains the name of a
field you specify.
- indicates a Variable cell, or a cell that reports information related
to the overall report, rather than a specific data source.
Text cells that appear in red indicate that the cell’s properties either have
not been defined or conflict with the properties of the data source that
contains the cell. To view a cell’s properties, double-click the cell.
Selecting a report component A blue border indicates the selected

report component. To select a component, click the component. To
increase the scope of the selected area, press Esc. For example, if a text
cell is selected, pressing Esc selects the report row that contains it.
Pressing Esc again selects the data source that contains the row.
Double-click a component Modifying properties In addition to viewing a report’s layout, you can
to open the Properties also use the Report Canvas to edit a report directly. To view a
window. While the window component’s properties, or settings, double-click the component. You can
is open, you can select any also use the context sensitive help if you right-click on a component.
component in the Report
Canvas and modify its
Deleting a component Some of the components you can delete by
properties.
pressing the Delete button or choosing Delete from the right-click menu.
However, if you cannot delete the selected component this way, press ESC
first to increase the scope of the selected area, and press Delete again.

Adding Data Sources and Rows to Reports

Use the Report Editor to add or remove data sources and rows. The Report
Canvas provides you the following main areas for data sources:
Area Description
Page Header Report components that appear at the top of each page of the
Area compiled report. The Page Header Area may contain rows
and cells. The Page Header Area is different from the
standard header you specify in the Page Setup dialog box. If
you specify a standard header, the standard header appears at
the top of the page, followed by the report's Page Header, in
the compiled report.
Report Header Report components that appear before the compiled report's
Area details and on the first page of the report only. The Report
Header Area may contain rows and cells.
Data Source If the report contains a data source, report components that
Header Area appear before the data source’s records in the compiled
report. The Data Source Header Area may contain rows and
cells.
Detail Area The area where most report information is compiled. If the
report contains a data source, the Detail Area indicates which
information the data source compiles and the information’s
layout in the compiled report. The Detail Area may contain
data sources, rows, and cells.
Data Source If the report contains a data source, report components that
Footer Area appear after the data source’s details in the compiled
report.The Data Source Footer Area may contain rows and
cells.
Report Footer Report components that appear after the compiled report's
Area details and on the last page of the report only. The Report
Footer Area may contain rows and cells.
Page Footer Area Report components that appear at the bottom of each page of
the compiled report. The Page Footer Area may contain rows
and cells.The Page Footer Area is different than the standard
footer you specify in the Page Setup dialog box. If you
specify a standard footer, the standard footer appears at the
bottom of the page, after the report's Page Footer, in the
compiled report.

You can only add a data Add data sources to reports

source to a report’s Detail 1 In the Report Editor, click the gray Detail Area, then click .
Area, or to another data
source’s Detail Area. You can also use the right-click menu on the Detail Area.
2 Click the Source tab, then, in the Loop Through list, select the type of
information you want to report in the new data source.
To group the data source’s information according to a related
category, click the Group By arrow, then select a grouping category.
The list of available categories reflects the data source you select from
the Loop Through list.
Embed data sources By embedding data sources, or adding data

sources to other data sources, you can outline relationships between
different types of information. For example, if you embed an activity data
source in a WBS data source, the compiled report will list activity infor-
mation according to WBS.
1 Click the Detail Area of the data source in which you want to embed
the new data source, then click .
2 Click the Source tab, then, in the Loop Through list, select the type of
information you want to report in the new data source. The list of
available data sources reflects the new data source’s relationship to
the parent data source.

To group the data source’s information according to a related

category, click the Group By arrow, then select a grouping category.
The list of available categories reflects the data source you select from
the Loop through list.
Define layout options for data sources

1 Double-click the data source whose layout options you want to
define.
2 Click the Source tab.
3 Select when you want to insert page breaks in the compiled report.
4 To specify the number of hierarchy levels you want to include in the
compiled report, specify a number in the Max level field. To include
all hierarchy levels, select 0.
The Max level field is available only if the data source reports hierar-
chical information.
5 To report information in hierarchy order, mark the Organize Hierar-
chically checkbox.
The Organize Hierarchically checkbox is available only if the data
source reports hierarchical information.
6 To hide, or exclude, the data source’s report components if the data
source does not produce any records, mark the Hide If Empty
checkbox. This includes the data source’s header and footer.
7 To hide, or exclude, parent data source records from the compiled
report, if its children data sources do not produce any records, mark
the Hide Record If No Children checkbox.

The Report Editor does Add rows to reports

not display the actual 1 In the Report Editor, click the report area to which you want to add a
height, or amount of
row, then click .
vertical space, the row will
occupy in the compiled 2 Click .
report. To view the row’s
actual height in the 3 Click the Row tab, then type the height of the new row.
compiled report, click Print To change the row’s background color, click Color, then select a new
Preview.
color.
Copy (or cut) and paste rows

1 Right-click the row you want to copy (or cut) and paste, then choose
Copy (or Cut).
To copy/cut a row that contains cells, click a cell in the row, press
Esc, then press Ctrl+C to copy or Ctrl+X to cut.
2 Right-click the report area where you want to paste the copied/cut
row, then choose Paste.
Remove rows from reports Right-click the row you want to remove,
then choose Delete. To delete a row that contains cells, click a cell in the
row, press Esc, then press Delete.

Adding Text Cells to Reports

The Report Editor enables you to add four types of text cells to reports:
Field Title cells, Field Data cells, Variable cells, and Custom Text cells.
Field Title cells contain the name of a Project Management module

field you specify. Field Title cells are helpful when you want to add a label
to a column or another text cell. Examples of field titles are WBS Code
and Activity Name.
Field Data cells compile and report information from a Project

Management module field you specify. For example, if you add a Field
Data cell that refers to the field WBS Code, then the cell will report codes
for WBS elements.
Variable cells report information related to the overall report, rather

than a specific data source. Report name and page number are examples of
Variable type information.
Custom Text cells contain custom text that you specify.
Select the type of cell you

want to add to the report.

For more information about Add field title or field data cells to reports
adding rows to reports, see
the preceding section. 1 In the Report Editor, select the row to which you want to add a field
title or field data cell.
2 Click .
3 Click the Cell tab, then select Field Title or Field Data as the cell type.
If the cell is part of a data source, select the category of information
that contains the field title you want to report in the cell.
4 Select the field whose title you want to report in the cell for a Field
Title cell; for a Field Data cell, select the field whose information you
want to compile and report in the cell.
Field Title and Field Data are only functional when the selected
report cell is within a data source.
Add variable or custom text cells to reports

1 In the Report Editor, select the row to which you want to add a
variable or custom text cell.
2 Click .
3 Click the Cell tab, select Variable or Custom Text as the cell type.
4 Select the type of variable information you want to report in the cell,
or type the custom text you want to appear in the cell.
Add image cells to reports

1 In the Report Editor, double-click the row to which you want to add
an image cell.
2 Click from the Image tab of the Properties dialog box.
3 Click Select Image, then click Load.

4 Select the drive that contains the image’s file.

5 In the Look in field, double-click the folder(s) that contains the
image’s file, select the file, then click Open.
To expand the image to the size of the selected image cell, mark the
Stretch Image checkbox.
6 Click OK.
The Report Editor supports BMP and JPG files.
You can also change a Define layout options for image cells
cell’s width directly in the 1 Double-click the image cell whose layout options you want to define.
Report Editor. Place your
pointer over the cell’s left 2 Click the Image tab, then click the Image alignment arrow
or right edge. When the
pointer changes to a To use your mouse to drag the cell to the appropriate position in the
double-headed arrow, drag row, select None.
the cell’s edge to a new To position the cell relative to the left margin, select Left, then type
position.
the cell’s left indent in the Left field.
To position the cell flush against the right margin, select Right.
To extend the cell across the entire row, select Center.
3 In the Width field, type the cell’s numeric width, or the distance you
want the cell to occupy between the report’s left and right margins. If
the cell’s alignment is Center, you cannot enter the cell’s width.
Define HTML settings for image cells The Project Management

module enables you to specify how you want to include an image in a
report if you compile the report to an HTML file.
1 Double-click the image cell whose HTML settings you want to
define.
2 Click the Image tab, then click Select Image.
To copy the image’s file, type a location and name for the copied
image file, relative to the report’s HTML directory, in the Relative
Image Path field. Copying an image file allows you to maintain a
stable HTML directory for the report.
To reference the image’s file, rather than copy the file, mark the
Reference Image Instead checkbox, then type the location and name
of the image’s file in the Relative Image Path field. Referencing an
image’s file is helpful when the image’s content frequently changes.

Add line cells to reports

1 In the Report Editor, select the row to which you want to add a line
cell.
2 Click .
3 Click the Line tab, then specify the number of lines to include in the
new line cell.
You can also change a Define layout options for line or text cells
cell’s width directly in the 1 Double-click the line or text cell whose layout options you want to
Report Editor. Place your
define.
pointer over the cell’s left
or right edge. When the 2 To define options for a line cell, click the Line tab, then click the Line
pointer changes to a alignment arrow. To define options for a text cell, click the Cell tab,
double-headed arrow, drag then select the cell alignment.
the cell’s edge to a new
position. To use your mouse to drag the cell to the appropriate position in the
row, select None.
To position the cell relative to the left margin, select Left, then type
the cell’s left indent in the Left field.
To position the cell flush against the right margin, select Right.
To extend the cell, or line, across the entire row, select Center.

3 Type the cell’s numeric width, or the distance you want the cell to
occupy between the report’s left and right margins.
If the cell’s alignment is Center, you cannot enter the cell’s width.
Add borders to text cells in reports

1 In the Report Editor, double-click the text cell to which you want to
add borders.
2 Click the Cell tab, then click Borders.
3 Mark the appropriate checkboxes to add borders to the cell.
Cell borders always appear in black. You cannot change the

color of a cell’s borders.
Clear the appropriate

checkboxes to remove
the cell’s borders.

Format text in text cells

1 Double-click the cell whose text you want to format.
2 Click the Cell tab.
To change the position of the cell’s text relative to the cell’s left and
right edges, select a new alignment.
To apply a style to the cell’s text, select a new font style.
To apply a custom style to the cell’s text, select Custom as the font
style, then click Custom Font to select new formatting options.
Change a text cell’s background color

1 Double-click the text cell whose background color you want to
change.
2 Click the Cell tab, then click Color.
You can use the Color dialog box to either select a color from the
Basic Colors palette or define a custom color with the color spectrum.
To select a color from the Basic Colors palette, under Basic Colors,
click the color you want to apply to the text cell, then click OK.
To define a custom color

1 In the color spectrum, click the color you want to apply, then drag the
slider at the right of the dialog box to adjust the color’s attributes.
You can also type the color’s numeric values in the RGB (Red,
Green, Blue) and HLS (Hue, Luminescence, Saturation) fields.
2 Click Add to Custom Colors, then click OK.
Clear this checkbox to disable

the HTML link for the cell.

The Link Prefix field will Add HTML links to image or text cells
most likely be the URL 1 Double-click the cell to which you want to add an HTML link.
prior to the file you wish to
link to, for example ‘http:// 2 Click the appropriate tab for the type of cell for which you want to
www.foo.com/’. Likewise, add the link: Cell tab for text cells or Image tab for Image cells, then
the Enable Link Field click HTML links.
checkbox and the Link
Suffix field will be used to 3 Type the Internet address of the Web page to which you want the
generate the actual selected text cell to link, or type the prefix of the Internet address to
filename and extension which you want the selected image cell to link.
you wish to link to. If
Enable Link Field is 4 If you want each report record to be a hot-link to another file, mark
marked, then the Link the Enable Link Field checkbox.
Object and Link Field fields To disable the link if a specific field does not produce any records in
will determine the filename
the compiled report, mark the Disable Link If Empty Value checkbox.
and the Link Suffix field will
Select an object, or category of information, and a field from the Link
provide the extension of
the file you wish to link to, Object and Link Field lists. The list of available objects and fields
for example ‘.html’. If reflects the type of information reported by the cell’s row.
Enable Link Field is not 5 Type the suffix of the Internet address to which you want the selected
marked, then the Link
cell to link.
Suffix field will provide both
the filename and extension 6 To create a link to a specific frame in the Web page, if the Web page
of the file you wish to link uses frames, type the name of the frame.
to, for example ‘foo.html’.
Both Link Prefix and Link Suffix are used to build the URL link
for the text or image cell. The URL is built as follows: [Link
Prefix]+[Link Field]+[Link Suffix], if the Enable Link Field
checkbox is marked. If the Enable Link Field checkbox is not
marked, then the URL is built like this: [Link Prefix]+[Link
Suffix].

If the background image is Add background images to reports

smaller than the report’s 1 In the Report Editor, click .
page, the Project
Management module tiles, 2 Click the Report tab, then click Background Image.
or repeats, the image to fill
the report’s background 3 Click Load.
area. If the background 4 Select the drive that contains the image’s file.
image is larger than the
report’s page, the Project 5 Under Look In, double-click the folder(s) that contains the image’s
Management module file, select the file, then click Open.
positions the image in the
upper-left corner of the Remove background images from reports
report page, then excludes
1 In the Report Editor, click .
those areas of the image
that do not fit within the 2 Click the Report tab, then click Background Image.
report’s right and bottom
margins. 3 Click Clear, then click OK.
Copy (or cut) and paste cells

1 Right-click the cell you want to copy (or cut), then choose Copy (or
Cut).
2 Right-click the row in which you want to paste the copied cell, then
choose Paste.
To paste the cell to a row that contains other cells, select a cell in the
row, press Esc, then press Ctrl+V.
Remove cells from reports Right-click the cell you want to remove,
then choose Delete.

Sorting Report Data Sources

You can sort a report’s records by applying a sort order to one or more of
the report’s data sources, and edit a report’s sort order by changing the sort
settings for one or more of the report’s data sources.
Sort a report
1 Double-click the data source whose records you want to sort.
2 Click the Source tab, then click Add.
3 Select the field by which you want to sort the data source’s records.
The list of available sorting fields reflects the sort object you select
from the Sort by Object list.
4 To sort records in ascending order, choose Ascending. To sort records
in descending order, choose Descending.
5 Click OK.
To sort by additional objects and fields, repeat steps 2 through 4.
Edit sort orders for reports Double-click the data source whose sort
order you want to edit; click the Source tab.
■ To add a new field to the sort order, click Add, then type the sort
criteria. Click OK, then change the field’s position in the sort order, if
necessary.
■ To delete a field from the sort order, select a sort row, then click
Delete.
■ To change a data type’s position in the sort order, select its sort row,
then click the appropriate arrow button.
■ To edit a sort row’s sort object or field, select the row, then click Edit.

Customizing a Report with the Report Editor: an

Example
In this example, we use the Report Editor to customize a report, originally
created with the Report Wizard. To view the original report, select the
‘PP-01 EPS, Project Details’ report under the report group Project/WBS
details. The original report, depending on your project data should be
similar to this:

After customizing, the same report has the following layout:
b) Only projects that have more than a) Sorted by Strategic

one activity are displayed. Priority order.
c) Double
line
separator.
c) If Risk Level is ‘High’ d) The new column,

or ‘Very High’, the field Project Status, displays
is highlighted in red. only if the Risk Level is
‘High’ or ‘Very High’.
To customize the original report in the Report Editor:

1 In the Reports window, select the original report created in the Report
Wizard (PP-01 EPS, Project Details).
2 Click Copy.
3 Click Paste.

4 Double-click the name of the copied report and rename it, so you can
remember which one is customized.
5 While the new report is selected, click Modify... .
Since the original report was created in the Report Wizard, a warning
appears that you are about to modify the report. Confirm your
decision by clicking the Yes button.
The Report Editor displays.
Filtering and sorting the data source The current report displays
all projects, regardless how many activities they contain. You may want to
filter the data source to show projects that have more than one activity.
You may also want to sort these projects by Strategic Priority.
To filter and sort the data source:

1 Double-click on the Data Source Header Area.
The Properties window displays.

The selected tab

shows what
component’s
properties you can
modify currently.
Click to edit the filter

criteria for the data
source.
Click to sort the
source data by a field.
2 Click the Edit filter... button.

The current filter criteria displays all Project and EPS nodes but filters
out the WBS nodes.
3 Click Add.
4 Set the filter criteria to show data only if the Total Activities is greater
than one.

5 Change the (Any of the following) logical operator to (All of the

following).
To create a new filter

line, you can copy/
paste an existing one,
and then modify its
properties.
6 Click OK.
7 Click the Add button on the Properties window to sort the data source.
8 Select Project for the Sort by Object field and Strategic Priority for
the Sort by Field.
9 Click OK.
10 Close the Properties window by clicking the x at the top right hand
corner.
11 Click the preview icon to view the current report.
The Report Canvas does not display the actual height, or amount of
vertical space, each report component will occupy in the compiled
report. To view the report's vertical spacing and your progress, you
can always click the preview icon to view the report.

Adding a new filtered column To display the project status, you

have to add a new column to the report. You may want to show the Project
Status field only if the Risk Level is ‘High’ or ‘Very High’.
To add a new filtered column

1 Select the row that you want to add the new column.
The row is highlighted in blue.
2 Right-click the row and choose Add Text Cell.
The Properties window displays, now showing the Cell properties.

3 Set the Cell Object to WBS, and the Cell field to Project Status.
You may want to set the cell properties to adjust position and
alignment as well.
If you accidently moved

or resized a cell, you
can set the exact
position and size here.

4 Click the Edit filter and set the filter criteria to display the cell only if
the Risk Level is ‘High’ or ‘Very High’.
The window title displays

the scope of the filter. In
this case, the filter applies
to the selected Cell.
To quickly create the

second filter condition,
select the first one first,
copy/paste (Ctrl+C/
Ctrl+V) it, then change
the value, ‘Very High’ to
‘High’.
Make sure you set the logical operator to (Any of the following). Note
that this time the filter criteria apply to this cell only and not to the
whole report.
5 Click OK.
6 Close the Properties window.
7 Add a header, titled ‘Project Status’ to the new column.
You can either follow the steps above to add this header to the Project
Status column, or you can copy/paste the Strategic Priority cell first,
then simply move it to the right and edit its properties. These cells are
Custom Texts. Custom Texts do not display data, they show exactly
what you type in the Custom Text field.
8 Click the Preview icon to view the current report.
The new column should display only if the Risk Level is ‘High’ or
‘Very High’.

Highlighting the Risk Level field You may want to call attention to
projects that have a risk level of ‘High’ or ‘Very High’ by displaying the
field value in red. It is not possible to change the property of a field at run-
time but the following tip may help to achieve the same result.
To highlight the Risk Level field in red:

1 Select the Detail Area.
2 Choose Add Row from the right-click menu.
3 Copy the cells from the first row and paste them into the second one.
If you preview the report now, you see double records, since we
created two rows with the exact same data.
4 Double-click the Risk Level cell in the second row.
5 Set the Font Style to Custom, and click Custom Font... to change the
color to red.
Do not close the Properties window yet. You can work on the Report
Canvas while the Properties window is still open. It may speed up
your work with setting properties of different components on the
screen.
6 Click the first row in the Detail Area.
Since the Properties window is still open, it should display the Row
tab now. Make sure you click the row and not a cell in the row.
7 Click the Edit filter... on the Row tab.
8 Set the filter criteria to display data only if the Risk Level is not equal
to ‘High’ or ‘Very High’.

9 Click OK.
This condition allows to display the selected row only if the condition
is true. In this case, the data displays only in this row if the Risk Level
is not equal to ‘Very High’ or ‘High’.
10 Click the second row in the Detail Area.
11 Click Edit filter, and set the filter criteria to show data only if the Risk
Level equals to ‘High’ or ‘Very High’.
12 Close the Properties window and preview the report.
The conditions we set for the rows allow us to show only one row at a
time. If the Risk Level is ‘High’ or ‘Very High’, the second row
displays, if the Risk Level is neither ‘High’ or ‘Very High’, the first
row displays. Since all the cells are the same in the two rows, except
the Risk Level color, it seems as if the cell was highlighted in the
report.

For specific details refer to Working with lines Lines are displayed in Line Cells. You may want
the help. Click the Help to use a double line, instead of a single line under the column headers. To
button on the dialog box to modify line properties, double-click the Line Cell under in the Page
open the context sensitive Header area, and set the number of lines to two.
help.
If you preview the report now, it should resemble to the layout we wanted
to achieve. Close the Report Editor, and confirm that you want to save the
current report. You can now run the report by clicking the Run Report...
button on the Reports view.

Using Report Groups

Report groups are a hierarchical way to organize global and project
reports. Each report can belong to one report group.
Add a report group Choose Tools, Reports, Report Groups. Click

Add, then type the name of the new report group.
Click to list report

groups in ascending or
descending order or as
a hierarchy.
Report groups can have

Click to move
multiple levels.
groups up and
down and to
indent/outdent to
denote hierarchy
level.
Assign a report to a report group Choose Tools, Reports, Reports.

Select the report you want to add to a report group, then click the Browse
button in the Report Group field at the bottom of the Reports window.
Select the group to which you want to add the report, then click Select.
Also use this field to

remove the selected report
from a report group and/or
reassign the report to a
different report group.

Setting Up Batch Reports

Batch groups allow you to run a series of reports at one time. A report can
have only one batch group assignment.
Create a batch report group Choose Tools, Reports, Batch Reports.

Choose Global or Project. Click Add, then type the name of the new
group. Click Close.
Add reports to a batch report group Choose Tools, Reports, Batch

Reports. Select the batch report group, then click Assign. Select the
reports you want to assign to this group and click the Assign button. When
you are finished assigning reports, click the Close button.
Run a batch report From the Reports window, click Run Batch, select
the batch you want to print, then click OK.
Click to run the

batch report.
Select the batch report.

Run a batch report as a service Choose Tools, Job Services, then

click Add. Select Batch Reports in the Service Type field. Specify a
number in the Job # field to indicate the sequence in which the service
should be performed, if more than one service is listed. Type a brief
description of the service in the Job Name field. In the Status field, select
Enabled to activate the batch report service. You can suspend a service at
any time by selecting Disabled in the Status field. In the Run Job area on
the Job Details tab, schedule when the service should be run: every day at
a specific time, or weekly, every two weeks, or monthly on a day and time
you specify.
Click to select the projects/

EPS nodes for which you
want to run the batch report.
Select the batch report you

want the job service to run.
Add a separate job service
for each batch report you
want to run.

client when running jobs. All jobs are run on the server on

Printing Layouts and Reports 491

Printing layouts and reports for distribution is
In this chapter an effective way to communicate project data.
This chapter discusses how to define page
Defining Page Settings
settings (such as page orientation, margins,
Previewing Layouts and Reports
and header/footer settings), preview layouts/
reports, and print them (including how to
Publishing Layouts and Reports
in HTML Format convert them to Web reports).

Defining Page Settings

You can customize printed layouts and reports in a number of ways. For
example, customize header and footer settings and change margins for the
printed page.
Define page settings From the Print Preview window, click the Page
Setup button. Click the Page tab to set orientation, scaling, and paper size.
Portrait orientation prints

vertically on the page;
landscape orientation prints
horizontally on the page.
To increase or reduce the
size of the printed layout/
report, specify a percentage
Use Print Preview to see the
in the Adjust To field. To
number of pages the layout
increase or reduce the
will span. Choose this option
number of pages to be
to compress spacing by
printed horizontally and
specifying the number of
vertically, choose Fit to, then
pages. This option is
specify a value in the Pages
available for layouts only.
Wide field.

Set page margins Click the Margins tab, then specify the values for
each margin.
Add headers and footers You can customize the header and footer.
You can also insert a graphic, such as your company logo, in the header or
footer. Click the Header or Footer tab.
Type or select the amount of sections Select when you want to Select the height of
to divide the header or footer into. print the header/footer. the header/footer.
Click to add a logo to

the selected section.
Click to change the font,

then specify font
settings and click OK.
In the Text/Logo section,

add text to the header or
footer by typing directly in
the selected tab. Do not
modify any text between
square brackets [ ].
Select a global variable and

click Add. Global variables
include portfolio properties
(earliest project start, earliest
data date, and so on).

In the Define Header/Footer section, mark the Show Section Divider

Lines checkbox to display lines between each section of the header or
footer. Define the values you want to insert in the header or footer. Choose
Text/Logo to add text variables or a logo, such as your company logo.
Choose Revision Box to allow space in the header/footer to be able to
enter dates, approvals, and revision information. If displaying the Gantt
Chart in your layout, you can choose to display the Gantt Chart Legend in
the header or footer.
Add a logo to a header or footer Click the Header or Footer tab, in

the Define header/footer section, choose Text/Logo for the selected
section. In the Add Text section, click the Picture button. Click the
Browse button in the Picture dialog box, then select a filename and click
Open. Specify the layout and spacing options and click OK. The logo
image is displayed in the Header or Footer Sample area.
If you change the report page setup from the Print Preview
dialog box, the changes will be applied only to the current
printing. To save changes to the report page setup
permanently, make the changes from the Properties palette in
the Report Editor.

Specify layout options Use the Options tab to select the layout areas
and timeframe to include in the printed layout.
Mark this checkbox if you

want each group printed on
its own page. For example,
you may want to group
your activities by resource
and distribute a printout to
each individual.
The Options tab contains different options when printing

reports.

Previewing Layouts and Reports

The Print Preview option enables you to review the layout or report before
sending it to a printer.
Open Print Preview To preview a layout, display the layout in the

Activities window, then choose File, Print Preview. To preview a report,
in the Reports window, select the report you want to preview, then click
Run Report. Choose Print Preview, then click OK.
Use these buttons to move to the beginning of Click to zoom in

the layout/report, scroll through it one page at a and out of the
time, or move to the end of the layout/report. displayed page.
Click to select the default

printer, paper size, and
orientation.
When you are satisfied

with the look of the
layout/report, click to
print it.
The status bar indicates the size at which the layout/report is

currently magnified, the number of the page that is currently
displayed, and the total number of pages in the layout/report.
As you move your mouse over the Print Preview window, the pointer
changes to a magnifying glass. Click the Zoom In button in the toolbar to
zoom in on details and the Zoom Out button to zoom back out.


You can print layouts and reports by sending them directly to a printer,
publishing them as HTML files, or printing them to ASCII text files
(reports only).
Print a layout To send a layout directly to your printer, open the layout
you want to print, then choose File, Print. You can also click the Print
button from the Print Preview window.
Print a report From the Reports window, select the name of the report
you want to print. Click Run Report.
3 Click to
1 Select the destination for run the
the report. For an ASCII report.
text file, you can also
specify the character to
use to separate fields and
text.
2 For HTML and ASCII files,
specify a name and
location for the saved file.
You can also publish a report to an HTML file through Print

Preview. For more information, see “Publishing Layouts and
Reports in HTML Format” on page 499.

Selecting a Printer
You can select a printer, other than the current default for the operating
system, to print your layouts and reports. The printer settings will remain
the same until you log out. Choose, File, Print Setup.
Click to adjust the

features and
settings provided
by the selected
printer.

Publishing Layouts and Reports in HTML Format

Use Print Preview to publish layouts and reports as HTML files and post
them to a Web site to share with other project team members.
1 Click the Publish button.
2 Select the drive and

folder where the file
should be stored.
3 Type a name for the file. 4 Click Save.

The layout/report opens in your Web browser.

Publishing a Project on the World Wide Web 501
Publishing a Project on the World

Wide Web
To share project data, you can publish project
In this chapter plans in HTML format using the Project Web
Site Publisher. This chapter describes how to
Project Web Site Overview
publish project data to a Web site in HTML
Publishing a Project Web Site
format, customize the appearance of the Web
Customizing the Appearance of a
Project Web Site pages on the project Web site, and publish
Publishing Activity and Tracking activity and tracking layouts as HTML pages.
Layouts

Project Web Site Overview

To share project data between company offices local or worldwide,
publish project plans to a project Web site that can be accessed by anyone
via the World Wide Web or only employees on your office intranet. Using
a Web browser, users can then view project documents that contain
hypertext links, or jumps, to other pages in the structure, allowing them to
move between projects and reports and from page to page within a report.
A project Web site enables users to browse a project plan at a high level
and then quickly view more detailed information about specific project
data. The Project Web Site layout is divided into three panes.
The upper pane contains a navigation toolbar for quick

access to the various sections of the Web site.
Select the data to ...and the details for the

view in the left, or selected element are
Navigation, pane... displayed in the right pane.

Navigate a project Web site using the project’s work breakdown structure
(WBS), resource hierarchy, roles, work products and documents outline,
activity codes, issues, and risks. For example, select a resource in the left
pane and view the resource’s information and activity assignments in the
right pane. Similarly, select a work product or document and view the
document’s details and WBS and activity assignments. The level of
detailed information that can be viewed depends on the information you
choose to publish.
Also view reports, activity layouts, and tracking layouts in the project Web
site. The list of reports or layouts appears in the left pane, and the selected
report or layout is displayed in the right pane.
System requirements Refer to the Administrator’s Guide for system

requirements for your Web server.
Netscape Navigator/ Project Web sites use PNG files to publish some graphic
Communicator 4.5 and images, such as layouts. Ensure that your Web server’s MIME
earlier Web browsers may type configuration is set to identify the PNG file type as image/
not expand PNG files png. In the Windows NT Explorer window, choose View,
properly. Other areas of Options, and click the File Types tab. Scroll down to view the
the project Web site can be settings for PNG files. If the content type (MIME) is not set to
viewed without difficulty image/png, select PNG Image from the list of types, then click
using these Web browsers. Edit and change the setting.

Publishing a Project Web Site

When publishing a project Web site, you control the level of detail
published, as well as the project reports and layouts included.
Publish a project Web site Open the project you want to publish.
Choose Tools, Publish, Project Web Site.
Click the General tab to specify general information about the Web site.
The Web site name and

description appear on
the Web site opening (or
splash) screen.
Type the location of the

Web site files. Choose a
folder that contains no
existing files.
Mark to preview the Web

site in your Web browser
after creating the files.
Click the Topics tab to determine the detailed data to publish to the Web
site. If all checkboxes are cleared, only WBS data are published. Mark the
checkbox next to each type of information to include.
Move the mouse over a

checkbox to view a
description of it here.

Click the Graphics tab to select existing activity and tracking layouts to
publish to the project’s Web site. Define activity layouts in the Activities
window and tracking layouts in the Tracking window.
Mark to include the selected

activity and tracking layouts
on the project’s Web site.
Click the Reports tab to select existing reports to publish to the project’s
Web site. Reports are defined in the Reports window.
Mark to include the reports

on the project’s Web site.
Click Publish to create the project Web site.

Customizing the Appearance of a Project Web Site

Use the standard, or default, Web site scheme to build your project Web
site; you can also customize the scheme or create a new scheme.
Customize a Web site scheme Choose Tools, Publish, Project Web

Site. Click the General tab, then click Edit Scheme. Select a Web site
element from the Item field and modify its settings. Click OK.
Click to specify the

Web site icon...
...then select the icon

file and location.
You may want to create a copy of the default scheme and then
make your changes to the copy. Click Save As, then type a new
name.

Publishing Activity and Tracking Layouts

You can also save individual activity and tracking layouts as HTML files,
which can be posted to a Web site or your corporate intranet. These
layouts are not linked to any project Web site that you may have created
previously.
For activity layouts:

■ The timescale begins on the date defined by the selected layout.
■ The columns displayed in the Web pages are defined by the selected
layout.
■ Activity layouts are not interactive. They are a picture of your project
only.
For tracking layouts:

■ The elements displayed in the Web pages are defined by the selected
layout.
■ Tracking layouts are not interactive. They are a picture of your project
only.
Publish an activity layout Choose Tools, Publish, Activity Layouts.

Select the layout and click the Select button. Specify the location and
name of the HTML file to which the layout will be saved. Click Open.

Publish a tracking layout Choose Tools, Publish, Tracking Layouts.

Select the layout and click the Select button. Specify the location and
name of the HTML file to which the layout will be saved. Click Open.
If you clear the Include in Project Web Site checkbox in the

Graphics tab of the Publish Project Web Site window, when the
Web site is published, activity and tracking layouts are saved as
HTML files without being linked to the project Web site.

Linking the Project Management and Contract Manager Modules 509
Linking the Project Management and

Contract Manager Modules
Primavera’s Contract Manager module
In this chapter (formerly known as Expedition) is a contract
management and project administration tool.
Linking the Project Management
Module to Contract Manager From the Project Management module, you
Linking a Project Management can set up access to Contract Manager and
Project to a Contract Manager create a link to import Contract Manager data
Project
(version 8.5 or later) to update schedule dates,
Importing Contract Manager Data
to a Project Management Module cost information, the Activity Codes
Project dictionary, and the Costs Accounts dictionary.
You can also view Contract Manager
documents associated with your project’s
activities and, if your organization is set up to
access Contract Manager version 9.0 or higher,
you can view project-level Contract Manager
information in the Primavera Web application.
This chapter explains how to link the Project

Management and Contract Manager modules,
link projects, and import data.

Linking the Project Management Module to Contract

Manager
To connect the Project To set up access to Contract Manager data, you must first create a link
Management module to a between the Project Management module and Contract Manager (formerly
Contract Manager HTTPS://
URL, the SSL library must be known as Expedition).
loaded. Refer to the
“readme.txt” file located in Link to Contract Manager Use the Admin Preferences dialog box to
the
\Documentation\Technical set up a link with Contract Manager and choose the Contract Manager
Documentation\Connect P6 product version you are connecting to. Choose Admin, Admin
to a Contral Manager HTTPS Preferences, then click the Options tab. Mark the Enable Link to Contract
URL folder of Primavera
installation CD3. Manager Module checkbox, then choose the version you are connecting
to. Click Close.
If connecting to Contract
Manager 9.x or higher, type
the URL and port number to
the Contract Manager Web
server.
When connecting to Contract Manager 9.x and higher For http, the
default port number is 80, but you do not have to enter it. If you are not
going to use port 80, you must enter the port number (or name or IP
address). For example: http://10.12.14.168:110.
For https, the default port number is 443. You must always enter the port
number, including the default port number, at the end of the URL. For
example: https://10.12.14.189:443.

To create a link between the Project Management and Contract

Manager modules, you must have the required security
privilege, Edit Admin Preferences and Categories.

Linking a Project Management Project to a Contract

Manager Project
Once the link between the Project Management and Contract Manager
modules is established, you can then create a link from your project to an
Contract Manager project to enable users to import and view Contract
Manager data in the Project Management module. If you are connecting to
Contract Manager version 9.x or higher, creating a link between your
project and a Contract Manager project additionally enables users to view
Contract Manager data in Project Workspace portlets in the Primavera’s
Web application. Connecting to version 9.x or higher also enables users to
launch Contract Manager from the Primavera Web application.
Link to a Contract Manager Project Choose Enterprise, Projects,

then display project details. Select the project to which you want to link a
Contract Manager project. If the Contract Manager tab is not displayed,
right click on a tab at the bottom (for example, General) to display the
Project Details dialog box, and move Contract Manager into the Display
Tabs section. On the Contract Manager tab, mark the 'Allow this project to
link with a Contract Manager Project' checkbox. Click the browse button
(in version 9.5 and above) to the right of the Group Name:Project Name
field to choose the Contract Manager project to which you want to link
your project.
If you are connecting to Contract Manager version 8.5

(Expedition), the Group Name and Project Name appear as
separate fields, as shown in the following image. Type the name
of the Contract Manager database and project you want to link
to your project.
Choose whether users are

prompted for a user login
and password when
retrieving Contract Manager
data. If you choose for users
to log in without being
prompted, type a login name
and password.
To link your project to a Contract Manager project, you must

have the project privilege, Edit Contract Manager Link.

If an identical username and password do not already exist in both

Contract Manager and the Project Management module, you will be
prompted to enter the Contract Manager Name and Password. If an
identical username and password already exist in both Contract Manager
and Project Management module, the Select Project Manager Project
popup menu will display for you to select the project.
From Contract Manager, you can additionally create a link from

a Contract Manager project to a Project Management project
schedule. A link from within Contract Manager enables you to
review dates from the project schedule to see how schedule
delays or other factors affect the project. For more information
on creating a link from Contract Manager, please refer to the
Contract Manager User’s Guide.

Importing Contract Manager Data to a Project

Management Module Project
For information on importing After linking the Project Management and Contract Manager modules,
and exporting projects to/ and linking a Project Management project to a Contract Manager project,
from XER, Microsoft Project,
Microsoft Excel, P3, and you can import specific types of Contract Manager data to the Project
Primavera Contractor, refer to Management module.
the Help or to the Primavera
Administrator’s Guide
Importing Contract Manager data To import Contract Manager
project data, open the Project Management project to which you want to
import data. Choose File, Import from Contract Manager. Select the types
of schedule, cost, and dictionary data you want to import. Click Import.
Before data is imported, the Contract Manager Import Report is displayed

listing all the information that will be imported to your project. Click
Commit Changes to import the data. To save the report to a log file, click
Yes and specify a filename and location. Click Close. Click Yes to save
any changes you made to the import settings or No to discard changes.
Import considerations This section details how the Project

Management module imports data from Contract Manager.
■ Global activity codes The Spec Section code is available to all

projects in the Project Management module. For Contract Manager
8.54 (Expedition) data, this activity code is referred to as SPCS.

■ Project activity codes The Responsibility, Contracts, Bid Package,

and Submittal activity codes are imported as project activity codes.
For Contract Manager 8.54 (Expedition) data, these activity codes are
referred to as RESP, CNTR, BIDP, and ISSB, respectively.
The Responsibility code is imported from the Contacts subsection of
the Project Information section. The Abbreviation and Company
Name columns are used as the code value and description, respec-
tively.
The Contracts code is imported from the Contracts and Purchase
Orders subsections of the Contract Information section. The No. and
Description columns are used as the code value and description,
respectively.
When you import the Submittal Activity code, the activity is assigned
the code value Yes to indicate that the item is a submittal.
■ How activity codes are imported If the code or value does not exist,
the imported code or value is added to the dictionary.
If the code exists but the value does not, the value is added to the
dictionary.
If the code and value exist, but the value assigned to the activity does
not match the imported value, the value on the activity is overwritten.
If the activity does not exist, it is created.
■ Cost accounts Cost codes in Contract Manager are imported to the

Cost Accounts dictionary. The Cost Accounts dictionary is available
to all projects in the Project Management module. All items in the
Cost Worksheet are imported as cost accounts and placed under a root
node having the same name as the imported Contract Manager
project. The Cost Code and Title columns are imported as the Cost
Account ID and Cost Account Name, respectively.
■ Cost information Cost information from Contract Manager is
imported as Expenses for activities.

517
Index
A displaying Activity Details for assignments 218
Access rights 84 dissolve 215
Accrual types, expenses 254, 256 duration
Active entering 209
project status 84, 90 type 301
WBS elements 141 units, and resource units/time,
Activities synchronizing 301
adding 203 entering
expenses to 230 at completion duration estimate 210
in Activity Network 204 start and finish dates for 210
steps to 235 expected finish date 210
assigning float
activity codes to 230 free 211
notes to 232 total 211
resources to by role 220 labor units 211
auto compute actuals, setting 292 layouts, publishing to Web site 507
calendar, specifying 208 level of effort type 206
codes 193–200 milestone type 206
assigning 230 notebook topics 45
converting project to global 197 overview 202
creating primary resource 208
prioritizing for leveling 319
EPS 195
profile 22
global 194 relationships, establishing 213
project 196 resource dependent type 206
values 196 resources and roles, assigning 219
grouping and summarizing by 198 responsible OBS 208
values, creating global 194 resume 303
cost 211 selecting WBS element for 208
critical 95 setting default type 93
dates 315, 316 Spreadsheet 21
defining step templates
general information for 205 assigning to activities 239
schedule information for 209 creating 237
Details 21, 411 steps 110, 235
assigning relationships using 216 converting to template 238
including/excluding tabs 205 suspend 303
modifying tabs 218 Table 21, 409
grouping and summarizing using codes 170
518 Index
using to add activities 202–203 Assignment costs

task dependent type 206 calculating with time-varying resource rates 321
type, identifying 206 recalculating for roles 321
update with Assignments, manually planning 224, 323
duration percent complete type 298 Assistance options, setting 55
physical percent complete type 298 Auto compute actuals 286
units percent complete type 299 setting
updating by activity 292
manually 297 by resource 293
progress for all 292 for expenses 293
Usage Profile 411 Averaging timescale 433
customizing 451
formatting 451 B
modifying 446 Backward pass 311
Usage Spreadsheet 409 Bar Chart tracking layout 367
WBS summary type 206 Bars
Activity Details 21 adding and deleting 434
Activity Network 21, 410 current 170
adding activities in 202, 204 necking 436
box template summary 170–171, 199
choosing 443 timescale, changing 435
customizing 443 user-defined date fields 178
copying from another layout 445 Baselines
formatting layout 442, 444 columns, showing comparison with current project
opening saved layout 445 in layout 278
saving 445 compare using Schedule Comparison 377
activity Owner 219, 286, 287 comparing 276
Activity step templates displaying activity bars 278
assigning to activities 239 editing 278
creating 237 managing 271–278
Activity Table 21 modifying 278
Activity Usage Profile 22 saving 272
Activity Usage Spreadsheet 21 schedules, comparing with current 278
Actual types 40
finish date 315 update with new data 280
start date 315 Benefit plan 158
units, calculating automatically 114, 257 Borders, adding to text cells in reports 473
Actual dates Budget
setting for updated activities 291 changes
Administration 29–45 approved status 159
Administrative not approved status 159
categories 40 pending status 159
preferences 30 tracking 159
Anticipated creating a layout for budget and variance
finish date 91, 140 comparison 164
start date 91, 140 defining 151–164
Apply actuals 305 distributing to projects 152
setting as a job service 306 establishing 155
Approved status for budget changes 159 fund share percentage 162
Arithmetic operators 245 recalculating based on changes 159
Assign button 169 setting up monthly spending plan 157
Assigning estimation weights to activities 150 summary 160
Assigning estimation weights to WBS elements 149 top-down 152
Index 519
tracking and analyzing 164 Complexity, projects 79

using WBS 134 Concatenation 245
Budgeted Constraint, date 316
cost Contract Manager module
expense 254 importing data from 514
percent of threshold 353 link to Project Management module 509
Cost accounts 247–260
copying and pasting 251
C creating 249
Calendars cutting and pasting 252
applying exceptions 188 deleting 251
changing workweek hours 188 editing 250
creating 183–189 overview 248
deleting 189 replacement, specifying 251
global 114, 184 setting default for project 93, 250
modifying 186 Cost managers 7
project, creating 185 Cost performance index threshold 353
resource 114, 185 Costs
setting default 93 analyzing 258, 262
yearly 187 at completion 212
Categories information, entering 253
document 42 specifying amounts for expenses 257
expense 41, 255–256 summary calculation, specifying time interval for
notebook 45 spreadsheet displays 38
risk 44 Critical activities, setting maximum float to detect 95
units of measure 45 Critical path method scheduling technique 311
work products 42 Currency
Cell borders 473 adding view 47
Cells associating with resources 114
copying (or cutting) and pasting 476 defining 46
removing from reports 476 selecting view 53
Check-in/check-out projects 397–404 setting base 47
Close button 169 showing/hiding 53
Codes Curtain attachment
activity 193–200 manually shifting 440
maximum number of characters for, specifying 34 Custom color, defining 474
overhead 43 Custom fields
project 73, 92, 165–173 indicators 180
resource 119 Custom text cells 469
separator 30 adding to reports 470
Columns identifying in the report canvas 464
adding 429 Customer support xx
choosing for timesheets 296
colors, changing 430
copying format from another layout 429 D
fonts, changing 430 Data date 91, 286
indicators, view in 182 dragging line to change 288
modifying 428 selecting for scheduling 305
removing 429 selecting with Update Progress 290
row height, changing 430 updating activities using 292
titles, editing 429 Data sources
user preference 57 adding to reports 465, 466
Command bar 18 defining layout options for 467
Comparing projects and baselines 377 embedding 466
520 Index
identifying in the report canvas 464 adding 360

Database administrator 5 assigning to WBS elements and activities 363
Dates categories 42, 234
actual deleting records 361
finish 315 number for expense 256
start 315 opening 362
anticipated specifying location references 362
finish 91, 140 status 43
start 91, 140 viewing 360
constraint 316 Duration
early at completion estimate, entering 210
finish 311, 315 default 30, 209
entering 209
start 311, 315
percent complete type 297
entering start and finish for activities 210 percent of planned 354
expected finish 210, 316 planned 209
external early start 316 remaining 209, 298
External late finish 316 synchronizing with units and resource units/
finish 315 time 301
forecast start 311 types 93, 206, 301
formatting 52
late
finish 311, 315 E
start 311, 315 Early
planned finish date 311, 315
finish 315 start date 311, 315
start 315 Earned value
remaining calculating using weighted WBS milestones 143,
finish 315 144
start 315 choosing completion percentage method for
calculating 147
resume 316
cost 146
start 315
defining defaults 37
suspend 316
defining settings for WBS elements 146
update actual 298
performance, measuring using 258
Decimals, showing/hiding 53
using a baseline, choosing value for
Default
calculating 279
duration 30, 209
E-mail
global calendar 184
sending about an issue 346
hours in each timeperiod 35
transferring information 54
project cost account 250
Endpoints, modifying 436
scheduling settings 311
Enterprise project structure
startup window, setting 56
access and privileges to 72
tracking layouts 348, 358
adding projects to 77
Default settings 30
defining details 89
Details tabs, including/excluding 89, 139, 169
funding 162
Directory bar 18
linking projects through activity relationships 213
displaying 19
module-wide parameters and values, setting 29
Displaying the directory bar 19
moving around in 69
Displaying the navigation bar 20
nodes
Dissolve activities 215
adding 75
Distributed job services 328
Documentation, using xvii deleting 87
Documents 234, 359–363 leveling priority 90
Index 521
OBS element for 90, 98 by project code 172

opening 84 combining 426
root 77 creating, user-defined 424
setting budget estimates for 152 deleting 373
spending plan 153, 157 user-defined 425
overview 68 global 423
project codes 166 nesting criteria 424
WBS 134 removing 425
EPS risks 341
activity codes, creating 195 selecting 423
Estimate project complexity 79 startup 63
Estimate-to-complete (ETC), techniques for timesheets by status 295
calculating 147 user-defined, creating 424
Exceptions, applying to calendar 188 using project status 84
Exchange rate 46 Financial periods
Exclusive access 84 in columns 57
Expected finish date 210, 316 user preference 57
Expenses 247–260 Finish date 315, 354
accrual types 254, 256 Finish to finish relationship 213
actual cost 254 Finish to start relationship 213
adding 230, 253 Fiscal year, setting month for start of 95
assignment, changing 255 Float
auto compute actuals, setting for 293 calculating multiple float paths 312
budgeted free 211, 311, 355
cost 230, 254 total 211, 311, 356
Forecast start date 311
calculating actual and remaining units
Forward pass 311
automatically 257
Free float 211, 311, 355
categories 41, 255–256
Function points
costs, specifying 257
calculating unadjusted values 264
customizing columns in Activity Details 230
using to perform top-down estimations 263
details, defining 256
Funding
document number 256
defining sources 161
overview 248
viewing total 162
planned
Future period bucket planning 224
cost 230, 254
create layout 226
price/unit 254 display spreadsheet fields 225
summary report 258 guidelines 225
Export, layout 369, 415 manually enter values 229
Exposure values, calculating 338 manually update values 323
External early start date 316 updating assignment data 323
External late finish date 316 Future periods, manually planning 224, 323
F G
Feedback, viewing 232 Gantt Chart 21, 410
Field applying settings from another layout 435
data cells 469 background lines, changing 439
adding to reports 470 bar label, changing 436
identifying in the report canvas 464 bars, formatting 434
title cells 469 bars, necking 436
adding to reports 470 creating and viewing relationships in 215
identifying in the report canvas 464 curtain attachments, displaying 440
Filter 417–426 formatting using user-defined dates 178
522 Index
grouping by code 170 specifying maximum number of characters for 34

legend, showing or hiding 437 Image cells
notebook items, displaying 436 adding
notebook items, setting default size 437 HTML links to 475
summarizing using codes 170 to reports 470
text attachments, displaying 441 defining
timescale, changing 431 HTML settings for 471
Global layout options for 471
activity codes 193 Import
calendar 114, 184 layout 369, 415
change project 78
using indicators 182 Inactive
filters 423 project status 84, 90
reports 457 WBS elements 141
Global change 242 Indicators, working with 180
Arithmetic operators 245 Issue navigator 344, 349
modifying statement 243 Issues
text fields, combining 245 adding 344
using arithmetic with 245 default tracking layouts for 348, 358
using with user-defined fields 178 defining details for 345
Group 417–426 sending e-mail about 346
band, customizing appearance of 171 viewing history of 347
by activity codes 198
by hierarchical item 420
by project code 170 J
by WBS path 138 Job service 306, 313, 327, 331, 490
customizing 419 distributed 328
using interval 420 non-distributed 327, 331
using resource codes 121
L
H Labor units 211
Headers/footers, adding 493 Lag time 213–216
Hierarchies Language, setting 17
activity codes 194 Late
cost account 248 finish date 311, 315
EPS 77 start date 311, 315
funding 161 Layouts
OBS 98, 100, 106 Activity
project code 166 Details 411
resource 111 Network 202, 410, 442
roles 122 Table 202, 409
specifying maximum number of levels 33 Usage Profile 411
WBS 133 Usage Spreadsheet 409
Hours, defining default for timeperiod 35
adding 414
HTML 499
budget and variance comparison 164
editing features 92, 233, 337
create for future period bucket planning 226
links, adding to image or text cells 475
customizing 341, 427–453
settings, defining for image cells 471
exporting 415
Gantt Chart 410
I grouping and summarizing by codes 198
ID headers/footers, adding 493
lengths 34 HTML format 499
Index 523
importing 415 importing methodologies 79–83

opening 414 overview xiv
sample 25 Microsoft Excel, copying resource spreadsheet data
overview 21 to 416
page settings, defining 492 Milestones
previewing 496 activities 206
publishing to project Web site 502, 505, 507 WBS 143
Resource Usage MSP-managed projects xvi
Profile 412 Multiple items, selecting 20
Spreadsheet 412
sample, opening 25 N
saving 414 Navigation bar 18, 20
Trace Logic 413 Network administrator 5
tracking 365–373 Nodes
assigning to thresholds 358 adding to EPS 75
creating 366 OBS 99, 103
default for issues 348, 358 Nonlabor units 211
filtering 372 Not approved status for budget changes 159
global 368 Notebook
types 408 EPS node and project 92
Left margin, using in Report Editor 463 topics 45, 232
Legend Notes
printing 495 assigning to activities 232
showing or hiding in Gantt Chart 437 resources, entering for 116
Level 283–320
priorities, setting 90, 319 O
setting resource availability limits to 116
Level of effort activities 206 OBS
Limits chart 101
setting resource availability 115 creating and adding elements 103
setting role availability 125 deleting element 107
using for delayed resource start 116 editing elements 106
Line cells element assigned to activity 208
adding to reports 472 establishing for EPS node/project 90
defining layout options for 472 hierarchy 106
Location references for documents 362 identifying when adding a new project 77
Log file, creating for tasks 56 responsible 72
Login name root 75, 100, 103
entering 14 security profile for 98, 104
Timesheets 117 setting up 97–107
Logo table 102
adding to a header or footer 494 viewing 101, 104
Opening the module 14
Operations executive 6, 69
M Options bar 23
Mail preferences, setting 54 Organizational breakdown structure. See OBS.
Margins, setting 493 Out-of-sequence activities, updating 286
Material resource 114 Overhead codes 43
Menu Overtime units 299
bar 18 Overview 8–12
shortcuts 20
Methodology Management module
524 Index
P layouts 497
Page settings, defining 492 legend 495
Password page settings, defining 492
changing 58 reports 497
entering 14 Prior experience, using to perform top-down
Pending status for budget changes 159 estimations 262
Percent complete Priority
based on activity steps 96 definitions for leveling 320
calculating using weighted steps 236 leveling number 318
calculation types 207, 297 Private location reference, entering 362
estimating for updated activities 291 Profiles
physical 110, 236 Activity
setting default type 93 Cost 260
types 210 Usage 411, 451
Performance percent complete, calculating using data options, setting 59
weighted WBS milestones 143, 144 Resource Usage 412, 450
Physical percent complete 110, 298 timescale, changing 431
Planned Program manager 6, 69
cost Progress
expense 254 estimating 286
percent of threshold 353 See Update.
duration Progress Spotlight 288
entering 209 Project Architect Wizard 79–83
Project codes 73, 165–173
finish date 315
adding values to 167
project status 90
assigning
start date 91, 315
to projects 92
WBS elements 141
Planned duration values 169
percent of threshold 354 chart 168
PLF files 369 defining 167
PNG files 503 filtering by 172
Portfolios grouping by 170
setting access to 16 scoring 168
PPM. See Project Portfolio Management summarizing by 171
Predecessor relationship 216 weighted 168
Preserve early and late dates during leveling 319 Project complexity 79
Preview Project controls coordinator 6, 69
layouts 496 Project Management
reports 496 process overview 8
Price per unit 291 roles 5
Price/time Project Management module
for activities without resources 96 overview xiv
Price/unit Project manager 6, 12, 69
expense cost 254 Project Portfolio Management 4
setting 116 Project Portfolios
Primary selecting 15
resources 110, 208, 210, 232 Project Web site
role 127 adding
Primavera proprietary format 398 layouts 505
Primavera Web application, overview xv reports 505
Print Preview 496 customizing appearance 506
Printing overview 502
headers/footers 493 PNG file issues 503
Index 525
publishing 504 defining 39

schemes 506 Recalculate Resource Costs 321
system requirements 503 Recipient
ProjectLink adding to e-mail list 346
overview xvi removing from e-mail list 346
Projects Reflection 287
access rights to 84, 98 creating 393
activity codes, creating 196 guidelines 396
adding to EPS 77 merging changes 395
assigning relationships between 216 overview 392
check-in/check-out 397–404 previewing and choosing changes 394
coding 167 Relationships
compare using Schedule Comparison 377 assigning
controlling 11 between projects 216
cost accounts 247–260 using Activity Details 216
creating using Project Architect Wizard 79 creating in Gantt Chart or Activity Network 215
defining EPS details 89 deleting 215
deleting 87 establishing 213
duration, setting 50 lines, showing or hiding in Gantt Chart 437
end date 91 modifying 215
exclusive access to 84 types and lag 213
expenses 247–260 viewing in Gantt Chart 214
importing 78 Remaining
leveling priority 90 duration, entering 209, 298
linking with activity relationships 213 finish date 315
maintaining document library 359–363 start date 315
managing 12 units, calculating automatically 257
managing remotely 398 Remaining duration
OBS element for 90 estimating for updated activities 291
opening 70, 84 Report canvas, using in Report Editor 463
planned start date 91 Report Editor
planning overview 11 left margin, using the 463
publishing on the World Wide Web 501–508 ruler, using the 463
reflections 391 Reports
scheduling 305–311 adding
spending plan 153, 157 background images to 476
status 84, 90 borders to text cells in 473
summarizing 74, 171, 326 data sources to 465, 466
time units, setting 50
field title or field data cells to 470
tracking 365–373
updating 283–320 image cells to 470
viewing document library 360 line cells to 472
Public location reference, entering 362 rows to 465, 468
Publishing project Web site 502, 504 variable or custom text cells to 470
batch
setting as a job service 490
Q setting up 489
Quantity summary calculation, specifying time
creating with Report Wizard 458, 460
interval for spreadsheet displays 38
customizing 455–489
defining defaults 37
R editor 456
Rate source 222 expenses summary 258
Rate type 322 global 457
Rate types variables, adding 493
526 Index
groups 488 to activities by role 220

headers/footers, adding 493 assignment level for summarization in
HTML format 499 spreadsheets 38
indicators, view in 182 auto compute actuals, setting 293
modifying 460 availability, or standard rate 114
opening 457 breakdown structure (RBS) 111
overview 456 calendar 114
page settings, defining 492 choosing as rate source 222
previewing 496 codes 119, 120
removing customizing columns in Activity Details 219
background images from 476 defining 109–128
cells from 476 dependent activities 206
rows from 468 hierarchy 111
Report Editor, working with 463 labor classification 114
sorting 477 leveling 317–318
user-defined fields, viewing in 178 overview 110
wizard 456 price/unit 116
Resource primary 110, 208, 210, 232
price per unit 291 recalculating costs 321
updating 291 replacing assignments 219
Resource assignments setting
calculating the units, duration, and units/time limits for 115
based on activity duration type 62 user preferences for analysis 450
choosing defaults for 62 shifts 118
grouping and sorting 323 Timesheets settings for 117
manually planning 224 units and prices 115
manually updating 323 units/time 116, 301
preserving the units, duration, and units/time Usage
for 62 Profile 22, 412, 446, 447, 450
viewing 323 Spreadsheet 22, 412
Resource Assignments window 223, 416 Stacked Histogram 448
Resource costs, recalculating 321 viewing 111
Resource curves 129 Responsibility list, viewing for OBS 105
assigning to resource or role assignments 223 Responsible manager
deleting 131 WBS 140
modifying 130 See OBS.
removing from a resource or role assignment 223 Resume activity progress 303
Resource rates Resume date 316
calculating costs with multiple 322 Risks
time-varying 321 adding 336
Resource spreadsheet data, copying to Microsoft types 340
Excel 416 calculating
Resource Usage Spreadsheet exposure values 338
display fields for future period bucket
impact 339
planning 225
update future period values 323 customizing layout 341
Resource/cost manager 7, 69 deleting types 340
Resources filtering 341
adding 112 managing 335–341
assigning types 44
roles to 127 Role assignments
choosing defaults for 62
to activities 219
manually planning 224
Index 527
manually updating 323 Setting defaults 30

Roles Shifts
add rates to 124 resource 118
adding 123 Shortcut menus 20
analyzing use 221 Sight lines 439
assigning to activities 219 Software Development Kit xv
assignment level for summarization in Sort 417–426
spreadsheets 38 Spending plan
choosing as rate source 222 EPS nodes and projects 153
defining 109–128 establishing 157
limits tally 157
defining 125 Spotlight activities
setting options for viewing 60 See also Progress Spotlight.
overview 110 Spreadsheets
primary 127 Activity
recalculating costs 321 Cost 259
removing from activities 220 Usage 409
setting up 122 data options, setting 59
units/time 126 Resource Usage 412
using as resource assignments 220 specifying time interval for cost and quantity
viewing 122 summaries 38
Root timescale, changing 431
EPS node 77 Standard categories and values, defining 40
OBS 75, 100 Start date 315
Rows variance threshold 355
adding to reports 465, 468 Start to finish relationship 206, 213
copying (or cutting) and pasting 468 Start to start relationship 206, 213
removing from reports 468 Starting the module 14
Ruler, using in Report Editor 463 Startup
filters 63
options, setting 56
S Status
Sample layouts 25 activity 210
Schedule 283–320 approved for budget changes 159
automatically 313 check-in/check-out 398
backward pass 311 document 43
data date 91 not approved for budget changes 159
defining activity information for 209 pending for budget changes 159
forward pass 311 project 84, 90
performance index threshold 355 work product 43
projects 303–311 Step
setting as a job service 313 adding to activities 235
using forecast start date 311 assigning templates to activities 239
variance converting to template 238
index threshold 356 creating templates manually 237
threshold 355 weights 110
Schedule Comparison Successor relationship 216
compare projects with 375 Summarize
comparison data 384 by activity codes 198–199
overview xv, 376 by project codes 171
SDK. See Primavera Software Development Kit. how the module summarizes data 332
Security profiles associated with OBS elements 104 manually 327
528 Index
projects 74, 94, 171 overview xv

setting as a job service 327 Toolbars 18
to WBS level 135 Top-down budgeting 152
using resource codes 121 Top-down Estimation 148
Summary Top-down estimation
bars 170–171, 199 applying 265
budget 160 applying saved estimations 266
expenses report 258 deleting 267
Suspend activity progress 303 using function points 263
Suspend date 316 using prior experience 262
viewing 266
Total Degree of Influence (TDI) 265
T Total float 211, 311, 356
Tabs, modifying Activity Details 218 Trace Logic 22, 216, 413
Tailoring a methodology 81 Tracking layouts 365–373
Tally assigning to
benefit plan 158 issues 348–349
spending plan 157 thresholds 358
Target. See Baselines.
creating 366
Task dependent activities 206
filtering 372
Team
global 368
leader 7, 69
publishing to Web site 507
member 7, 69
Transferring information through e-mail 54
Technical support xx
Text cells
adding borders to 473 U
adding HTML links to 475 Unadjusted Function Point Count (UFP) 264
changing background color 474 Units
custom, identifying in the report canvas 464 percent complete type 298
defining layout options for 472 regular and actual 299
formatting text in 474 Units/time
identifying in the report canvas 464 formatting 50
Thresholds maximum 116
adding 350 maximum, for roles 126
assigning tracking layout to 358 setting default 114
monitoring 357 Update
parameter definitions 353 activities with
Time duration percent complete type 298
formatting units 50–52 physical percent complete type 298
Timescale units percent complete type 299
changing increment for progress update 288
actual dates 298
Timescale, adjusting 431
analyzing data from 285
Timesheets
baselines 280
approving 295
choosing a method 286
choosing columns for 296
collecting data for 284
default setup options 31
cycle, communicating progress 285
establishing resource settings for 117
determining frequency 285
filtering by status 295
guidelines for process 286
login name, selecting 117
manually 297
setting parameters for 31
process 284
updating activities using 295
progress
Timesheets application
automatically 294
privileges, setting 32
single login name for, setting 117 for all activities 292
Timesheets module 232 progress for spotlighted activities 290
project progress 283–320
Index 529
using Weight
manual and update progress methods activity steps 236
together 291 assigning to WBS 148
using timesheets 295 estimation
User assigning to activity 150
preferences, setting up 49–60 assigning to WBS 149
User defined fields using in top-down estimation 148
using with Global Change 244 WBS milestone 144
User-defined fields Weighted codes 168
indicators, working with 180 What-if
project status 84, 90
WBS elements 142
V Wizards
Variable cells 469 assistance options 55
adding to reports 470 create a new project 77, 79
identifying in the report canvas 464 implementing 55
Variance new activity 55, 203
accounting threshold 353 new resource 55, 112
at completion threshold 356 overview 27
between planned budget and spending plan 157 Project Architect 79–83
comparing current and target dates 278 report 456, 458, 460
cost threshold 354 using 27
creating layout to show budget estimate 164 Work breakdown structure. See WBS.
finish date threshold 354 Work hours
index, cost threshold 354 defining 187
negative 153 Work products 234, 359–363
schedule adding 360
index threshold 356 assigning to WBS elements and activities 363
threshold 355 categories 42
start date threshold 355 categories for 234
Viewing resource assignments 323 deleting records 361
Views, switching between hierarchy and list 23 opening 362
specifying location references 362
W status 43
viewing 360
WBS 133–147 Workspace, overview 18
access rights to levels 98
active elements 141
adding an element to 139 X
category value, assigning 145 XER file format 398
chart, viewing and modifying 136
defining earned value settings for 146
deleting elements 141
editing elements 140
inactive elements 141
level, specifying for summarization 38
milestones 143
planned elements 141
planning and budgeting using 134
responsible manager 140
selecting element for activity 208
viewing 136
what-if elements 142
WBS summary activities 206

Primavera P6 Project Management Refe

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Primavera P6 Project Management Refe

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Primavera P6 Project Management Refe

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Primavera® P6™ Project

Please send your comments to:

Primavera Systems, Inc.

The Apache Software License, Version 1.1

Copyright 1994-2006 Sun Microsystems, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Portions copyright (c) Macromedia, Inc. All rights reserved.

Copyright (c) 2002-2006 JGoodies Karsten Lentzsch. All rights reserved.

Printed in the United States of America

Part 1: Overview and Configuration

Creating a Log of Tasks and

Part 2: Structuring Projects

Tracking Budget Changes................................................................................. 159

Part 3: Implementing the Schedule

Performing Top-down Estimation ..................................................261

Part 4: Updating and Managing the Schedule

Threshold Parameter Definitions ...................................................................... 353

Part 5: Customizing Projects

Customizing Layouts .......................................................................427

Primavera - Project Management

Project Management The Project Management module enables users

The module is ideal for organizations that need to simultaneously manage

The module also provides centralized resource management. This includes

Methodology Management The Methodology Management module

Primavera - Project Management

Timesheets Primavera also provides a Web-based interproject

Primavera’s Web application The Primavera Web application

Primavera Integration API The Primavera Integration API is a Java-

Software Development Kit The Primavera Software Development

Schedule Comparison Schedule Comparison provides the capability

Primavera - Project Management

ProjectLink ProjectLink is a plug-in that enables Microsoft Project

Primavera - Project Management

Using Documentation and Help

Part 1: Overview and Configuration Provides an overview of

Part 2: Structuring Projects Includes the basics about the enterprise

Primavera - Project Management

Part 3: Implementing the Schedule Describes how to define a set of

Part 4: Updating and Managing the Schedule Describes how to

Primavera - Project Management

Part 5: Customizing Projects Describes how to customize layouts

Project Management Help Provides an extensive online help system

Primavera - Project Management

Where to Get Support

Please provide your Primavera product serial number when contacting

Office Time Zone Hours Telephone FAX E-mail Address*

In the United States, Primavera periodically and randomly

All Primavera products are backed by comprehensive support and training.

To request product literature in the United States, contact your local

Primavera - Project Management

Understanding Project Management discusses Primavera’s

Quick Tour introduces key project portfolio management

Defining Administrative Preferences and Categories

The Setting User Preferences chapter explains how to

Understanding Project Management

This chapter provides an overview of PPM, the

Primavera - Project Management

Why Use Project Portfolio Management?

PPM provides comprehensive information on all projects in an

■ Make strategic business decisions

Primavera - Project Management